WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and
lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary,
service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when
servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include
a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products
without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
24 HOURS, 7 DAYS A WEEK AT YOUR SERVICE.
CALL 1-800-521-2779 OR VISIT CHRYSLER.RSAHELP.COM (USA)
CALL 1-800-363-4869 OR VISIT FCA.ROADSIDEAID.COM (CANADA)
SERVICES: Flat Tire Service, Out Of Gas/Fuel Delivery, Battery Jump Assistance, Lockout Service and Towing Service
Please see the Customer Assistance chapter in this Owner’s Manual for further information.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time. The Roadside Assistance Program is subject to restrictions and conditions of use,
that are determined solely by FCA US LLC.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................9
2GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................17
3GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................92
4STARTING AND OPERATING ...............................................................................................125
5MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................225
6SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................295
7IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................349
8SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................369
9TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................438
10CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ....................................................................................................449
11INDEX.............................................................................................................................................455
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
SYMBOLS KEY .....................................................................10
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS ........................................10
CONSUMER INFORMATION —
TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING ................................................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .......................12
SYMBOL GLOSSARY...........................................................12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ....................................................................................17
Key Fob........................................................................ 17
SENTRY KEY ........................................................................20
IGNITION SWITCH ...............................................................20
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .................................... 20
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED (GASOLINE) .................22
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 22
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................................ 22
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation —
If Equipped .................................................................. 23
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped.......... 23
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer
Activation — If Equipped ............................................. 23
Remote Start Abort Message ..................................... 23
REMOTE START— IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL) ........................24
How To Use Remote Start .......................................... 24
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..................24
To Arm The System ..................................................... 24
To Disarm The System................................................ 25
Rearming Of The System............................................ 25
Security System Manual Override.............................. 25
DOORS ................................................................................25
Manual Door Locks......................................................25
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ...............................26
Power Side Steps — If Equipped ................................26
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry (If Equipped) ........................................26
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit — If Equipped .........28
Automatic Door Locks —
If Equipped...................................................................28
Child-Protection Door Lock ........................................28
STEERING WHEEL ..............................................................29
Tilt Steering Column ....................................................29
Heated Steering Wheel —
If Equipped ..................................................................29
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
IF EQUIPPED .......................................................................30
Introducing Voice Recognition ....................................30
Basic Voice Commands...............................................30
Get Started...................................................................30
Additional Information.................................................31
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED ................. 31
Programming The Memory Feature............................31
Linking And Unlinking The Remote
Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory .............................32
Memory Position Recall...............................................32
SEATS...................................................................................32
Manual Front Seat Adjustment —
If Equipped...................................................................32
Power Driver Seat Adjustment —
If Equipped...................................................................33
Heated Seats — If Equipped........................................34
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped...................................35
Head Restraints...........................................................36
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................................... 38
MIRRORS ............................................................................ 38
Inside Rearview Mirror................................................ 38
Illuminated Vanity Mirror —
If Equipped................................................................... 40
Outside Mirrors ........................................................... 41
Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped.................................................... 42
Power Mirrors — If Equipped ...................................... 42
Power Folding Outside Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 43
Automatic Power Folding
Mirrors — If Equipped.................................................. 43
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse —
If Equipped................................................................... 44
Power Convex Mirror Switch —
If Equipped................................................................... 44
Forward Utility Lights and Rear Guidance Lights —
If Equipped................................................................... 44
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................................... 45
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER (HOMELINK®) —
IF EQUIPPED
b
................................................................. 45
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®............ 46
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ....................... 46
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Code Or
Non-Rolling Code Device............................................. 46
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener ......................................................................... 46
Programming HomeLink® To A Miscellaneous
Device .......................................................................... 47
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button........... 47
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .................... 47
Security ........................................................................ 48
Troubleshooting Tips................................................... 48
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
EXTERIOR LIGHTS...............................................................49
Headlight Switch ......................................................... 49
Multifunction Lever..................................................... 49
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped .................................................................. 50
High/Low Beam Switch .............................................. 50
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .................................................................. 50
Flash-To-Pass .............................................................. 50
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......................... 50
Directional LED Headlamp
System — If Equipped ................................................. 51
Parking Lights And Panel Lights................................. 51
Automatic Headlights With Wipers ............................ 51
Headlight Illumination On Approach.......................... 51
Headlight Delay........................................................... 51
Lights-On Reminder .................................................... 51
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................. 52
Turn Signals................................................................. 52
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped............................. 52
Cargo Lights/Trailer Spotter Lights/Trailer
Hitch Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped ............... 52
Battery Saver............................................................... 53
INTERIOR LIGHTS ...............................................................53
Courtesy Lights............................................................ 53
Illuminated Entry ........................................................ 55
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ...........................55
Windshield Wiper Operation....................................... 55
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .......................... 56
CLIMATE CONTROLS .........................................................56
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions......................................................................56
Manual Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions......................................................................59
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)........................61
Climate Voice Recognition —
If Equipped...................................................................61
Operating Tips .............................................................61
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............................62
Storage .........................................................................62
USB/AUX Control .........................................................68
Electrical Power Outlets ..............................................69
Power Inverter — If Equipped .....................................70
Wireless Charging Pad —
If Equipped ..................................................................72
WINDOWS ..........................................................................72
Power Windows ...........................................................72
Automatic Window Features .......................................73
Reset Auto-Up .............................................................73
Window Lockout Switch ..............................................73
Power Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped ..................................................................74
Manual Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped...................................................................74
Wind Buffeting ............................................................74
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED...................................74
Single Pane Power Sunroof ........................................74
HOOD....................................................................................75
To Open The Hood ......................................................75
To Close The Hood.......................................................76
TAILGATE ............................................................................. 76
Opening........................................................................ 76
Closing.......................................................................... 76
Tailgate Removal......................................................... 76
Bed Step — If Equipped............................................... 78
PICKUP BOX ....................................................................... 79
Cargo Camera — If Equipped ...................................... 80
Bed Rail Tie-Down System —
If Equipped .................................................................. 81
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED................................................... 82
Locking And Unlocking RamBox................................. 82
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins....................................... 82
RamBox Safety Warning ............................................. 84
Bed Divider — If Equipped........................................... 85
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED................... 86
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal ............................... 86
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation ........................... 88
Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning ............................... 91
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE.......... 92
Midline Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Gas Engine
b
............................................................ 93
HIGHLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE ........ 94
Highline Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Gas Engine................................................................... 95
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE............ 96
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Gasoline ...................................................................... 97
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ENGINE ....98
Midline Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Diesel Engine............................................................... 99
HIGHLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER —
DIESEL ENGINE ............................................................... 100
Highline Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Diesel Engine............................................................. 101
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL............... 102
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions —
Diesel ......................................................................... 104
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ................................. 104
Instrument Cluster Display Location and
Controls ..................................................................... 104
Oil Life Reset
b
....................................................... 107
Display Menu Items .................................................. 107
Diesel Messages And Warnings — 6.7L Cummins®
Diesel Engine............................................................. 111
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message —
Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped ... 114
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES.............................. 115
Red Warning Lights................................................... 115
Yellow Warning Lights............................................... 117
Yellow Indicator Lights..............................................120
Green Indicator Lights ..............................................122
White Indicator Lights...............................................123
Blue Indicator Lights................................................. 123
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ................. 123
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity............................................................. 124
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...................................................................... 124
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE ENGINE ............ 125
Automatic Transmission........................................... 125
Tip Start Feature ...................................................... 125
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition .............................. 125
Normal Starting Using ENGINE START/STOP
Button ....................................................................... 125
AutoPark — Rotary Shifter and
8-Speed Transmission Only ..................................... 126
Extended Park Starting ............................................ 127
If Engine Fails To Start ............................................ 128
Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ........................................ 128
After Starting............................................................. 128
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE................... 128
Automatic Transmission........................................... 129
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition .............................. 129
Extreme Cold Weather.............................................. 130
Normal Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold
Air Temperature Above 66° F (19° C).................... 130
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold
Air Temperature 0°F To 66°F (–18°C to 19°C) ... 131
Starting Procedure — Engine Manifold
Air Temperature Below 0°F (-18°C) ....................... 132
Starting Fluids........................................................... 132
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE ..................... 133
Cold Weather Precautions ....................................... 133
Engine Idling ............................................................. 134
Noise.......................................................................... 135
Stopping The Engine................................................. 135
Idle Shutdown ........................................................... 136
Programmable Maximum Vehicle Speed ................136
Operating Precautions ..............................................136
Cooling System Tips ..................................................136
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ......................137
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE ...........................................................137
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE.................................................................137
PARKING BRAKE .............................................................138
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE —
ENGINE BRAKING (IF EQUIPPED) ..................................139
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .........................................140
Ignition Park Interlock...............................................140
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System ......................................................................141
8-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ....141
6-Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ....144
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED..........................148
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION .......................................148
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED ....................................................................148
Electronically Shifted Transfer
Case (8-Speed Transmission) —
If Equipped.................................................................148
Electronically Shifted Transfer
Case (6-Speed Transmission) —
If Equipped.................................................................151
Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped .......153
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ..................155
Description.................................................................155
Air Suspension Modes ..............................................155
Instrument Cluster Display Messages .....................156
Operation ...................................................................156
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM —IF EQUIPPED......................... 156
STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM —
POWER WAGON ONLY .................................................... 157
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON,
REBEL OR OFF-ROAD PACKAGE EQUIPPED ONLY...... 158
Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
Characteristics .......................................................... 158
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand...............................159
Crossing Obstacles
(Rocks And Other High Points) ................................. 160
Hill Climbing............................................................... 161
Driving Through Water.............................................. 162
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving............................. 163
Vehicle Recovery....................................................... 164
After Driving Off-Road...............................................165
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL ........................................ 166
WINCH USAGE — IF EQUIPPED ..................................... 166
Things To Know Before Using Your Winch............... 166
Understanding The Features Of Your Winch........... 167
Winch Accessories ................................................... 167
Operating Your Winch ..............................................168
Rigging Techniques .................................................. 172
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING ..................................... 173
Hydraulic Power Steering Fluid Check..................... 173
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED .............. 174
Cruise Control ........................................................... 174
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) .................................. 175
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 183
ParkSense Sensors .................................................. 183
ParkSense Warning Display..................................... 183
ParkSense Display.................................................... 183
Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or
Rear ParkSense........................................................ 186
Service The ParkSense Front/Rear
Park Assist System ................................................... 186
Cleaning The ParkSense System............................. 186
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ................... 186
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ......................................... 187
LaneSense Operation............................................... 187
Turning LaneSense On Or Off .................................. 187
LaneSense Warning Message ................................. 188
Changing LaneSense Status.................................... 189
Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot Assist —
If Equipped................................................................ 189
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA .......................... 190
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED..................................................................... 191
TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED.............................. 196
Trailer Surround View Camera System ................... 196
AUX Camera .............................................................. 199
ENGINE RUNAWAY — DIESEL ENGINE.......................... 199
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE ENGINE ........ 200
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............................... 200
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE .............. 201
Diesel Exhaust Fluid................................................. 201
VEHICLE LOADING ...........................................................203
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) ......................203
Payload ......................................................................203
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)............................204
Tire Size......................................................................204
Rim Size .....................................................................204
Inflation Pressure......................................................204
Curb Weight ...............................................................204
Loading ......................................................................204
TRAILER TOWING .............................................................204
Common Towing Definitions.....................................204
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight .....208
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ..........................208
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................................208
Trailer Reverse Steering
Control — If Equipped................................................209
Towing Requirements ..............................................212
Towing Tips ...............................................................217
SNOWPLOW .....................................................................217
Before Plowing...........................................................217
Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability ............218
Over The Road Operation With
Snowplow Attached...................................................218
Operating Tips ...........................................................218
General Maintenance ...............................................218
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME) .....219
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle...........219
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models....220
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models...220
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
DRIVING TIPS ................................................................... 223
Driving On Slippery Surfaces ................................... 223
Driving Through Water ............................................. 223
Off-Road Driving Tips ................................................ 224
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS ..................................................... 225
CYBERSECURITY ............................................................. 225
UCONNECT SETTINGS ..................................................... 226
Customer Programmable Features ......................... 226
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION............................................ 250
System Overview....................................................... 250
Safety And General Information............................... 252
UCONNECT MODES.......................................................... 253
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................................ 253
Radio Mode .............................................................. 253
Media Mode ............................................................. 261
Phone Mode ............................................................. 263
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED .................................................................... 272
Is My Vehicle Connected? ........................................ 272
Introduction To Connected Vehicle Services .......... 272
Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Services .................................................................... 273
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ ......................................275
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™ Account ............. 284
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS ....................................... 284
Connected Services SOS FAQs —
If Equipped ............................................................... 284
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/Unlock
FAQs .......................................................................... 284
Connected Services Roadside Assistance FAQs ... 285
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs —
If Equipped ............................................................... 285
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs .............. 285
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle Assistance FAQs —
If Equipped ............................................................... 286
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start FAQs ... 286
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights FAQs ....286
Connected Services Account
FAQs — If Equipped................................................... 287
Data Collection & Privacy......................................... 288
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.................. 288
Regulatory And Safety Information.......................... 289
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ................................ 289
Off-Road Pages Status Bar ...................................... 290
Vehicle Dynamics...................................................... 291
Accessory Gauge ...................................................... 292
Pitch & Roll................................................................ 293
Suspension ............................................................... 294
Forward Facing Camera ........................................... 294
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...........................................................295
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................................295
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) ............................296
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ..................296
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................................301
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped ................................................................301
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitigation —
If Equipped.................................................................306
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...............309
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................................315
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ...................315
Important Safety Precautions...................................316
Seat Belt Systems ....................................................316
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ..................323
Child Restraints .........................................................330
SAFETY TIPS .....................................................................346
Transporting Passengers ..........................................346
Transporting Pets .....................................................346
Connected Vehicles...................................................346
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle ...............................................................346
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ..................................................347
Exhaust Gas...............................................................348
Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....................................348
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .................................... 349
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................. 349
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
b
............................... 352
Preparations For Jacking.......................................... 353
Jack Location............................................................. 353
Removal Of Jack And Tools ...................................... 353
Removing The Spare Tire ......................................... 354
Jacking Instructions..................................................355
To Stow The Flat Or Spare ....................................... 358
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools............................... 359
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers —
If Equipped ................................................................ 360
JUMP STARTING .............................................................. 361
Preparations For Jump Start .................................... 361
Jump Starting Procedure.......................................... 361
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE .......................................... 362
6–Speed Transmission ............................................ 362
MANUAL PARK RELEASE................................................ 363
8–Speed Transmission............................................. 363
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ....................................... 364
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ........................................... 365
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...................................... 366
Two-Wheel Drive Models .......................................... 367
Four-Wheel Drive Models ......................................... 367
Emergency Tow Hooks —
If Equipped ................................................................ 368
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM (EARS) ............................................................... 368
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) ..................................... 368
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ................................................ 369
Maintenance Plan — Gasoline Engine..................... 371
Maintenance Plan — Diesel Engine ........................ 373
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................................ 377
6.4L Gasoline Engine .............................................. 377
6.7L Diesel Engine — 6-Speed 68RFE ................... 378
6.7L Diesel Engine — 6-Speed AS69RC HD............ 379
Checking Oil Level .................................................... 380
Adding Washer Fluid ................................................ 380
Maintenance-Free Battery ....................................... 380
Pressure Washing..................................................... 381
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................................ 381
Engine Oil ................................................................. 381
Engine Oil Filter......................................................... 382
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .......................................... 382
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................................. 384
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection............................... 386
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter —
Diesel Engine ........................................................... 387
Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Replacement —
Diesel Engine ............................................................ 388
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Replacement —
Diesel Engine ............................................................ 389
Priming If The Engine Has Run Out Of Fuel —
Diesel Engine ............................................................ 390
Intervention Regeneration Strategy —
Message Process Flow ............................................ 390
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)....................................... 391
Body Lubrication....................................................... 391
Windshield Wiper Blades..........................................391
Exhaust System ........................................................393
Cooling System .........................................................394
Charge Air Cooler — Inter-Cooler .............................396
Brake System ...........................................................397
Automatic Transmission ...........................................397
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level ..........................................................................399
Transfer Case ...........................................................400
Noise Control System Required Maintenance &
Warranty ....................................................................400
Fuses..........................................................................403
Bulb Replacement.....................................................410
TIRES..................................................................................416
Tire Safety Information ............................................416
Tires — General Information .....................................421
Tire Types...................................................................425
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........................................425
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care ....................................427
Snow Traction Devices .............................................427
Tire Rotation Recommendations ............................430
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES ...................................................432
Treadwear..................................................................432
Traction Grades.........................................................432
Temperature Grades.................................................433
STORING THE VEHICLE ...................................................433
BODYWORK ......................................................................433
Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......................433
Body And Underbody Maintenance..........................434
Preserving The Bodywork .........................................434
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTERIORS ....................................................................... 435
Seats And Fabric Parts ............................................. 435
Plastic And Coated Parts .......................................... 436
Leather Surfaces....................................................... 437
Glass Surfaces ......................................................... 437
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)..................... 438
BRAKE SYSTEM ............................................................... 438
Hydraulic Brake Assist —
If Equipped ................................................................ 438
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS .............. 438
Torque Specifications ............................................... 438
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE .............. 440
6.4L Engine ............................................................... 440
Reformulated Gasoline ............................................ 440
Materials Added To Fuel........................................... 440
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends..................................... 441
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles............. 441
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.................. 441
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ................................. 441
Fuel System Cautions............................................... 441
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE..................... 442
Fuel Specifications .................................................. 442
Biodiesel Fuel Requirements................................... 443
FLUID CAPACITIES .......................................................... 444
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .............................. 446
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................ 448
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ................................................................ 449
Prepare For The Appointment.................................. 449
Prepare A List............................................................ 449
Be Reasonable With Requests ................................ 449
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ............................................ 449
Roadside Assistance ................................................ 449
FCA US LLC Customer Center .................................. 451
FCA Canada Customer Care .................................... 451
Mexico........................................................................451
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............................451
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY).....................................451
Service Contract ........................................................451
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................................452
MOPAR® PARTS ..............................................................452
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ......................................452
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C........452
In Canada...................................................................452
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS .......................................453
GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................453
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS.......................454
GENERAL INFORMATION.................................................454
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Ram vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many
passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use
only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure
you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces.
Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
collision
Ú page 223.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers as well as the details of the
terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the text. Therefore, you should
only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or
may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible
way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Ram best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about your satisfaction.
1
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read the entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information.
Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special
equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders.
US residents refer to the Warranty Information, Section 2.1.C. Canadian residents
refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty Information. Such equipment
includes video monitors, DVD/Blu-Ray™, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty
coverage and service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer.
CONSUMER INFORMATION — TRUCK-CAMPER LOADING
This information is provided in fulfillment of the requirement by the United States
Government, Department of Transportation, National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration, that “every manufacturer of trucks that are capable of accommodating
slide-in campers, manufactured on or after April 1, 1973 shall provide... at the time of
original purchase to the first person who purchases the truck”... information on
Truck Camper Loading.
A slide-in camper document is provided in your vehicle’s glove compartment that contains
your Vehicle Identification Number, truck model, cargo weight rating, and the forward/
rearward limit of a camper. To obtain additional dimensional and technical specifications
for your vehicle, please visit https://www.ramtrucks.com.
WARNING!
These statements apply to operating procedures that
could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements apply to procedures that could result in
damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation, operation,
and reliability. If not followed, may result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier use of the
product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on a
particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information pertaining to
the topic.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Figure 1 illustrates the dimensions describing the forward and rearward limits of the zone in which the Center of Gravity (CG) of a slide-in camper must be located, to provide satisfactory
vehicle handling and to prevent overload of the front and rear axles.
Figure 2 illustrates a proper match between truck and camper.
NOTE:
The camper Center of Gravity falls within the specified zone.
A — Forward Limit of Camper CG
B — Rearward Limit of Camper CG
1
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
When the truck is used to carry a slide-in camper, the total cargo load of the truck consists
of the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of installed additional camper
equipment not included in the manufacturer’s camper weight figure, the weight of camper
cargo, and the weight of passengers in the camper. The total cargo load should not exceed
the truck’s cargo weight rating and the camper’s CG should fall within the truck’s
recommended CG zone when installed.
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle.
When the truck camper is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and rear wheels
separately, to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to
get the total weight below the ratings.
NOTE:
These ratings are also provided on the vehicle certification label located on the driver’s
side B-pillar. See
Ú page 203 for more information.
For any additional instructions, please contact your conversion/camper manufacturer or
an authorized dealer.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be
observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating
your vehicle. See below for the definition of each symbol
Ú page 115.
NOTE:
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness
and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 115
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 116
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 115
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 116
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 116
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 116
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 117
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 117
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 117
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 117
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
Ú page 117
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 117
Vehicle Security Warning Light
Ú page 117
Yellow Warning Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 117
Red Warning Lights
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light
Ú page 117
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 118
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
Ú page 119
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
Ú page 118
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Ú page 118
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Ú page 118
LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 118
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
Ú page 118
Yellow Warning Lights
1
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 118
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
Ú page 118
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
Ú page 118
Rear Axle Locker Fault Warning Light
Ú page 119
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency
Braking (PEB) Warning Light
Ú page 119
Service LaneSense Warning Light
Ú page 119
Service 4WD Warning Light
Ú page 119
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
Ú page 119
Yellow Warning Lights
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light
Ú page 119
Yellow Indicator Lights
Air Suspension Payload Protection Indicator Light
Ú page 120
Air Suspension Alternate Trailer Height Indicator Light
Ú page 120
Air Suspension Bed Lowering Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 120
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light
Ú page 120
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light
Ú page 120
Cargo Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Yellow Warning Lights
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
15
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
Off Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 121
4WD Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 121
4WD Low Indicator Light
Ú page 121
4WD High Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Yellow Indicator Lights
NEUTRAL Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Snowplow Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Sway Bar Indicator Light
Ú page 121
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light
Ú page 121
Wait To Start Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Water In Fuel Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Yellow Indicator Lights
1
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
Ú page 122
ECO Mode Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Front Fog Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
Ú page 122
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 122
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 122
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Ú page 123
LaneSense Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 123
Green Indicator Lights
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
17
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOB
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE),
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), and Remote Start
(if equipped). The key fob allows you to lock or unlock
all doors, tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped) as
well as activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to
be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. The key
fob also contains an emergency key, which is stored in the
rear of the key fob.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if the key
fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other
electronic device. This may result in poor performance.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless Charging
Pad, the key fob may not be detected if it is placed
within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
Ú page 72.
With the ignition in the ON position and the vehicle
moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
disabled.
Key Fob
In case the ignition switch does not change with the push
of a button, the key fob may have a low or fully depleted
battery. A low key fob battery can be verified by referring to
the instrument cluster, which will display directions to
follow.
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by a
message in the instrument cluster display, or by the LED
light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light no longer illu-
minates from key fob button pushes, then the key fob
battery requires replacement
Ú page 454.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Tailgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door, or, twice within
five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and the
RamBox (if equipped). To lock all the doors and the
tailgate, push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals will flash
and the illuminated entry system will be activated. When
the doors are locked, the turn signals will flash and the
horn will chirp.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first push
of the unlock button. The horn chirp when the lock button
is pushed can be programmed on/off within Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 226.
1 — Unlock
2 — Tailgate Release (If Equipped)
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start (If Equipped)
5 — Panic
6 — Emergency Key
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Using The Panic Feature
To turn the Panic feature on or off, push the Panic button
on the key fob. When the Panic feature is activated, the
turn signals will flash, the horn may pulse on and off (if
equipped with horn alarm), and the interior lights will
turn on.
The Panic feature will stay on for three minutes unless you
turn it off by either pushing the Panic button a second time
or driving the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or
greater.
NOTE:
The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position while the Panic feature is acti-
vated. However, the exterior lights and horn (if
equipped with horn alarm) will remain on.
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic
Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the
system.
Key Left Vehicle Feature
If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the vehicle
while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the ON/RUN or
START position, the message “Key Fob Has Left The
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster display
along with sounding an interior chime. An exterior audible
and visual alert will also be activated to warn the driver.
The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times along with
a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior lights.
NOTE:
The doors have to be open and then closed in order for
the vehicle to detect a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle
feature will not activate until all of the doors are closed.
These alerts will not be activated in situations where
the vehicle’s engine is left running with the key fob
inside.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery model is one CR2032 battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a battery
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin battery
dimensions may not meet the original OEM coin battery
dimensions.
Perchlorate material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
further information.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the key fob
above the top row buttons blinks when a button is
pressed. The coin battery should last a minimum of
three years with normal vehicle usage.
1. Remove the emergency key (1) by pushing the
emergency key release button (2) on the side of the
key fob, and pulling the emergency key out with your
other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing down,
and locate the small rectangular gap on the left side
between the housing and the back cover of the key
fob. Use a small screwdriver (or similar tool) to pry
open the left side of the fob cover while applying
pressure until the cover snaps open.
1 — Emergency Key
2 — Emergency Key Release Button
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key fob,
which is positioned farther to the edge than the left
side gap. Pry open the right side, and remove the
back cover.
4. Remove the battery by using a suitable tool, such as
a screwdriver, to slide the battery downward and
back toward the key ring.
Key Fob Battery Location
NOTE:
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on the
battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the new battery
with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterio-
ration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to push
down and slide the battery under the small lip on the
top edge of the opening.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top edge of
the back cover with the top of the fob, and press the
edges into the interlocking hinges until all edges snap
together with no large visual gaps.
7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks into place.
NOTE:
The key fob battery should only be replaced by qualified
technicians. If the battery requires replacement, see an
authorized dealer.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
repurposed and reprogrammed to another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle elec-
tronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
WARNING!
The integrated key fob contains a coin cell battery.
Do not ingest the battery; there is a chemical burn
hazard. If the coin cell battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns in just two hours and
can lead to death.
If you think a battery may have been swallowed or
placed inside any part of the body, seek immediate
medical attention.
Keep new and used batteries away from children.
If the battery compartment does not close securely,
stop using the product and keep it away from
children.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank
key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to match
the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized
vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system
does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is
automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button ignition
and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to prevent
unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle. The system cannot reprogram a
key fob obtained from another vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it
indicates that someone attempted to start the engine with
an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob is used
to start the engine but there is an issue with the vehicle
electronics, the engine will start and shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle
operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it
indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should
this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible
by an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics
Ú page 454.
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button as long as the key fob is in the
passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has several operating
modes that are labeled and will illuminate when in
position. These modes are OFF, ACC, ON/RUN, and START.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF position when exiting the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible
with some aftermarket Remote Start systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (Accessory)
3 — ON/RUN
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
(Continued)
The push button ignition can be placed in the following
modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped
Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks, alarm, etc.)
are still available
ACC
Engine is not started
Some electrical devices are available
(e.g. power sunroof, power windows, etc.)
RUN
Driving position
All electrical devices are available (e.g. climate
controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
The engine will start (when foot is on the brake)
NOTE:
If the ignition switch does not change the mode by pushing
the button, the key fob may have a low or depleted battery.
In this situation, a backup method can be used to operate
the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the START/STOP
ignition button and push to operate the ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next to a mobile
phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices
may block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system from starting the vehicle.
For more information on engine starting procedures,
see
Ú page 125.
When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in
the ON/RUN (engine not running) position, a chime
will sound to remind you to place the ignition in the
OFF position. In addition to the chime, the message
“Ignition or Accessory ON” will display in the instrument
cluster display.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. Always
remove key fob from the vehicle and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
WARNING!
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
(GASOLINE)
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range
of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may
reduce this range
Ú page 454.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock,
the parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice
(if programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the
vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15 minute cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
The parking lights will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power sunroof opera-
tion (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in
the Remote Start mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position
before the Remote Start sequence can be repeated for
a third cycle.
If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
System not disabled from previous Remote Start event
Vehicle Security system not active
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
system, push and release the START/STOP ignition button
while pressing the brake pedal prior to the end of the
15 minute cycle.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if the
Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed again, or if
the engine is allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, the
climate controls will resume the previously set operations
(temperature, blower control, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ —
Passive Entry feature, the message “Remote Start
Active — Push Start Button” will display in the instru-
ment cluster display until you push the START/STOP
ignition button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system will
disable for two seconds after receiving a valid
Remote Start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active, and the outside ambient
temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the system will
automatically activate front defrost for 15 minutes or less.
The timing is dependent on the ambient temperature.
Once the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient conditions.
See “Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the
next section for detailed operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear defrost
will automatically turn on in cold weather. The heated
steering wheel and driver heated/vented seat feature will
turn on if programmed in the seats and Comfort menu
screen within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 226. In warm
weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically
turn on when Remote Start is activated, if programmed in
the Comfort menu screen. The vehicle will adjust the
climate control settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped
The climate controls automatically adjust to an optimal
temperature and mode, dependent on the outside
ambient temperature. When the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, the climate controls will resume their
previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the
climate settings will default to maximum heat, with
fresh air entering the cabin. If the front defrost timer
expires, the vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C) to 78°F
(26°C), the climate settings will be based on the last
settings selected by the driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or above, the
climate settings will default to MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode,
with Recirculation on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate control
settings, see
Ú page 56.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration of Remote
Start, or until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position. The climate control settings will change, and exit
the automatic defaults, if manually adjusted by the driver
while the vehicle is in Remote Start mode. This includes
turning the climate controls off using the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E-ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When Remote Start is active and the outside ambient
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the Windshield
Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting Remote Start will
resume its previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will continue.
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE
One of the following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote
start, or exits Remote Start prematurely:
Remote Start Canceled — Door Open
Remote Start Canceled — Hood Open
Remote Start Canceled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START— IF EQUIPPED (DIESEL)
This system uses the key fob to start the engine
conveniently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range
of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold weather,
and to reach a comfortable climate in all ambient
conditions before the driver enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may
reduce this range.
The Remote Start system will wait for the Wait To Start
Indicator Light to extinguish before cranking the
engine. This allows time for the engine preheat cycle to
heat the cylinder air, and is normal in cold weather.
For further information on the Wait To Start Indicator
Light and the preheat cycle, see
Ú page 122.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the
parking lights will flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute
cycle.
Pushing the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button, and place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
Panic button not pushed
Fuel meets minimum requirement
Water In Fuel Indicator Light is not illuminated
Wait To Start Indicator Light is not illuminated
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is not illuminated
For additional functions of the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 22.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle doors,
hood, tailgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition for
unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security system
is armed, interior switches for door locks and tailgate
release are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the
Vehicle Security system will provide the following audible
and visible signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will
flash
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the
OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry, make
sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior power door
lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door
open.
Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry
door handle with a valid key fob available in the
same exterior zone
Ú page 26.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous and can cause
serious injury or death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the
Remote Start system, windows, door locks or other
controls could cause serious injury or death.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
(Continued)
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock the door
Ú page 26.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to disarm the
system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
Vehicle Security system. Use of the door key cylinder
when the system is armed will sound the alarm when
the door is opened.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed when the
power tailgate (if equipped) is opened using the tail-
gate button on the key fob.
If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock the tail-
gate, the Vehicle Security system is disarmed and the
rest of the vehicle doors will remain locked unless all
doors are set to unlock on first press within Uconnect
Settings.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously
described arming sequences has occurred, the Vehicle
Security system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security system will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will turn the horn off
after a 29 second cycle (with five seconds between cycles
and up to eight cycles if the trigger remains active) and
then rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The power door locks can be manually locked from inside
the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock each door,
push the door lock knob on each door trim panel
downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the inside door
handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear doors, pull
the door lock knob on the door trim panel upward. If the
lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door will
lock. Therefore, make sure the key fob is not inside the
vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the Vehicle
Security system.
Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may
cause serious injury or death.
For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic
transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake,
place the ignition in the OFF position, remove the key
fobs from vehicle, and lock all doors to completely
lock your vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER DOOR LOCKS — IF EQUIPPED
The power door lock switches are located on each front
door panel. Push the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switches
The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the key fob is
detected inside the vehicle when the door lock button on
the front door panel is used to lock the door.
This will occur for two attempts. Upon the third attempt,
the doors will lock even if the key fob is inside.
NOTE:
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, laptop, or
other electronic device, the wireless signal may get blocked,
and the driver’s door may not unlock automatically.
If the door lock switch is pushed while the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN position and the driver's door is open, the
doors will not lock.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door may
be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
POWER SIDE STEPS — IF EQUIPPED
The Power Side Steps will extend a step for easier entry
and exit of the vehicle.
When configured for Auto mode, the Power Side Steps will
deploy when any of the doors are opened, or when the
deploy setting is activated through the touchscreen. When
configured for Store mode, the steps will not deploy unless
the setting is selected manually through the Controls
menu within the touchscreen.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), or if the
retract setting is selected within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 226, the steps will retract.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
E
NTRY (IF EQUIPPED)
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s key fob and a feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on or off within
Uconnect Settings Ú page 226.
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle Passive
Entry system if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
Passive Entry system from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry unlock initiates illuminated approach
(low beams, license plate lamp, position lamps) for
whichever duration is set between 0, 30, 60 or 90
seconds. Passive Entry unlock also initiates two
flashes of the turn signals.
If wearing gloves, if it has been raining/snowing, or
if there is salt/dirt covering the Passive Entry door
handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting
in a slower response time.
The doors may unlock when water is sprayed on the
Passive Entry door handles if the key fob is located
outside of the vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will relock and
(if equipped) will arm the Vehicle Security system.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle, grab the handle to unlock the vehicle.
Grabbing the driver’s door handle will unlock the driver
door automatically. Grabbing the passenger door handle
will unlock all doors and the tailgate automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock when
you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle,
depending on the selected setting in the Uconnect
system
Ú page 226.
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door
handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry
system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature
which will function if the ignition is in the OFF position.
There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search
in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry key fob
while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel switch while
the door is open.
When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm or
armed status and the tailgate transitions from open to
closed.
When the tailgate transitions from open to closed and
Remote Start is active.
When any of these situations occur, after all open doors
are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be executed. If it
detects a Passive Entry key fob inside the vehicle, the
vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid Passive
Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The vehicle will
not unlock the doors when any of the following conditions
are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then the doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the
vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door
handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Tailgate:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of either front door handles, pushing the Passive
Entry lock button will lock the vehicle.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
Settings, the key fob protection described in
"Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob
battery is depleted
Ú page 17.
The LED light on the key fob will not blink if the key fob
battery is low or fully depleted, but a low key fob battery
condition will still support the Passive Entry system
functionality. When the key fob battery is low, the
instrument cluster will display a message indicating
that the key fob battery is low
Ú page 454.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT —
I
F EQUIPPED
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks after the following sequence of actions:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is
enabled within Uconnect Settings
Ú
page 226.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is placed
in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when
the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto
door lock feature is enabled/disabled within the Uconnect
Settings
Ú page 226.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in
the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat-blade
screwdriver, and rotate the dial to the lock or unlock
position. When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is in
the unlocked position.
Child Lock Control
NOTE:
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the unlocked position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the locked position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged, pull up on
the door lock knob (unlocked position), lower the
window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. After
engaging the child lock on both rear doors, check for
effective engagement by trying to open a door with the
internal handle. Once the Child-Protection Door Lock
system is engaged, it is impossible to open the doors from
inside the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in the vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside door handle when the Child Protection Door
Locks are engaged.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
STEERING WHEEL
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward
or downward. The tilt lever is located on the steering
column, below the multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in
place.
Tilt Steering Lever
HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
I
F EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until the operator
turns it off. The heated steering wheel may not turn on
when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel button is located on the center
of the instrument panel below the radio screen, or within
the climate or comfort screen of the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch radio, there will
only be control buttons through the touchscreen.
Press the heated steering wheel button once to turn
the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a second time
to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel
to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 23.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type or material. This may cause
the steering wheel heater to overheat.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION —
IF EQUIPPED
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful
quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips
you need to know to control your vehicle’s Voice
Recognition (VR) system.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in the
Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the
Uconnect 5 NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 5 with
8.4-inch display system.
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The following basic Voice Commands can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button or for the Uconnect 5/5 NAV, say
the vehicle’s “Wake Up” word, “Hey Uconnect”.
After the beep, say:
“
Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“
Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands.
“
Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
Recognition system’s status.
NOTE:
On Uconnect 5 systems, the factory default “Wake Up”
word is set to “Hey Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed
through the Uconnect Settings.
GET STARTED
All you need to control your Uconnect system with your
voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit
UconnectPhone.com
to check mobile device
and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing
instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of noise that
may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is located in
the headliner and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command. You can
also say the vehicle “Wake Up” word and state your
command. Some examples of “Wake Up” words
include “Hey, Uconnect” or “Hey Ram”.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and
saying a Voice Command from the current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles
Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone Button
To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Climate, Start Or
Answer A Phone Call, And Send Or Receive A Text
1 — For The Uconnect 5/5 NAV System Vehicles Not
Equipped With Navigation: Push The Phone Button
To Answer An Incoming Phone Call
2 — Push To Access The Tile Feature
3 — Push The Hang Up Button To End A Call Currently
In Progress
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2022 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks, and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. SiriusXM® and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com or call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUconnect.ca or
call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit https://www.driveucon-
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call:
1-877-324-9091
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to save up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch.
Each memory profile saves desired position settings for
the following features:
Driver’s seat
Easy Entry/Exit Seat operation (if equipped)
Adjustable pedals (if equipped)
Side mirrors
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
If equipped with power convex mirrors, these mirror
positions will not set as part of a memory profile
Ú page 38.
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each can be
linked to either memory position 1 or 2.
The driver memory settings switch is located on the driver
door, next to the door handle, and consists of three
buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate the
memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two saved memory profiles.
Driver Memory Settings Buttons
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the selected profile
from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., driver’s seat, outside mirrors,
adjustable pedals (if equipped), and radio station
presets).
3. Push the set (S) button on the memory switch, and
then push the desired memory button (1 or 2) within
five seconds. The instrument cluster display will show
which memory position has been set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK,
but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE
K
EYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB TO MEMORY
Your key fob can be programmed to recall one of two
saved memory profiles.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must select the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” feature through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 226.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
2. Select a desired memory profile 1 or 2.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release
the set (S) button on the memory switch.
4. Push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly.
“Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the
instrument cluster.
5. Push and release the lock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked from your memory settings
by pushing the set (S) button, followed by pushing the
unlock button on the key fob within 10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a
message will display in the instrument cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one or two, push
the desired memory button number (1 or 2) or the unlock
button on the key fob linked to the desired memory
position.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the memory
buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall. When a recall is
canceled, the driver seat will stop moving. A delay of one
second will occur before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system of the
vehicle.
MANUAL FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT —
I
F EQUIPPED
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward.
The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the
seat cushion at the front edge of each seat.
Manual Seat Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the lever,
lean back to the desired position and release the lever.
To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean
forward and lift the lever. Release the lever once the
seatback is in the upright position.
Manual Recline Lever
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat —
If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard seat
portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat. If
equipped, the back of the center portion (20%) easily
folds down to provide an armrest/center storage
compartment.
POWER DRIVER SEAT ADJUSTMENT —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the driver and
passenger seat cushions. There are two power seat
switches that are used to control the movement of the
seat cushion and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward by
using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down by
using the power seat switch. The seat will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down
using the power seat switch. The front of the seat cushion
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while actu-
ating the handle. The seatback may swing forward
and hit you causing injury.
To avoid injury, place your hand on the seatback and
actuate the handle, then position the seatback in the
desired position.
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward by using the power seat switch. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power
seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar
support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar
support.
Lumbar Control Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where
you have the driver’s seat positioned when you place the
ignition in the OFF position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF posi-
tion, the driver’s seat will move about 2.4 inches (6 cm)
rearward if the driver’s seat position is greater than or
equal to 2.7 inches (6.77 cm) forward of the rear stop.
The seat will return to its previously set position when
you place the ignition into the ACC or ON/RUN position.
When you remove the key fob from the ignition, the
driver’s seat will move to a position 0.3 inches
(0.77 cm) forward of the rear stop if the driver’s seat
position is between 0.9 inches and 2.7 inches
(2.27 cm and 6.77 cm) forward of the rear stop. The
seat will return to its previously set position when you
place the ignition to the ACC or ON/RUN position.
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 inches (2.27 cm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry and Easy
Exit positions are stored in each memory setting profile
Ú page 31.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled through
the programmable features in the Uconnect system
Ú page 226.
HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury
or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat
belt.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Front Heated Seats
The heated seats control buttons are located
on the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen, or located within the Climate or
Comfort screen of the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch radio, there will
only be control buttons through the touchscreen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn the
HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second time to turn the
MED setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a fourth time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 23.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard rear seats
are equipped with heated seats. The heated
seat switches for these seats are located on
the rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently. You can
choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use.
Push the heated seat button once to turn the
HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second time to turn the
MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time to turn the
LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time to turn the
heating elements off.
NOTE:
The level of heat selected will stay on until the operator
changes it.
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
VENTILATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
Front Ventilated Seats
Located in the seat cushion are small fans that
draw the air from the passenger compartment
and move air through fine perforations in the
seat cover to help keep the driver and front
passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
The fans operate at three speeds: HI, MED and LO.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located on
the center instrument panel below the touchscreen, and
are also located within the Climate or Comfort screen of
the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch radio, there will
only be control buttons through the touchscreen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second time to
choose MED.
Press the ventilated seat button a third time to
choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a fourth time to turn
the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to
operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start system, see
Ú page 23.
Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in
a seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
WARNING!
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by
restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact.
Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the
head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the rear of the
head restraint face forward) in an attempt to gain addi-
tional clearance to the back of your head.
Front Head Restraints
Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with front four-way driver
and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of the
head restraint toward the front of the vehicle as desired
and release. To adjust the head restraint rearward, pull
the top of the head restraint to the forward most position
and release. The head restraint will return to the rear
most position.
Forward Adjustment
NOTE:
Four-way head restraints have seven tilt/locking positions.
When pulling fully forward, the head restraint will spring
back to the untilted, rearward most position when
released.
Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with front two-way driver
and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment
button, located at the base of head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button Location
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat, the
center head restraint is not adjustable or removable.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while the
vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head
restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause
serious injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event
of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted while
the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the
head restraints improperly adjusted or removed
could cause serious injury or death in the event of
a collision.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
Front Head Restraint Removal
Two-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button
and the release button while pulling upward on the whole
assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the
appropriate height.
Four-Way Head Restraints — If Equipped
The head restraints should only be removed by qualified
technicians, for service purposes only. If either of the head
restraints require removal, see an authorized dealer.
Rear Head Restraint Adjustment
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and
removable head restraints. To raise the head restraint,
pull upward on the head restraint.
To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button
located on the base of the head restraint and push
downward on the head restraint.
Release/Adjustment Buttons
NOTE:
The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab) has only one
adjustment position that is used to aid in the routing of
a tether
Ú page 315.
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the
incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clear-
ance to the back of the head.
Rear Head Restraint Removal
To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button
and the release button while pulling upward on the whole
assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the
appropriate height.
NOTE:
To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat bottom must
be folded up.
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the occupant
compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the
reinstallation instructions prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS —
IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake and
accelerator pedals to move toward or away from the driver
to provide improved position with the steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of
the steering column.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Cruise Control system is on. If there
is an attempt to adjust the pedals when the system is
locked out, one of the following messages will appear (on
vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster display):
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged
Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse
NOTE:
Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
movement of the pedal.
Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Settings, you
can use your remote keyless entry key fob or the
memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return
the adjustable pedals to saved positions
Ú page 31.
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right.
The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should
be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view
through the rear window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from
vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when
the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the driver’s rear view.
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned on or off
through the touchscreen.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or
impede its ability to move, as it may cause damage to
the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal's path.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Automatic Dimming Mirror
Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high definition,
wide and unobstructed view of the road and traffic behind
the vehicle, as well as a trailer when Tow Mode Camera is
equipped, while driving forward (not recommended for
use as a Back Up Camera).
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic Dimming
Mirror mode, then activate the Digital Rearview Mirror
mode.
To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the on/off
control lever on the bottom of the mirror rearward toward
the driver.
When Digital Rearview Mode is not in use, push the on/off
control lever forward toward the windshield to return the
mirror to the regular Automatic Dimming Mirror.
Digital Rearview Mirror
Push the View button to the left of the on/off control to
access the following view options:
Rearview Camera - Back of vehicle
This is the default view of the Digital Rearview Camera.
It displays a wide screen view of the back of the vehicle.
Split Screen Tow Mode (if equipped)
The Split Screen Tow Mode will display the left and right
sides of the back of the vehicle using the outside mirror
cameras.
Tri-View Tow Mode (if equipped)
The Tri-View Tow Mode will display the left and right sides of
the back of the vehicle using the outside mirror cameras
and the back of the trailer using an auxiliary camera.
Tow Mode - Back of trailer (if equipped)
The Tow Mode will display a wide screen view of the back
of the trailer using an auxiliary camera.
Push the Menu button next to the on/off control to access
the following mirror adjustment options:
Tilt (up/down)
Pan (left/right)
Rotate
Zoom
Brightness
Options can be customized for each camera by pressing
the View button until desired camera is highlighted.
Push the Menu button to scroll through the menu options
and use left and right scroll buttons to change settings.
The menu will lockout when vehicle is traveling above
8 mph (12 kph). Once this happens, the menu options
cannot be changed (view can still be changed).
NOTE:
The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective during
nighttime driving in low light applications due to low
ambient light levels. In the event that it provides the user
with less than expected vision, the mirror can be reverted
to a normal reflective Automatic Dimming Mirror by
pushing the on/off control lever toward the windshield and
putting the mirror into Automatic Dimming Mirror mode.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
1 — View Button
2 — On/Off Control Lever
3 — Menu Button
4 — Left Scroll Button
5 — Right Scroll Button
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Tow Mode
Your vehicle may be equipped with an additional auxiliary
trailer camera to be mounted on the rear of a trailer.
When the camera is connected, the display in the Digital
Rearview Mirror automatically switches to the trailer
camera. Your vehicle may also include additional cameras
in the outside mirrors, which will allow you to use Split
Screen and Tri-View Tow Mode views.
To return to the Rearview Camera display toggle through
the menu options using the control buttons on the mirror.
The following indications may be displayed on the Digital
Rearview Mirror:
Digital Mode
This indication will appear when the Rearview
Camera is utilizing the cameras on the vehicle.
Tow Mode - If Equipped
This indication will appear when the Rearview
Camera is utilizing an auxiliary camera
attached to the trailer.
View Switching In Progress
This indication will appear when camera view
switching is in progress.
Camera Signal Lost - Single View
This indication will appear when the Rearview
Camera has lost its signal.
Camera Signal Lost - Multiview
This indication will appear when the camera
effected has lost its signal in either Split Screen
or Tri-View.
Communication Lost
This indication will appear when the Digital
Rearview Camera has lost communication with
the vehicle.
If a camera signal is lost, switch to Automatic Dimming
Mirror mode.
For more information on trailer camera options, see
Ú page 196.
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRROR —
I
F EQUIPPED
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of the
visors and lift the cover.
Lift Cover For Illuminated Mirror
Slide-On-Rod Feature Of Sun Visor —
If Equipped
The sun visor Slide-On-Rod feature allows for additional
flexibility in positioning the sun visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the corner clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun blockage.
WARNING!
The Digital Rearview Mirror mode has a limited view.
Portions of the road, vehicles, and other objects may
not be seen, especially while backing up.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Slide-On-Rod Extender
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the sun visor is
against the windshield for additional sun blockage
through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the center of the
adjacent lane of traffic to achieve the optimal view.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with puddle lamps under the
outside mirrors, they can be turned off through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 226.
Trailer Tow Telescoping Mirrors
Your vehicle may be equipped with manual or power trailer
telescoping mirrors. These mirrors are designed with an
adjustable mirror head that can be extended when
trailering to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads.
Power Telescoping Mirrors
The Power Telescoping Mirror Switch is located on the
door trim panel, above the power mirror controls. The
switch enables the driver to extend or retract the mirror
head.
Power Telescoping Mirror Switch
To adjust the outside mirrors, push the Telescoping Mirror
Switch. Use the left and right arrows on the directional
button to move both driver’s and passenger mirrors
outward or inward to desired position.
Power Telescoping Mirror (Extended Position)
To return the control to the large mirror, push the Power
Telescoping Mirror Switch a second time.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the driver or
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and
farther away than they really are. Relying only on the
convex mirror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the
convex mirror.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Telescoping Mirrors
To extend the Manual Telescoping Mirrors pull the mirror
outward to desired position. To return to normal position,
push the mirror inward all the way.
Manual Telescoping Mirror (Extended Position)
NOTE:
Return the trailer towing mirrors to normal driving position
or fold the mirrors prior to entering an automated car
wash.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manually
folded both forward and rearward to prevent damage.
Folding Mirror
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal —
If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
lighting contain LEDs, which are located at the back of
the mirror.
The LEDs are turn signal indicators, which flash with the
corresponding turn signal lights in the front and rear of the
vehicle. Turning on the Hazard Warning flashers will also
activate these LEDs.
OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING
M
IRROR — IF EQUIPPED
The exterior mirrors will automatically adjust for glare from
vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled by the
inside automatic dimming mirror. The mirror will
automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
POWER MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver's door trim panel.
Power Mirror Controls
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a
car wash or a narrow location.
1 — Left Mirror Selection
2 — Mirror Direction Control
3 — Right Mirror Selection
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons
and a four-way mirror control switch.
To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right)
button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Movement
POWER FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The power folding mirrors can be folded rearward and
unfolded into the normal driving position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push the
switch a second time and the mirrors will return to the
normal driving position.
If the mirror is manually folded after a powered cycle, a
potential extra button push is required to get the mirrors
back to the normal driving position. If the mirror does not
fold automatically, check for ice or dirt buildup at the pivot
area, which can cause excessive drag.
Power Folding Mirror Switch
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the
following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded
(by hand or by pushing the power folding mirror switch).
The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them
by pushing the button (this may require multiple
attempts). This resets them to their normal driving
position.
AUTOMATIC POWER FOLDING
M
IRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
When enabled within Uconnect Settings Ú page 226, the
exterior mirrors will automatically fold when the vehicle’s
ignition is placed in the OFF position, and after the doors
are locked and closed.
The exterior mirrors will auto-fold in the following
situations after the ignition is placed in the OFF position:
Pushing the lock button on the door panel before the
door is opened.
NOTE:
If the doors are already locked, push the lock button again.
Opening the door, then pushing the lock button on the
door panel, followed by closing the door.
After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then push the
lock button on the key fob.
After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then touch the
lock icon on the Passive Entry door handle.
If the exterior mirrors were folded automatically, they will
unfold when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
If the mirrors were folded manually, by using the power
folding mirror switch on the driver’s door panel, they will
not automatically unfold.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
TILT SIDE MIRRORS IN REVERSE —
I
F EQUIPPED
This feature provides automatic outside mirror positioning
which will assist with the driver’s ground visibility. The
outside mirrors will move slightly downward from the
present position when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE.
The outside mirrors will then return to the original position
when the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. If the vehicle
is equipped with Driver Memory Settings, this feature will
be linked to the programmable settings.
NOTE:
The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 226.
POWER CONVEX MIRROR SWITCH —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Power Convex Mirror Switch is located on the door
trim panel, above the power mirror controls. The switch
enables the movement of the convex portion of both the
driver and passenger outside mirrors.
Power Convex Mirror Switch
To adjust the convex portion of the outside mirrors, push
the Power Convex Mirror Switch. Then, select the mirror
you want to adjust by using the L (left) or R (right) buttons.
Using the mirror control switch, push any of the four
arrows for the direction you want the mirror to move.
To return the control to the large mirror, push the Power
Convex Mirror Switch a second time.
Trailer Tow Power Convex Mirror
NOTE:
If the Power Convex Mirror Switch is not pushed a second
time, the switch will automatically default back to the
larger portion of the outside mirrors after a period of time.
FORWARD UTILITY LIGHTS AND REAR
G
UIDANCE LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The forward utility lights and reverse guidance lights
switches are located on the drivers door trim panel, above
the power mirror controls. These switches enable the
forward or reverse lights located on the driver and
passenger outside mirrors.
Forward and Reverse Light Switches
When either button is pressed the corresponding light on
the outside mirror will remain on for ten minutes. The
vehicle must be in the ON/RUN or ACC position. When the
light is active, the switch on the door panel will illuminate.
Pushing the switch a second time will turn the lights off.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Forward Utility Light
Reverse Guidance Light
When the lights are activated using the switch on the door
panel, the reverse guidance lights will illuminate when the
vehicle transmission is in PARK, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE
and the forward utility lights will illuminate in all ignition
positions. The rear guidance lights will turn off when the
vehicle transmission is placed in DRIVE.
The rear guidance lights will also illuminate when the
cargo light switch is pressed on the headlight switch
panel. This feature is programmable through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 226.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped)
Ú page 56.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® Buttons
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
HomeLink® replaces up to three
hand-held transmitters that operate
devices such as garage door
openers, motorized gates, lighting,
or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your
vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the over-
head console or sunvisor designate the three different
HomeLink® channels.
To operate HomeLink®, push and release any of the
programmed HomeLink® buttons. These buttons will
activate the devices they are programmed to with each
press of the corresponding HomeLink® button.
The HomeLink® indicator light is located above the
center button.
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security system
is active Ú page 454.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING
H
OMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate transmission of
the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it is recommended that a
new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system. Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
programmed to activate the device you are trying to
program your HomeLink® button to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the channels of your
HomeLink® before you use it for the first time.
ERASING ALL THE HOMELINK®
C
HANNELS
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink® buttons
(I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until the
HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
IDENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
R
OLLING CODE OR NON-ROLLING CODE
D
EVICE
Before programming a device to one of your HomeLink®
buttons, you must determine whether the device has a
rolling code or non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a good
indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically, devices
manufactured after 1995 have rolling codes. A device with
a rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button
located where the antenna is attached to the device. The
button may not be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may vary slightly
by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button you
normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not have a
rolling code. These devices will also not have a “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
G
ARAGE DOOR OPENER
To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to activate your
garage door opener motor, refer to the following steps:
NOTE:
All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this
procedure. You do not need to erase all channels when
programming additional buttons.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink®
button you wish to program, while keeping the
HomeLink® indicator light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to
program while you push and hold the garage door
opener transmitter button you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Once this
happens, release both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is plugged in
before moving on to the rolling code/non-rolling code final
steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling code final
step 2, after completing rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
2. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button three times (holding the button
for two seconds each time). If the garage door opener
motor operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the final steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the HomeLink® indicator light. If the
HomeLink® indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to confirm
that the garage door opener motor operates. If the
garage door opener motor does not operate, repeat
the steps from the beginning.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® TO A
M
ISCELLANEOUS DEVICE
The procedure on how to program HomeLink® to a
miscellaneous device follows the same procedure as
programming to a garage door opener
Ú page 46. Be sure
to determine if the device has a rolling code, or non-rolling
code before beginning the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission, which may not be long enough for HomeLink® to
pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner. The procedure may need to
be performed multiple times to successfully pair the
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
H
OMELINK® BUTTON
To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has been
previously trained, without erasing all the channels,
proceed as follows. Be sure to determine whether the new
device you want to program the HomeLink® button to has
a rolling code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, without
starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the HomeLink® indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Step 2 in
“Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Door
Opener” and follow all remaining steps.
CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
P
ROGRAMMING
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission:
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require transmitter
signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission, which may not be long enough for
HomeLink® to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, place
the ignition in the RUN position. Make sure while
programming HomeLink® with the engine on that your
vehicle is outside of your garage, or that the garage door
remains open at all times.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button you
wish to program while keeping the HomeLink®
indicator light in view.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter. Do
not program the transmitter if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate.
Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or
confined area while programming the transmitter.
Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon monoxide is poisonous when inhaled and
can cause you and others to be severely injured or
killed.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button
while you push and release (cycle) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device
should activate when the HomeLink® button is
pushed.
To program the two remaining HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remaining
button. DO NOT erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button (Canadian/
Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds.
Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
SECURITY
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in
your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security system is active.
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door opener
hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for a rolling code.
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transmitter. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and close while
you are programming the universal transmitter. Do
not program the transmitter if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transmitter with a garage door opener that has a
“stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights (if
equipped), instrument panel light dimming, cargo light,
rear guidance lights (if equipped), and fog lights
(if equipped).
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada)
NOTE:
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an OFF
detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the headlight
switch is placed in the parking lights position. However,
the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along
with the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel
lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate
the headlight switch back to the O (off) position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise from the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position to the first detent to turn on headlights,
parking lights, and instrument panel lights. Rotate the
headlight switch to the second detent for the AUTO
position.
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Switch
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Push Fog Light Switch
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
5 — Push Cargo Light Switch
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on whenever the
engine is running, and the low beams are not on. The
lights will remain on until the ignition is placed in the OFF
or ACC position, or the parking brake is engaged.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime Running
Lights will automatically deactivate when the front fog
lights are turned on.
If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was
purchased, the Daytime Running Lights can be turned
on and off using the Uconnect system
Ú page 226.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights may
deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side of the
vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on that side), or
on both sides of the vehicle (when the hazard warning
lights are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel
to switch the headlights to high beams. Pulling the
multifunction lever back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating
high beam control through the use of a camera mounted
on the inside rearview mirror or a windshield mounted
camera. These cameras detect vehicle specific light and
automatically switch from high beams to low beams until
the approaching vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off by selecting “ON” under “Auto Dim
High Beams” within your Uconnect Settings
Ú page 226, as well as turning the headlight switch to
the AUTO position.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See a local authorized
dealer.
The Automatic High Beams will not activate until the
vehicle is at or above 15 mph (24 km/h). To opt out of
the Automatic High-Beam Sensitivity Control (default)
and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not
recommended), toggle the multifunction lever six full
on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition ON. The
system will return to the default setting when the igni-
tion is placed in the OFF position.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This will
cause the high beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
until the lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will turn
on in the Automatic Mode.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
DIRECTIONAL LED HEADLAMP
S
YSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This is a system consisting of LED (low/high beam)
headlights that incorporate dynamic cornering with
5-degree inboard/15-degree outboard swivel. The
headlights continuously and automatically adapt to the
driving conditions around bends or when cornering based
on steering wheel angle.
The system directs the headlights to light up the road in
the best way, taking into account the speed of the vehicle
and the bend or corner angle, as well as the speed of the
vehicle while the steering wheel is being turned.
The adaptive lights are automatically activated when the
vehicle is traveling above approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
This system can be turned on/off through the Uconnect
Settings under “Steering Directed Lights”
Ú page 226.
PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL LIGHTS
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights,
rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the
parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the
O (off) position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the first headlight switch
position is the parking lights and instrument panel
lights position (instead of the OFF position).
Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a headlight
switch with an AUTO and ON detent but without an
OFF detent. Headlights will be deactivated when the
headlight switch is placed in the parking lights position.
However, the Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will be
activated along with the front and rear marker lights.
The DRLs may be deactivated when the parking brake
is engaged.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS WITH WIPERS
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When your
headlights are in the automatic mode and the engine is
running, they will automatically turn on when the wiper
system is on. This feature is programmable through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 226.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Rain Sensing Wiper
system
Ú page 56, and it is activated, the headlights will
automatically turn on after the wipers complete five wipe
cycles within approximately one minute, and they will
turn off approximately four minutes after the wipers
completely stop.
NOTE:
When your headlights come on during the daytime, the
instrument panel lights will automatically dim to the lower
nighttime intensity.
HEADLIGHT ILLUMINATION ON
A
PPROACH
When enabled, the headlights, exterior door handle
pocket lights (if equipped), and interior lights will
illuminate when the unlock button on the key fob is
pushed as the operator is approaching the vehicle.
This feature can be turned on/off, and the length of time
the headlights stay on can be programmed for up to
90 seconds within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 226.
HEADLIGHT DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight delay
feature will leave the headlights on for up to 90 seconds.
This delay is initiated when the ignition is placed in the OFF
position while the headlight switch is on, and then the
headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be
canceled by either turning the headlight switch on then
off, or by placing the ignition in the ON position.
NOTE:
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 226.
The headlight delay feature is automatically activated if
the headlight switch is left in the AUTO position when
the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime will
sound and a message will appear in the instrument cluster
display when the driver’s door is opened.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FRONT FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking lights or
low beam headlights and push the fog light switch located
within the headlight switch. Pushing the fog light switch a
second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Fog Light Switch
Fog Light Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to activate the
turn signals. The arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down, without
moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
NOTE:
For information on Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot Assist,
see
Ú page 189.
CARGO LIGHTS/TRAILER SPOTTER
L
IGHTS/TRAILER HITCH LIGHT WITH
B
ED LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The cargo light, bed lights, trailer spotter lights, and trailer
hitch light are turned on by pushing the cargo light button
located on the lower half of the headlight switch.
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
Cargo/Bed Lights Button On Headlight Switch
(Vehicles Sold In Canada)
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
When the vehicle is stationary, these lights can also be
turned on using the switch located just inside the pickup
box, on the lower part of the bed light lens. A telltale will
illuminate in the instrument cluster display when these
lights are on. Pushing the switch a second time will turn
the lights off.
Bed Light Switch (Without RamBox)
The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will turn on for
approximately 30 seconds when a key fob unlock button
is pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
When these lights are activated using the button on the
headlight switch, the cargo lights, trailer spotter lights, and
trailer hitch light will remain illuminated when the vehicle
transmission is in PARK, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE. The lights
will turn off when the vehicle transmission is placed in
DRIVE.
When the vehicle is placed in the REVERSE position, the
trailer hitch light will turn on automatically. The trailer hitch
light will turn off when the vehicle is placed in the DRIVE
position.
NOTE:
For vehicles shipped to or sold in the states of California
or Mississippi, the cargo, bed, and mirror spotter lights will
not work while the vehicle is in motion. In every other
state, the cargo and mirror spotter lights will turn off when
the vehicle is in motion, but the bed light will remain on. In
all states, including California and Mississippi, if a bed
camera is deactivated, the bed lights will turn back on.
BATTERY SAVER
Timers are set to both the interior and exterior lights to
protect the life of your vehicle’s battery.
If the ignition is in the OFF position, the interior lights will
automatically turn off when:
Any door is left ajar for 10 minutes.
The Dome Defeat button is pushed.
The cargo, bed, and spotter lights are manually acti-
vated by either the headlight switch or the truck bed
switch.
NOTE:
Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, the exterior lights will automatically turn
off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and
left on for eight minutes while the ignition is in the OFF
position, the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
COURTESY LIGHTS
The courtesy, dome, cargo, and bed lights are turned on
when any door is opened. The courtesy and dome lights
are turned on when the Dome On button is pushed on the
overhead console. Also, if your vehicle is equipped with
Remote Keyless Entry, and the unlock button is pushed on
the key fob, the courtesy, dome, cargo, and bed lights will
turn on.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console lights can also be operated
individually as reading lights by pushing the corresponding
buttons.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button
2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Dome On Button
4 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with an LED overhead console, if
both the Dome On and Dome Defeat buttons are pushed,
the Illuminated Entry with door ajar feature will be
disabled, but the dome lights inside the vehicle will
turn on.
Three types of rear courtesy/reading lights are available
for your vehicle:
Push button on/off
Push lens on/off
No on/off button, only courtesy light
NOTE:
The rear courtesy/reading lights will remain on until the
switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have been
turned off before exiting the vehicle. If the interior lights
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF position,
they will automatically turn off after 10 minutes.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent to the
headlight switch located on the left side of the instrument
panel.
Dimmer Controls
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the
instrument panel dimmer control upward will increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights. Rotating the
ambient dimmer control will adjust the interior and
ambient light levels when the headlights are on.
Dimming Of The Uconnect Touchscreen
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen can be
dimmed using the instrument panel dimmer control
when the parking lights or headlights are on.
When Display Mode is set to Auto within the Uconnect
system, the brightness will automatically adjust from
daytime intensity to nighttime intensity (and vice versa)
based on ambient light levels outside of the vehicle.
1 — Driver’s Reading Light On/Off Button
2 — Dome Defeat Button
3 — Passenger’s Reading Light On/Off Button
4 — Dome On Button
1 — Ambient Light Control (If Equipped)
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
1 — Ambient Light Control (If Equipped)
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
NOTE:
The brightness of the Uconnect touchscreen cannot be
adjusted when the instrument panel dimmer control is
rotated to the upper most detent, even when Display
Mode is set to Auto within the Uconnect Settings.
When Display Mode is set to Manual, the brightness of the
Uconnect touchscreen will adjust to the set brightness
(1 - 6) when the headlights are either on or off. For more
information on these Uconnect Settings, see
Ú page 226.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob
to unlock the doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lamps located
beneath the outside mirrors (if equipped).
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch
is placed in the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy
lights will not turn off if the Dome On button on the
overhead console is pushed. The overhead and door
courtesy lights will turn off after 10 minutes to protect
the battery.
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the Dome
Defeat button on the overhead console is pushed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with Illuminated Approach lights
under the outside mirrors, they will also be turned off by
pushing the Dome Defeat button.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
on the end of the lever.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Intermittent Wipers
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
upward to the first detent.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is
10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward and
hold. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wipers will
operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is
released.
If the washer knob is pushed while in the delay range, the
wipers will operate for several seconds after the washer
knob is released. The wipers will then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer
knob is pushed while in the off position, the wipers will
turn on and cycle approximately three times after the
washer knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
1 — Push End Inward (Hold For Washer Or
Short Press For Mist)
2 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could
lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or
other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the
defroster before and during windshield washer use.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Mist
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a
passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, located
on the end of the multifunction lever, inward briefly and
release. The wipers will cycle one time and automatically
shut off.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer pump;
therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the wind-
shield. The washer function must be used in order to spray
the windshield with washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement, see
Ú page 391.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers. Rotate the end of the
multifunction lever to one of five detent positions to
activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive.
Position 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Positions 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Positions 4 and 5 can be used if the
driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in
the O (off) position when not using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
Use of products containing wax or silicone may reduce
Rain Sensing performance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off
using the Uconnect system
Ú page 226.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first
placed in the ON position, the Rain Sensing system will
not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle
speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside
temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition
is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position,
the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper
switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the
NEUTRAL position.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with
the Remote Start system, Rain Sensing wipers are not
operational when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, Rain
Sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to regulate the
temperature, air flow, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
touchscreen, on the sides of the touchscreen (if
equipped), or on the instrument panel below the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 5 or 5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display Automatic
Temperature Controls
NOTE:
Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle
equipment.
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the
touchscreen to change the current setting to
the coldest output of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
Pressing other settings will also cause MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touch-
screen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate to change the current setting.
The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the system between
Recirculation mode and outside air mode. The
Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate
when the Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke,
odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation
can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be
unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of
the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually
without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous
use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended. Recirculation mode may
automatically adjust to optimize customer experience for
warming, cooling, dehumidification, etc.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may lead to
excessive window fogging. The Recirculation feature may
be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield.
Auto Button
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO.
AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired
temperature by automatically adjusting the
blower speed and air distribution. Air
Conditioning (A/C) may be active during AUTO operation to
improve performance. AUTO mode is highly recommended
for efficiency.
You can turn AUTO on in one of two ways:
Press and release this button on the touchscreen.
Push the button on the faceplate.
Toggling this function will cause the system to switch
between manual mode and automatic mode
Ú page 61.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button on
the touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to change the current
airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front
Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on.
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost
mode button, the climate system will return to the
previous setting.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button on
the touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator
illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear
window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And
Down Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger with
independent temperature control.
Push the red button (or rotate knob if
equipped) on the faceplate or touchscreen, or
press and slide the temperature bar towards
the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings.
Push the blue button (or rotate knob if
equipped) on the faceplate or touchscreen, or
press and slide the temperature bar towards
the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE:
The numbers within the temperature display will only
appear if the system is equipped with an automatic
climate control system.
Up and down buttons are only available on vehicles
equipped with a 12-inch display.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to
toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC
indicator illuminates when SYNC is on. SYNC
synchronizes the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the
passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will
automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the climate control system.
There are seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic
mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be
selected using either the blower control knob on the
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control
knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and
the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select Mode by pressing one of the mode
buttons on the touchscreen, or pushing the
MODE button on the faceplate, to change the
airflow distribution mode. The airflow
distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets, and
demist outlets.
Faceplate
Push the MODE button to change the airflow distribution
mode.
Touchscreen
Press one of the mode buttons to change the airflow
distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be
adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets,
floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the
touchscreen, or push the OFF button on the
faceplate (if equipped) to turn the Climate
Control system on/off.
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Manual Temperature Controls
Uconnect 5 With 8.4-inch Display Manual
Temperature Controls
MAX A/C Setting
Set the temperature control knob to the
MAX A/C setting to change the current setting
to the coldest output of air. Moving the
temperature control knob away from the
MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is on.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button to change the
system between recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used
when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all
modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be
unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
On vehicles equipped with Manual Climate controls, the
Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation is
disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting
to use Recirculation while in this mode causes the LED in
the control button to blink and then turn off.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the mode control knob to the Front
Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side window
defrosting and defogging.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control
button to turn on the rear window defroster and
the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The
Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the
rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air
forced through the climate system.
The temperature increases as you turn the
temperature control knob clockwise.
The temperature decreases as you turn the
temperature control knob counterclockwise.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air
forced through the climate control system.
There are seven blower speeds available. The
blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control
knob counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust airflow
distribution. The airflow distribution mode can
be adjusted so air comes from the instrument
panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and
demist outlets.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes
of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut-off wheel located below the air
vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating
elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking
with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to
provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air
from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demister outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This
setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the
AUTO button on the touchscreen on the Automatic
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort
level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
the system to function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the U.S./Metric customer-program-
mable feature within the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 226.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on
low until the engine warms up. The blower will increase in
speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be
turned off when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
CLIMATE VOICE RECOGNITION —
I
F EQUIPPED
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep
everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After the beep,
say one of the following commands:
“
Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“
Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
Did you know: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the heated seats
or steering wheel if equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested
control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling system is
functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and
concentration of coolant is used. Use of the Air
Recirculation mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window fogging.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate Control system
when the vehicle is being stored for an extended period of
time, see
Ú page 433.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy,
and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select
Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed.
Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the air distribution box, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The Climate Control system filters out dust and pollen
from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your
cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel and features both an upper and
lower storage area.
Glove Compartment
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
(Panel Mode), (A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and set the
mode control to (Panel
Mode).
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level Mode).
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to (Mix
Mode) and turn (A/C) on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If windshield
fogging starts to occur, move the
control to (Mix Mode).
1 — Upper Glove Compartment Release Button
(If Equipped)
2 — Upper Glove Compartment
3 — Lower Glove Compartment
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
If equipped with a covered upper glove compartment,
push the release button to open.
To open the lower glove compartment, pull the release
handle.
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas are located in the door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage compartments are located in both the driver and
passenger rear door trim panels.
Center Storage Compartment —
If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located between the
driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment
provides an armrest and contains both an upper and lower
storage area.
Center Storage Compartment
Pull the upper handle on the front of the armrest to raise
the cover.
Center Storage Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove compartment in
the open position. Driving with the glove compartment
open may result in injury in a collision.
WARNING!
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or a collision.
In a collision, the latch may open if the total weight of
the items stored exceeds about 10 lb (4.5 kg). These
items could be thrown about endangering occupants
of the vehicle. Items stored should not exceed a total
of 10 lb (4.5 kg).
1 — Upper Console Handle
2 — Lower Console Handle
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
With the upper lid closed, pull the lower handle to open the
lower storage bin. The lower bin contains a power inverter.
There is also a fill line located along the
rear inside wall of
the lower bin. Contents above the fill line may interfere
with cupholder placement if equipped with a premium
center console.
Forward Portion Of Lower Storage Bin
Premium Center Console — If Equipped
The premium center console is equipped with two front
storage bins located in front of the center storage
compartment. These storage bins may be equipped with
tandem doors. Push the front bin to access the
cupholders, or push the rear bin to access the coin holder/
small storage bin.
Center Console Tandem Doors— If Equipped
Tandem Doors Open Position
Push the release button at the front of the cupholder bin
to slide tray rearward to access the front lower storage bin,
or forward to access the rear lower storage bin.
Push Release Button To Slide Tray
1 — Wireless Charging Pad
2 — Power Inverter
3 — Storage Area
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment
lid in the open position. Driving with the console
compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision.
1 — Push Front Bin Access
2 — Push Rear Bin Access
1 — Front Bin Open
2 — Rear Bin Open
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
Overhead Sunglass Storage
At the front of the overhead console, a compartment is
provided for the storage of one pair of sunglasses.
From the closed position, push the door latch to open the
compartment.
Overhead Sunglass Door
Front Bench Seat Storage — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a front bench seat, storage
can be found by folding down the center seatback.
A console storage area and cupholders are available.
Front Bench Seat Storage Location
With the seatback in the upright position, lift the center
seat bottom to access additional storage underneath
the seat.
Seatback Storage — If Equipped
Located in the back of both the driver and passenger front
seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
Seatback Storage
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin —
If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second row
seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage bins
have removable liners that can be easily removed for
cleaning.
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch
To open in-floor storage bin, remove the floor mat
(if equipped), and lift upward on the handle of the latch
and open the lid.
NOTE:
The front seat may have to be moved forward to fully open
the lid.
Opened Storage Bin
Storage Bin (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs
the length of the cab.
Storage Bin
Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped
Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat may be equipped
with a folding load floor.
Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward
position.
Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you may
experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration, or
sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor may
move around with force and strike occupants, resulting
in serious or fatal injury.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.
Load Floor Legs In Opened Position
3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds into
position.
Load Floor In Open Position
4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access Under The
Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward
position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of
the load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.
Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in
the secured down position before you operate the
vehicle.
Below Rear Seat Storage (Crew Cab)
The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under
the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage
compartment.
If equipped with a fold flat load floor, unsnap the securing
snap located at either side of the load floor and lift upward
on the fold flat lid to open the storage compartments
Ú page 66.
Crew Cab Storage
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position. When
stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor could
move to the down position causing serious injury.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
USB/AUX CONTROL
Located on the center stack, just below the instrument
panel, is the main media hub. There are four total USB
ports: Two Mini-USBs (Type C) and two Standard USBs
(Type A). There is also an AUX port located in the middle of
the USB ports.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port may
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay® features,
if equipped. For further information, refer to “Android
Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same time, and both
ports will provide charging capabilities. Only one port can
transfer data to the system at a time. A pop-up will appear
and allow you to select the device transferring data.
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A USB port
and another device is plugged into the Type C USB port, a
message will appear and allow you to select which device
to use.
Center Stack USB/AUX Media Hub
The third and fourth USB ports are located behind the
center console, above the power inverter. These USB ports
are charge only.
Rear Center Console Mini-USB (Type C) USB Ports
Applicable to only Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display
and Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display radios: different
scenarios are listed as follows when a non-phone device is
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports, and when a
phone device is plugged into the smaller and larger USB
ports:
“A new device is now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous connection
was lost.”
“Another device is in use through the same USB port.
Please disconnect the first device to use the second
device.”
1 — Standard USB Type A Port #1
2 — AUX Port
3 — Standard USB Type A Port #2
1 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 1
2 — Rear Charge Only USB Ports 2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
NOTE:
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only USB
ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into a Media
USB port, a message will display on the touchscreen that
the device is not supported by the system.
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause the
connection to a previous device to be lost.
If equipped, there is also a charge-only USB port located in
the center console of the vehicle.
Center Console Charge-Only USB Port
If equipped, two Mini-USB ports (Type C), two Standard
USB ports (Type A), and one AUX port may be located to the
left of the center stack, just below the climate controls.
USB/AUX Media Hub
Some USB ports support media and charging. You can use
features, such as Apple CarPlay®, Android Auto™,
Pandora®, and others while charging your phone.
NOTE:
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may cause
the connection to a previous device to be lost.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual or visit UconnectPhone.com.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet can provide
power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the
standard “cigar lighter” style plug. The 12 Volt power
outlets and 5 Volt (2.5 Amp) USB port (Charge Only) have
a cap attached to the outlet indicating “12 V DC”, together
with either a key symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the ON/
RUN or ACC position for the outlet to provide power. The
battery symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to
the battery, and can provide power at all times.
1 — Standard USB Type A Ports
2 — Mini-USB Type C Ports
3 — AUX Port
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 W
(13 Amp) at 12 Volts. If the 160 W (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
An auxiliary power outlet can be found in the tray on top of
the center stack. This power outlet works when the ignition
is in the ON/RUN, ACC, or OFF position.
Power Outlet — Top Of Center Stack
Power Outlet Fuse Locations:
F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow UCI Port/ USB Rear Center
Console
F90 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet
Battery Fed (If Equipped)
F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Instrument Panel Power Outlet
Ignition Fed (If Equipped)
F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter/ Instrument Panel
Power Outlet (If Equipped)
When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug any
equipment as to not drain the battery of the vehicle. All
accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be removed
or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
Interior Power Inverters
If equipped, 115 Volt (400 W maximum) power inverters
may be located inside the vehicle. These inverters can
power cellular phones, electronics and other low power
devices requiring power up to 400 W. Certain video game
consoles exceed this power limit, as will most power tools.
All power inverters are designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 400 W is exceeded, the
power inverter shuts down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the outlet the inverter should reset.
The front power inverter is located in center console
toward the right hand side, just under the Wireless
Charging Pad (if equipped).
Center Console Power Inverter Outlet (If Equipped)
There is also a second 115 Volt (400 W maximum) power
inverter located on the rear of the center console.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle's battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge suffi-
ciently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with acces-
sories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Rear Center Console Power Inverter Outlet (If Equipped)
NOTE:
400 W is the maximum for the inverter, not each outlet.
If three outlets are in use, 400 W is shared among the
devices plugged in.
If equipped with a front bench seat, the inverter is located
to the right of the center stack, just below the climate
controls.
Center Stack Power Inverter (If Equipped)
Exterior Power Inverter — If Equipped
Vehicles not equipped with a RamBox may be equipped
with a 115 Volt (400 W maximum) power inverter located
just inside the truck bed.
Exterior Power Inverter (If Equipped)
The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is only found
on vehicles equipped with an exterior power inverter. The
switch only controls on/off operation of the power outlet in
the truck bed or, if equipped, the RamBox. It does not
control on/off operation of the power outlets located
inside the cabin of the vehicle.
Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
For information on the outlet found inside the RamBox,
see Ú page 82.
To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in a device.
The outlet turns off when the device is unplugged.
NOTE:
The power inverter only turns on if the ignition is in the
ACC or ON/RUN position.
Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter
shuts down if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WIRELESS CHARGING PAD —
I
F EQUIPPED
Wireless Charging Pad
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15 W (3 Amp) Qi
wireless charging pad located inside of the center console.
This charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge your Qi
enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that uses
magnetic induction to transfer power to your mobile
device.
Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi wireless
charging. If the phone is not equipped with Qi wireless
charging functionality, an aftermarket sleeve or a
specialized back plate can be purchased from your mobile
phone provider or a local electronics retailer. Please see
your phone’s owner’s manual for further information.
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an anti-slip
mat to hold your mobile phone in place and an LED
indicator light.
LED Indicator Status:
No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a device.
Blue Light: Device is detected, and is charging.
Red Light/Flashing: Internal error, or foreign object is
detected.
Important Notes Regarding This Vehicle’s Wireless
Charging Pad:
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN or START position
and all vehicle doors must be closed for the wireless
charging pad to operate.
Wireless charging is not as fast as when the phone is
connected to a wired charger.
The phone’s protective case must be removed when
placed on the wireless charging pad.
iPhone® 12 (including iPod®) is equipped with soft-
ware to protect the device from overheating. When the
software is active, the rate of charge is slowed down to
protect the device.
Phones must always be placed on the wireless
charging pad within the outline shown on the pad so
that its charging parts connect with the charging coils
of the system. Movement of the phone during charging
may prevent or slow the rate of charge.
Having multiple applications open on the phone while
charging will reduce the charging efficiency, and may
even shut down an application that is actively running
(i.e. Apple CarPlay®). This may also cause the phone to
overheat.
Wireless chargers may implement certain methods to
prevent the phone from overheating during charging
such as slowing down the rate of charge. In certain
instances, the device may shut down for a brief period
of time (when the device reaches a certain tempera-
ture). If this happens, it does not mean there is a fault
with the wireless charging pad. This may just be a
protective measure to prevent damage to the phone.
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
The window controls on the driver's door control all the
door windows.
Power Window Switches
CAUTION!
The key fob should not be placed on the charging pad
or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Doing so can cause
excessive heat buildup and damage to the fob. Placing
the fob in close proximity of the charging pad blocks the
fob from being detected by the vehicle and prevents the
vehicle from starting.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
The passenger door windows can also be operated by
using the single window controls on the passenger door
trim panel. The window controls will operate only when the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way (manually), push the window
switch down briefly and release.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The timing is programmable within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 226.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power window
switches have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch down briefly, then release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down during the
Auto-Down operation, pull up or push down on the switch
briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up briefly and release; the window
will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch briefly
and release it when you want the window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-closure, it
will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the
obstacle and use the window switch again to close the
window.
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the
auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If
this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to close the
window manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open the
window completely and continue to hold the switch
down for an additional two seconds after the window
is fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim panel
allows you to disable the window controls on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, push
and release the window lockout button (the indicator light
on the button will turn on). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button again (the
indicator light on the button will turn off).
Window Lockout Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not
leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the windows while operating the
power window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is
almost closed. To avoid personal injury be sure to clear
your arms, hands, fingers and all objects from the
window path before closing.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SLIDING REAR WINDOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on
the overhead console. Push the switch rearward to open
the glass. Pull the switch forward to close the glass.
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch
MANUAL SLIDING REAR WINDOW —
I
F EQUIPPED
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the
front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
SINGLE PANE POWER SUNROOF
The power sunroof switches are located on the overhead
console between the courtesy/reading lights.
Power Sunroof Switches
Opening Sunroof
Express Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push OPEN on the sunroof switch
and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will
open automatically from any position and stop at full
open.
To close the sunroof, push CLOSE on the sunroof switch
and release it within one-half second. The sunroof will
close automatically from any position.
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible
to children. Do not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
Ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result
in serious injury or death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
During Express Open or Express Close operation, any
other actuation of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold OPEN on the sunroof
switch.
To close the sunroof, push and hold CLOSE on the sunroof
switch.
Any release of the switch during open or close operation
will stop the sunroof movement. The sunroof will remain in
a partially opened position until the switch is operated and
held again.
NOTE:
If the sunshade is in the closed position when Express or
Manual Open operation is initiated, the sunshade will
automatically open with the sunroof.
Express Venting Sunroof
To vent open the sunroof, push TILT on the vent switch and
release within one-half second. To close the sunroof from
the vent position, push DOWN on the vent switch and
release within one-half second.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the closing of
the sunroof during the Express Close operation. If an
obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction
if this occurs.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch
Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable and the
sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE:
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off timing is programmable through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 226.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel. Periodically check for and clear out any
debris that may have collected in the tracks.
HOOD
TO OPEN THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the
steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the
hood and push the safety latch lever to the left to
release it, before raising the hood.
Safety Latch Location
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Vehicle must be at a stop and the gear selector must
be in PARK.
While lifting the hood, use both hands.
Before lifting the hood, check that the wiper arms are
not in motion and not in the lifted position.
TO CLOSE THE HOOD
In one continuous motion, pull down on the front edge of
the hood with moderate force until the angle is below the
crossover point (where the gas props are no longer
resisting) and let the hood continue to fall closed from its
own inertia.
TAILGATE
OPENING
The power tailgate may be opened by pushing the tailgate
release pad located on the tailgate door.
The tailgate damper strut will lower the tailgate to the
open position (if equipped).
Electronic Tailgate Release — If Equipped
The key fob may be equipped with an electronic
release feature for the tailgate, allowing
hands-free tailgate opening. To activate, push
and release the Tailgate Release button on the
key fob twice within five seconds. The tailgate door will
unlatch, and slowly lower into the open position.
If equipped, a button on the center overhead console
inside the vehicle can be used to release the tailgate. An
indicator light may also signal when the tailgate is open.
For the tailgate to lower, the vehicle must be stationary
and in PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
The optional Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Ú page 86 may
prevent electronic tailgate release. The Tonneau Cover
must be removed or folded up before releasing the
tailgate.
CLOSING
To close the tailgate, push it upward until both sides are
latched. After closing the tailgate, pull it back to be sure it
is latched securely.
The tailgate can be locked using the key fob lock button.
TAILGATE REMOVAL
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the rearview camera
function.
To remove the tailgate, refer to the following instructions:
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera
and or power locks (if equipped)
Ú
page 77.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables
by releasing the lock tang from the pivot.
NOTE:
Make sure tailgate is supported when removing support
cables.
Locking Tang
3. Position the tailgate on a 45 degree angle.
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side
pivot clears the hanger bracket.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side
pivot.
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck pickup box.
Disconnecting The Rear Camera And
Remote Keyless Entry
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera or
Remote Keyless Entry connector bracket located on
the rear sill.
Connector Bracket
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by
pushing inward in the locking tab.
Locking Tab
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring the
connector bracket does not fall into the sill.
Disconnected Harness
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in the
glove compartment) to the chassis wiring harness
and insert the bracket back into the sill.
Chassis Wiring Harness
Chassis Plug
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the
exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or
Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of leaks.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the glove
compartment) to the tailgate wiring harness to
ensure that the terminals do not corrode.
Wire Harness Bracket
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the
forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will
prevent damaging the connector and bracket when
storing or reinstalling the tailgate.
Taped Tailgate Harness
BED STEP — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with an extendable bed
step on the driver’s side of the tailgate to provide easier
entry and exit into the truck bed.
Bed Step Location
Bed Step Components
To extend the bed step, place your foot on the protruding
foot tab located on the left edge of the bed step, and push
rearward. A small amount of force will release the spring
load, and extend the bed step out and away from the
tailgate.
1 — Tailgate Plug Release
2 — Tailgate Plug
3 — Tailgate Harness
1 — Bed Step
2 — Foot Tab
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
NOTE:
Once the spring load is overcome, the bed step will extend
out quickly, so be sure to stand in a position that will avoid
coming into contact with the step as it extends.
Bed Step (Extended)
To stow the bed step back under the tailgate, push the bed
step forward with your foot until the bed step is retracted
by the spring load.
PICKUP BOX
The pickup box has many features designed for utility and
convenience.
Pickup Box Features
NOTE:
If you are installing a toolbox, ladder rack or headache
rack at the front of the pickup box, you must use Mopar®
Box Reinforcement Brackets that are available from an
authorized dealer.
You can carry wide building materials (sheets of plywood,
etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber across
the box in the indentations provided above the wheel
housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the floor.
There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side
bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel
housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side
to side to create separate load compartments in the
pickup box.
There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of
the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1,000 lb
(450 kg) total.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to stow the bed step with your hands.
The low clearance space between the bed step and the
rear bumper as the bed step returns to the stowed
position could result in injury to your hands or fingers.
1 — Cleats
2 — Upper Load Floor Indents
3 — Bulk Head Dividers
4 — Anchors
WARNING!
The pickup box is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
Care should always be exercised when operating a
vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds may
need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough roads may
cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo that may
result in vehicle damage. If wide building materials
are to be frequently carried, the installation of a
support is recommended. This will restrain the cargo
and transfer the load to the pickup box floor.
If you wish to carry more than 600 lb (272 kg) of
material suspended above the wheelhouse,
supports must be installed to transfer the weight of
the load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage
may result. The use of proper supports will permit
loading up to the rated payload.
Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an
accident causing serious or fatal injury.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo Camera that
allows you to see an image of the inside of the pickup box.
The image will be displayed in the Uconnect screen.
The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom center area of
the Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL).
A touchscreen X button to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in
REVERSE gear.
A display timer is initiated when the Cargo Camera image
is displayed. The image will continue to be displayed until
the display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle
speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the touchscreen
X button to disable display of the Cargo Camera image is
pressed.
Cargo Camera With Dynamic Centerline (Available With
Surround View Camera Only) — If Equipped
The Dynamic Centerline feature provides an overlay on the
Cargo Camera display screen that aligns to the center of
the pickup box to aid in hooking up a fifth wheel camper or
gooseneck trailer. The centerline auto aligns to the center
of the pickup box, and can also be manually adjusted. The
centerline will adjust in response to steering angle inputs,
and will not obstruct the gooseneck receiver or an
approaching trailer gooseneck in the camera feed.
Activation
The Dynamic Centerline feature can be activated through
the Uconnect Settings by pressing the Cargo Camera
button, followed by the Adjust Centerline button on the
touchscreen.
If the Dynamic Centerline feature is turned on, the overlay
will display anytime the Cargo Camera image is displayed.
Adjusting Centerline
Refer to the following steps to manually adjust the
centerline:
1. Press the Adjust Centerline button located in the
bottom right corner of the Cargo Camera display.
2. Use the arrows on the bottom left corner of the Cargo
Camera display to adjust the centerline horizontally
or vertically.
3. Once the desired position is achieved, press the
Accept button to set the centerline to the newly
specified position.
Deactivation
The Dynamic Centerline feature will automatically be
deactivated whenever the Cargo Camera display is
deactivated. It can also be manually deactivated through
the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 226.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h),
the Cargo Camera image will be displayed continuously
until the touchscreen X button to disable display of the
Cargo Camera image is pressed.
The touchscreen X button to disable the display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in reverse.
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and
dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off —
With Uconnect 5/5 NAV
1. Press the Controls button located on the bottom of
the Uconnect display.
2. Press the Cargo Camera button to turn the
Cargo Camera system on.
NOTE:
Once initiated by the Cargo Camera button, the Cargo
Camera image will be displayed until the vehicle speed
remains below 8 mph (13 km/h) and the 10 second timer
runs out. The image may be deactivated by pressing the
touchscreen X button, placing the ignition in the OFF
position, placing the gear selector in PARK, or pressing the
touchscreen X button. On deactivation, the previous
selected screen will appear.
A touchscreen button to indicate the
current active camera image being
displayed is made available whenever
the Cargo Camera image is displayed.
A touchscreen button to switch the
display to rear view camera image
is made available whenever the
Cargo Camera image is displayed.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
BED RAIL TIE-DOWN SYSTEM —
I
F EQUIPPED
NOTE:
This feature is only available for vehicles equipped with a
RamBox.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed
that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Adjustable Cleats
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of
the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo
properly secure.
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
counterclockwise several turns. Then pull out on the cleat
and slide it to the detent nearest the desired location.
Make sure the cleat is seated in the detent and tighten
the nut.
Adjustable Cleat Assembly
Cleat Removal (With Tonneau Cover)
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end
cap screw located in the center of the end cap, using a
#T30 Torx head driver. Remove the end cap and slide the
cleat off the end of the rail.
End Cap Screw Location With Tonneau Cover
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed 250 lb
(113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat should
not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or damage to
the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Cleat Removal (Without Tonneau Cover)
Remove the end cap by pushing upward on the release
button located beneath the end cap while pulling the cap
away from the rail. The cleat can now be removed by
sliding it off the end of the rail.
End Cap Release Button Without Tonneau Cover
Pull End Cap Away From Rail
RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box storage
and cargo management system consisting of up to
three features:
Integrated box side storage bins
Cargo divider (if equipped)
Bed rail tie-down system (if equipped)
Ú page 81
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING RAMBOX
Push and release the lock or unlock button on the key fob
to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox
Ú page 17. The RamBox storage bins can be locked using
the vehicle key. To lock and unlock the storage bin, insert
the key into the keyhole on the push button and turn
clockwise to lock or counterclockwise to unlock. Always
return the key to the upright (vertical) position before
removing the key from the push button.
RAMBOX CARGO STORAGE BINS
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup
box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable,
illuminated storage for up to 300 lb (136 kg) of evenly
distributed cargo.
RamBox Cargo Storage Bins
To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked, push
and release the button located on the lid. The RamBox lid
will open upward to allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully
open.
CAUTION!
Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before
moving or driving vehicle.
Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be
minimized to prevent damage to the lid and latching/
hinging mechanisms.
Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to heavy/
sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to vehicle
motion. In order to minimize potential for damage,
secure all cargo to prevent movement and protect
inside surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp objects with
appropriate padding.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause
damage to the vehicle:
Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
properly secured.
Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 300 lb (136 kg)
for 2500 and 3500 series vehicles per bin.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
NOTE:
The RamBox will not open when the button is pushed if the
RamBox is locked.
RamBox Pushbutton And Lock
The interior of the RamBox will automatically illuminate
when the lid is opened. In addition to the automatic
illumination, there is a manual on/off switch located at the
rear of each storage bin. Pushing the switch once will turn
off the bin lights, pushing the switch again will turn the
lights back on.
RamBox Light Switch
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow
water to drain from bins). To remove a plug, pull up on
the edge. To install, push the plug downward into the
drain hole.
RamBox Drain Plug Removal
NOTE:
Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo dividers and
shelf supports. These accessories (in addition to other
RamBox accessories) are available from Mopar®.
If equipped, a 115 Volt (400 W maximum) inverter may be
located inside the RamBox of your vehicle. The inverter
can be turned on by the Instrument Panel Power Inverter
switch located to the left of the steering wheel. The
RamBox inverter can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 400 W.
Certain video game consoles exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
RamBox Power Inverter
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time could
cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the lid is
required to stay open for extended periods of time, it is
recommended that the bin lights be turned off
manually using the on/off switch.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The Instrument Panel Power Inverter switch is only found
on vehicles equipped with an exterior power inverter
inside the RamBox or truck bed. The switch only controls
on/off operation of the exterior power inverter; it does not
control on/off operation of the power outlets located
inside the cabin of the vehicle.
Instrument Panel Power Inverter Switch
RAMBOX SAFETY WARNING
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
RamBox Emergency Release Lever
As a security measure, an Emergency Release Lever is
built into the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
Emergency Release Lever
WARNING!
Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
Do not allow children to have access to the storage
bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may not
be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers
open.
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched while
the vehicle is in motion.
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie-down.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
BED DIVIDER — IF EQUIPPED
The bed divider has two functional positions:
Divider Position
Storage Position
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing your cargo
and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the
bed. There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels
which allow for various positions to assist in managing
your cargo.
To install the bed divider into a divider position, perform
the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the divider side gates.
Center Handle And Lock
2. With the side gates open, position the divider so the
outboard ends align with the intended slots in the
sides of the bed.
Aligning Gate To Slots
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard
ends are secured into the intended slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the
side gates in the closed position.
Side Gates Closed
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place.
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
3 — Unlocked Position
4 — Locked Position
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed divider is at the front of
the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when
not in use.
To install the bed divider into the storage position, perform
the same steps as you would for the divider position,
except position the divider fully forward in the bed against
the front panel.
Storage Position
The outboard ends should be positioned in front of the
cargo tie-down loops.
Cargo Tie-Down Loop
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED
The Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover can be installed on the truck
bed to protect your gear and cargo.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER REMOVAL
To remove the Tonneau Cover, use the following steps:
1. Open the tailgate to gain access to the rear pair of
Tonneau Cover clamps located on the underside of
the cover.
Location Of Rear Latches
NOTE:
If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.
2. Pull both clamp handles down to release the Tonneau
Cover’s rear panel.
Released Position
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
3. From the Released Position, send the clamps to the
Stowed Position by pushing from the yellow bumper
upward. Listen for a “clicking” sound to confirm the
clamp has been stowed properly.
Stowed Position
4. Fold the rear panel up onto the center panel
(Intermediate Position).
Folded Rear Panel (Intermediate Position)
NOTE:
The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau Cover is
in this position.
5. Fold the rear and center panels up onto the front
panel (Tri-Folded Position).
Tri-Folded Position
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels, the
sections
MUST be held together to avoid damage
to the cover material.
Fold the panels gently. It is not recommended to
allow the panels to drop under their own weight.
CAUTION!
Make sure the Tonneau Cover clamp and clamp wire
are in the proper stowed position. If the clamp and
clamp wire are not properly stowed, damage to the
Tonneau Cover material will result.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Clip both stowage straps to prevent the Tonneau
Cover panels from unfolding.
Stowage Strap
7. Once in the Tri-Folded Position, pull both front clamp
handles down to the Released Position.
Released Position
8. From the Released Position, send the clamps to the
Stowed Position by pushing from the yellow bumper
upward. Listen for a “clicking” sound to confirm the
clamp has been properly stowed.
Stowed Position
9. Utilizing two people, remove the Tonneau Cover.
NOTE:
Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded completely,
and the stowage straps are engaged, before removing the
cover from the vehicle.
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER
I
NSTALLATION
To install the Tonneau Cover follow these steps:
1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the truck bed
and push the cover forward against the front of the
truck bed. The Tonneau Cover centers itself when
placed on the vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure to always push the Tonneau Cover all the way
forward on the truck bed. Failure to do so might prevent
proper clamp engagement, or interfere with the electronic
tailgate release function (if equipped).
Location Of Front Latches
CAUTION!
The folded Tonneau Cover must be latched by both
front latches and both front stowage straps or damage
to the Tonneau Cover or vehicle may occur.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to release
the clamps from the Stowed Position.
Stowed Position
3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of the box
(or flange of the RamBox rail, if equipped) to the
Semi-Clamped Position.
Semi Clamped Position
4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position
to properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not improperly
attached to the truck bed flange.
Improper Clamp Position
5. Disengage the stowage straps.
6. Unfold the center and rear panels to the Intermediate
Position.
Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven)
NOTE:
When folding the center and rear panels, the sections
MUST be held together to avoid damage to the cover
material.
Incorrect Folding — Will Cause Damage
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Correct Folding — Hold Panels Together
7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.
Fully Unfolded Position
8. Pull the rear clamp handles down into the Released
Position.
Stowed Position
9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box
(or flange of RamBox rail, if equipped) to the Semi
Clamped Position.
Semi Clamped Position
10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position
to properly engage the clamps.
Clamped Position
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Improper Clamp Position
NOTE:
Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not partially
clamped to the truck bed flange.
The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in the
clamped position by placing a lock through the locking
hole.
Locking Hole
TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER CLEANING
For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover, use Mopar®
Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and Mopar® Leather & Vinyl
Conditioner/Protectant.
WARNING!
You must ensure the Tonneau Cover is properly
installed on the vehicle before driving. An unsecured
Tonneau Cover can fly off of the vehicle while in motion,
resulting in a collision, personal injury, and death.
Failure to follow this procedure can also damage the
vehicle and the Tonneau Cover.
CAUTION!
It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the Tonneau
Cover is properly installed on the vehicle. Failure to
follow this procedure can result in detachment of the
Tonneau Cover from the vehicle and/or damage to the
vehicle/Tonneau Cover.
2
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 93
MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — GAS ENGINE
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in
revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Voltmeter
When the vehicle is in the RUN state, the gauge
indicates the electrical system voltage. The
pointer should stay within the normal range if the
battery is charged. If the pointer moves to either
extreme left or right and remains there during
normal driving, the electrical system should be
serviced.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages
Ú page 104.
The display always shows one of the main menu
item after ignition is placed on.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate the oil pres-
sure when the engine is running. A continuous
high or low reading under normal driving condi-
tions may indicate a lubrication system malfunc-
tion. Immediate service should be obtained from
an authorized dealer.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Temperature Gauge
The gauge pointer shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. The pointer positioned within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system is
operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits
of the normal operating range.
7. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if
your vehicle overheats
Ú page 396.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,”
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
HIGHLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GAS ENGINE
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 95
HIGHLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — GAS ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages
Ú page 104.
The display always shows one of the main menu
item after ignition is placed on.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The gauge pointer shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. The pointer positioned within the normal
range indicates that the engine cooling system is
operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It
should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits
of the normal operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if
your vehicle overheats
Ú page 396.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,”
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — GASOLINE
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Display controls located on the steering wheel will allow you to change your display from Digital to Analog.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — GASOLINE
1. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within 203°F - 230°F
(95°C - 110°C) indicates that the engine cooling
system is operating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain
grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal
operating range.
2. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
4. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
5. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
Ú page 104.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the
ignition is first cycled.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if
your vehicle overheats
Ú page 396.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,” pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H,”
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized
dealer for service.
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ENGINE
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 99
MIDLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Engine Coolant Temperature
This gauge shows the engine coolant tempera-
ture. The gauge pointer will likely show higher
temperatures when driving in hot weather, up
mountain grades, or in heavy stop and go traffic.
If the red Warning Light turns on while driving,
safely bring the vehicle to a stop, and turn off the
engine. DO NOT operate the vehicle until the
cause is corrected.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages
Ú page 104.
The display always shows one of the main menu
item after ignition is placed on.
4. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some oil pres-
sure when the engine is running. A continuous
high or low reading under normal driving condi-
tions may indicate a lubrication system malfunc-
tion. Immediate service should be obtained from
an authorized dealer.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
6. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of Diesel
Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is required to
maintain normal vehicle operation and emissions
compliance. If something is wrong with the gauge,
a DEF Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) will be displayed. More information is
available in the instrument cluster display section
under the heading of DEF Warning Messages.
NOTE:
• The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF to
the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the
DEF system, the gauge may not update to the
new level. See an authorized dealer for service.
• The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
heater will warm up the DEF fluid and allow the
gauge to update after a period of run time.
Under very cold conditions, it is possible that
the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for
several drives.
7. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel filler
door is located.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others
could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. It is
recommended to call an authorized dealer for service if
your vehicle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads greater
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
HIGHLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL ENGINE
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 101
HIGHLINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the instrument cluster display messages
Ú page 104.
The display always shows one of the main menu
item after ignition is placed on.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of Diesel
Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is required to
maintain normal vehicle operation and emissions
compliance. If something is wrong with the gauge,
a DEF Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) will be displayed. More information is
available in the instrument cluster display section
under the heading of DEF Warning Messages.
NOTE:
• The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed with
a large amount of full reserve. So the level
sensor will indicate a full reading even before
the tank is completely full. To put it another
way, there’s additional storage capacity in the
tank above the Full mark that’s not represented
in the gauge. You may not see any movement in
the reading – even after driving up to 200 miles
(322 kilometers) in some cases.
• The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF to
the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the
DEF system, the gauge may not update to the
new level. See an authorized dealer for service.
• The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
heater will warm up the DEF fluid and allow the
gauge to update after a period of run time.
Under very cold conditions, it is possible that
the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for
several drives.
5. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel filler
door is located.
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — DIESEL
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 103
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Display controls located on the steering wheel will allow you to change your display from Analog to Digital.
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
D
ESCRIPTIONS — DIESEL
1. Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Gauge
The DEF Gauge displays the actual level of Diesel
Exhaust Fluid in the DEF tank. DEF is required to
maintain normal vehicle operation and emissions
compliance. If something is wrong with the gauge,
a DEF Warning Message or Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) will be displayed. More information is
available in the instrument cluster display section
under the heading of DEF Warning Messages.
NOTE:
• The DEF tank on these vehicles is designed with
a large amount of full reserve. So the level
sensor will indicate a full reading even before
the tank is completely full. To put it another
way, there’s additional storage capacity in the
tank above the Full mark that’s not represented
in the gauge. You may not see any movement in
the reading – even after driving up to 200 miles
(322 kilometers) in some cases.
• The gauge may take up to five seconds to
update after adding a gallon or more of DEF to
the DEF tank. If you have a fault related to the
DEF system, the gauge may not update to the
new level. See an authorized dealer for service.
• The DEF gauge may also not immediately
update after a refill if the temperature of the
DEF fluid is below 39°F (4°C). The DEF tank
heater will warm up the DEF fluid and allow the
gauge to update after a period of run time.
Under very cold conditions, it is possible that
the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for
several drives.
2. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
3. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank
when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
4. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per
minute (RPM x 1000).
5. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display
Ú page 104.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check when the
ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument cluster
display, which offers useful information to the driver. With
the ignition in the OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles,
or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument cluster
display is designed to display important information about
your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on the
instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can
show you how systems are working and give you warnings
when they are not. The steering wheel mounted controls
allow you to scroll through the main menus and
submenus. You can access the specific information you
want and make selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
1 – Instrument Cluster Display Screen
2 – Instrument Cluster Display Controls
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 105
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following instrument cluster display control
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel.
Base/Midline Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Premium Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
Using the
up or down arrow button allows you to
cycle through the Main Menu Items.
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
Using the
left or right arrow button allows you to
cycle through the submenu items of the Main menu item.
NOTE:
Holding the
up / down or left / right arrow
button will loop the user through the currently selected
menu or options presented on the screen.
Main menu and submenus wrap for continuous
scrolling.
Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that main menu will be displayed.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer:
Pushing the OK button changes units (mph or km/h).
Menu Button
Press Menu button for Home Screen display.
Navigate left or right to highlight desired tile.
Press
OK to select desired. Once OK is pressed, cluster
will navigate to selected submenu (e.g. “Audio”).
NOTE:
Exiting Home Screen Speed Limit tile and Navigation tile
with no Ethernet navigates to Speedometer submenu.
Press
up or down to select different screen
within selected category.
If Menu button is pressed while in this view, cluster will
return to previously displayed screen.
Press and hold
OK button to enter edit mode.
Instruction text may overlay lower tachometer
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
1 — Left Arrow Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — OK Button
6 — Menu Button
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
For Screen Setup:
OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
Within each submenu layer, the
up and down
arrow buttons will allow the user to select the item of
interest.
Pushing the
OK button makes the selection and a
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
the first page of the submenu).
Pushing the
left arrow button will exit each
submenu layer and return to the main menu.
Custom Tile Configuration — If Equipped
To customize the instrument cluster further, you are able
to select up to five tiles to display information based on
your needs.
Press the
MENU button for the Home Screen display
Navigate
Left or Right to highlight desired tile
Press
OK to select the tile and navigate to the selected
submenu and press
OK again to add your selection to
your tile view
The main menu options of the home screen are Driver
Info, Vehicle Info, Navigation — If Equipped, Audio, and
Off Road
Custom Tile Screen Example
You can customize your Instrument Cluster Display with up
to five tiles that may consist of the following:
NOTE:
These options may vary based on your vehicle trim level.
Navigation
Route Set / Route Not Set
Trip A / Trip B
Vehicle Info
Coolant Temp
Trans Temp
Oil Temp
Oil Pressure
Battery Voltage
Oil Life
Tire Pressure
Fuel Economy
Air Suspension
Driver Info
Driver Assist
Audio
Audio Info
Off Road
Selec-Terrain / Air Suspension Status
Steering Angle
Pitch
Roll
Trailer Tow
Trailer Trip
Trailer Brake
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitor
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 107
OIL LIFE RESET
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
engine oil change indicator system.
The “Oil Change Required” message
will display in the instrument cluster
display after a single chime has
sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
your personal driving style.
NOTE:
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls
for the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll
downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.”
3. Push and release the
right arrow button to access
the ”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up or down to
select “Oil Life.”
4. Push and hold the
right arrow button to select
“Reset”.
5. Push and release the
down arrow button to select
“Yes,” then push and release the
right arrow
button to reset the Oil Life to 100%.
6. Push and release the
up arrow button to exit the
instrument cluster display screen.
Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
OFF position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you start the
vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset.
If necessary, repeat this procedure.
DISPLAY MENU ITEMS
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display.
Speedometer
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the speedometer menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
right
arrow button to cycle the display between mph and km/h.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) and LaneSense systems.
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Driver Assist menu is displayed in the instrument
cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature
The instrument cluster display displays the current ACC
system settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the ACC on/off button (located on the steering
wheel) until one of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the instrument
cluster display:
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
instrument cluster
Ú page 117.
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC activity
occurs, which may include any of the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the current
LaneSense system settings. The information displayed
depends on LaneSense system status and the conditions
that need to be met.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
right arrow button
to enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info. Follow the
directional prompts to access or reset any of the following
Vehicle Info submenu items:
MIDLINE OR HIGHLINE CLUSTER
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Trans Temperature — If Equipped
Oil Temperature
Oil Pressure
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Boost Pressure — If Equipped
Diesel Particulate Filter
Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Battery Voltage — If Equipped
Gauge Summary — If Equipped
Coolant Temp
Trans Temp
Oil Temp
Oil Pressure
Engine Hours — If Equipped
PREMIUM CLUSTER
Fuel Economy
Average
Current
Range to Empty
Gauge Summary
Coolant Temperature — If Equipped
Battery Voltage — If Equipped
Trans Temperature
Oil Summary
Oil Temperature
Oil Life
Oil Pressure — If Equipped
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Diesel Summary
Exhaust Brake — If Equipped
Boost Pressure — If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life — If Equipped
Engine Hours — If Equipped
Off Road
Push and release the up or down arrow button until
the Off Road menu icon is displayed in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
left or right
arrow button to scroll through the information submenus.
Drivetrain
Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical and
numerical value of calculated average front wheel
angle from the steering wheel orientation.
Transfer Case Lock Status: displays “Lock”
graphic only during 4WD High, 4WD High Part
Time, 4WD Low status.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 109
Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If Equipped):
displays front and rear or rear only axle locker
graphic, and sway bar connection graphic with text
message (connected or disconnected).
Pitch And Roll
Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle in the
graphic with the angle number on the screen.
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to display the pitch
and roll, “- -” will display in place of the numbers, and the
graphic will be grayed out. A message indicating the
necessary speed for the feature to become available will
also display.
Fuel Economy — If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and Hold the
right
arrow button to reset Average Fuel Economy.
Current Fuel Economy Gauge
Average Fuel Economy Value
Range To Empty
Trip A/Trip B
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Trip menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster
display. Push and release the
right arrow button to
enter the submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip
B information will display the following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Push and hold the
right arrow button to reset all
information.
Navigation — If Equipped
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Navigation display title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display, “Hold
OK to Start Route” will display when
no active route is set. “Hold
OK to Cancel Route” will
display when active route is set. Use the
left or right
arrow button to zoom in or out on the display
Ú page 226.
Trailer Tow
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. Push and release the
right or left
arrow button to cycle through the following trailer tow
information:
Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold the
OK button to reset the distance.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM):
Braking Output
Trailer Type
ITBM Gain
Trailer Light Check: Push and hold the OK button to
begin the Trailer Light Test sequence
Ú page 215.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring: The Instrument
Cluster Display will display the Trailer Tire Pressure for
a connected trailer with sensors that match the active
trailer profile. When a low tire is present, the low tire
value will be displayed in red, and the affected low tire
will have a red glow. “Trailer Tire Low“ will be displayed
on the center bottom of the Instrument Cluster Display
screen.
Audio
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in the instrument
cluster display. This menu will display the audio source
information, including the Song name, Artist name, and
audio source with an accompanying graphic.
Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status pop-up will
display on the screen. The pop-up will remain until the
phone is answered or ignored.
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the previous media
source information displayed on the screen. When the
pop-up is no longer displayed, the display will return to the
last used screen.
Messages
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature
shows the number of stored warning messages. Push and
release the
right or left arrow button to cycle
through stored messages.
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Settings — If Equipped
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
Settings displays in the instrument cluster display.
Follow the prompts to display and set any of the following
Vehicle Settings.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following settings.
If equipped with a base radio (non-touchscreen),
Vehicle Settings will be included in the instrument
cluster display.
If equipped with a touchscreen radio, the Vehicle
Settings will be included in the radio head unit.
MIDLINE OR HIGHLINE CLUSTER
Current Gear
Off
On
Odometer
No Decimal Point
Decimal Point
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
Cancel
Restore
Upper Left or Right
None Time Current Econ
Compass Range Trip A Distance
Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip –
If Equipped
Trailer Brake Oil Pressure
Coolant Temp Oil Temp Battery Voltage
Trans Temp Oil Life
Exhaust Brake –
If Equipped
Boost Pressure –
If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life –
If Equipped
Upper Center
None Compass Outside Temp
Time Range To Empty Average Econ
Current Econ Trip A Distance Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip
Audio
(show/hide)
Speedometer
Menu TItle
Left or Right
None Range To Empty Average Econ
Menu Icon Coolant Temp Oil Temp
Trans Temp Oil Life
Fuel Filter Life –
If Equipped
Lower Left or Right
None Time Current Econ
Compass Range Trip A Distance
Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip –
If Equipped
Trailer Brake Oil Pressure
Coolant Temp Oil Temp Battery Voltage
Trans Temp Oil Life
Exhaust Brake –
If Equipped
Boost Pressure –
If Equipped
Fuel Filter Life –
If Equipped
Favorite Menus
Speedometer Vehicle Info Driver Assist
Fuel Economy Trip Info
Trailer Tow –
If Equipped
(show/hide)
Audio
(show/hide)
Messages Screen Setup
Commercial
Settings
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 111
PREMIUM CLUSTER
Display Style
Modern
Traditional
Current Gear
Off
On
Odometer
No Decimal Point
Decimal Point
Hide
Fuel Gauge
Hide Range
Show Range
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
Restore
Cancel
Commercial Settings — If Equipped
Commercial Settings allows the driver to set and recall
additional features when the transmission is in PARK (P).
Push and release the
up or down arrow button until
Commercial Settings displays in the instrument cluster
display.
Follow the prompts to enter the required PIN and enter the
Commercial Settings submenu.
Commercial Settings allows you to access the following
features (if equipped):
Backup Alarm
ParkSense
Aux Switches
PIN Setup
NOTE:
If the vehicle’s PIN is forgotten or not known, see an autho-
rized dealer to have the PIN reset. If the PIN is known, you
may enter the PIN and restore to the factory settings.
The Default PIN will be “0000”.
DIESEL MESSAGES AND WARNINGS —
6.7L C
UMMINS® DIESEL ENGINE
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Messages
The Cummins® diesel engine meets all diesel emissions
standards, resulting in one of the lowest emitting diesel
engines ever produced. To achieve these emissions
standards, your vehicle is equipped with a state-of-the-art
engine and exhaust system. These systems are
seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and managed by
the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM manages
engine combustion to allow the exhaust system’s catalyst
to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM) pollutants, with
no input or interaction on your part.
Upper Left or Right
None Time Current Econ
Compass Range Trip A Distance
Outside Temp Average Econ Trip B Distance
Trailer Trip –
If Equipped
Upper Center
None Badge Compass
Outside Temp Time Range To Empty
Average Econ Current Econ Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance Trailer Trip
Audio
(show/hide)
Favorite Menus
Trip Info Navigation Off Road
Trailer Tow –
If Equipped
(show/hide)
Audio
(show/hide)
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has the ability to alert you to additional
maintenance required on your vehicle or engine. The
following messages may display in your instrument cluster
display:
Perform Service — Your vehicle will require emissions
maintenance at a set interval. To help remind you when
this maintenance is due, the instrument cluster display
will display “Perform Service”. When the “Perform
Service” message is displayed in the instrument
cluster display it is necessary to have the emissions
maintenance performed. Emissions maintenance may
include replacing the Closed Crankcase Ventilation
(CCV) filter element. The procedure for clearing and
resetting the "Perform Service" indicator message is
located in the appropriate Service Information.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Required Now —
"Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at Highway Speeds
to Remedy" will be displayed in the instrument cluster
display if the exhaust particulate filter reaches 80% of
its maximum storage capacity. Under conditions of
exclusive short duration and low speed driving cycles,
your Cummins® diesel engine and exhaust after-treat-
ment system may never reach the conditions required
to remove the trapped Particulate Matter (PM). If this
occurs, the “Exhaust Filter XX% Full Safely Drive at
Highway Speeds to Remedy” message will be displayed
in the instrument cluster display. If this message is
displayed, you will hear one chime to assist in alerting
you of this condition
By simply driving your vehicle at highway speeds for as
little as 45 minutes, you can remedy the condition in
the particulate filter system and allow your Cummins®
diesel engine and exhaust after-treatment system to
remove the trapped Particulate Matter (PM) and
restore the system to normal operating condition.
Exhaust System — Regeneration In Process Exhaust
Filter XX% Full — Indicates that the DPF is self-cleaning.
Maintain your current driving condition until regenera-
tion is completed.
Exhaust System — Regeneration Completed — This
message indicates that the DPF self-cleaning is
completed. If this message is displayed, you will hear
one chime to assist in alerting you of this condition.
Exhaust Service Required — See Dealer Now — This
message indicates regeneration has been disabled
due to a system malfunction. At this point the engine
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) will register a fault
code, the instrument panel will display a MIL light.
Exhaust Filter Full — Power Reduced See Dealer — This
message indicates the PCM has derated the engine to
limit the likelihood of permanent damage to the
after-treatment system. If this condition is not
corrected and a dealer service is not performed, exten-
sive exhaust after-treatment damage can occur. To
correct this condition it will be necessary to have your
vehicle serviced by your local authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Failing to follow the oil change indicator, changing your oil
and resetting the oil change indicator by 0 miles
remaining will prevent the diesel exhaust filter from
performing its cleaning routine. This will shortly result in a
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) and reduced engine
power. Only an authorized dealer will be able to correct
this condition.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust
system could occur soon with continued operation.
CAUTION!
See an authorized dealer, as damage to the exhaust
system could occur soon with continued operation.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 113
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Messages
The vehicle will display messages when a derate (engine
power reduction) is activated to protect the engine during
start-up in cold ambient temperatures.
Engine Power Reduced During Warm-up — This
message will display during start-up when the
ambient temperature is between 10°F (-12°C) and
-10°F (-23°C).
Engine Power Reduced Up To 30 Sec (Seconds) During
Warm-up — This message will display during start-up
when the ambient temperature is between -10°F
(-23°C) and -25°F (-32°C).
Engine Power Reduced Up To 2 Min (Minutes) During
Warm-up — This message will display during start-up
when the ambient temperature is -25°F (-32°C) and
below.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine warm up
protection feature that may limit engine performance
after cold starting at low ambient temperatures. The
length of time engine speed is limited is dependent
upon engine coolant temperature. Engine speed may
be briefly limited to 1,000 RPM after starting with
coolant temperature below freezing conditions, and
may be limited to 1,000 RPM for up to approximately
two minutes under more severe cold conditions.
Coolant Low — This telltale will turn on to indicate the
vehicle coolant level is low
Ú page 381.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Warning
Messages
There are four different messages which are displayed if
the vehicle detects that the DEF system has been filled
with a fluid other than DEF, has experienced component
failures, or when tampering has been detected. The
vehicle may be limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h) if the DEF system is not serviced within less than
200 miles (322 km) of the fault being detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the following
warnings will display:
DEF Low Refill Soon — This message will display when
the low level is reached, during vehicle start-up, and
with increased frequency during vehicle operation. It
will be accompanied by a single chime. Approximately
5 gallons (19 Liters) of DEF is required to refill the tank
when this message is initially displayed. on pickup
applications, and approximately 7 gallons (26 Liters)
are required on chassis-cab applications.
Speed Limited to 5 MPH in XXX mi Refill DEF — This
message will continuously display if the “DEF Low Refill
Soon” message is ignored, and the frequency of occur-
rence of the chime will increase unless up to 2 gallons
(7.5 Liters) of DEF is added to the tank.
5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or Refuel Refill
DEF — This message will continuously display when the
counter reaches zero, and will be accompanied by a
periodic chime.
The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum speed of
5 mph upon the first of the following conditions to
occur:
If the vehicle is shut off and restarted.
If the vehicle is idled for an extended period of
time, approximately one hour or greater.
If the system detects that the level of fuel in the
tank has increased.
Add a minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) of DEF to the
tank in order to avoid vehicle operation at a maximum
speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE:
A minimum of 2 gallons (7.5 Liters) may be required to
restore normal vehicle operation. Although the vehicle will
start normally and can be placed in gear after this
message has been initially displayed, extreme caution
should be utilized since the vehicle will only be capable of
maneuvering at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fault Warning
Messages
There are five different messages which are displayed if
the vehicle detects that the DEF system has been filled
with a fluid other than DEF, has experienced component
failures, or when tampering has been detected. The
vehicle may be limited to a maximum speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h) if the DEF system is not serviced within less than
200 miles (322 km) of the fault being detected.
When the DEF system needs to be serviced the following
warnings will display:
Service DEF System See Dealer — This message will
display when the fault is initially detected, each time
the vehicle is started, and periodically during driving.
The message will be accompanied by a single chime.
We recommend you drive to your nearest authorized
dealer and have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible.
5 MPH Max Speed in 150 mi Service DEF System See
Dealer — This message will display if the DEF system
has not been serviced after the “Service DEF System –
See Dealer” message is displayed. This message will
continuously display until the mileage counter reaches
zero, and will be accompanied by a periodic chime. The
message will continue to countdown until it reaches
zero unless the vehicle is serviced. We recommend you
drive to your nearest authorized dealer and have your
vehicle serviced immediately.
NOTE:
Under some circumstances this mileage counter may
start with a value of less than 150 miles (241 km). For
example, if recurring faults are detected in a time interval
of less than 40 hours, the counter may restart at the value
where it stopped when a previous fault was temporarily
remedied, or at a minimum of 50 miles (80 km).
5 MPH Max Speed on Restart, Long Idle or Refuel
Service DEF See Dealer — This message will continu-
ously display when the mileage counter reaches zero,
and will be accompanied by a periodic chime.
The vehicle will only be capable of a maximum speed of
5 mph upon the first of the following conditions to
occur:
If the vehicle is shut off and restarted.
If the vehicle is idled for an extended period of
time, approximately one hour or greater.
If the system detects that the level of fuel in the
tank has increased.
5 MPH Max Speed Service DEF System See Dealer
—
This message will continuously display, and will be
accompanied by a periodic chime. Although the vehicle
can be started and placed in gear, the vehicle will only
operate at a maximum speed of 5 mph. Your vehicle will
require towing, see an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
When this message is displayed, the engine can still be
started. However, the vehicle will only operate at a
maximum speed of 5 mph.
Incorrect DEF Detected See Dealer — This message will
display when the fault is initially detected, each time
the vehicle is started, and periodically during driving.
The message will be accompanied by a single chime.
We recommend you drive to your nearest authorized
dealer and have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible.
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor
(IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical
system and status of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or
the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical
load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is running.
It will display a message if there is a risk of battery
depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to
lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery
Saver On Some Systems May Have Reduced Power” will
appear in the instrument cluster.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low
state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at
a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from load reduc-
tion. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the
charging system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate
a problem with the charging system
Ú page 116.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 115
The following are electrical loads that may be switched off
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be affected
by load reduction:
Heated Seats/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
115 Volts AC Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the
following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical
power to the vehicle system because the electrical
loads are larger than the capability of charging system.
The charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g.
HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, over-
loaded power outlets +12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB
ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving,
towing, frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights, upfitter elec-
trical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar
devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long
parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time
(weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was not charged
completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on
when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period with the
engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers,
+12 Volts portable appliances like vacuum cleaners,
game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction action
message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
“Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior).
Check what may be plugged in to power outlets
+12 Volts, 115 Volts AC, USB ports.
Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature).
Check the audio settings (volume).
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed
(additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load
and Ignition Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving
time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if the
message is still present during consecutive trips and
the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not
help to identify the cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/
or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are
indicative and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive. Always refer to the information
in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active
telltales will display first if applicable. The system check
menu may appear different based upon equipment
options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are
optional and may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the air bag has been detected, it will stay
on until the fault is cleared. If the light is either not on
during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking brake
is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is
a problem with the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has
been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake,
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity
in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering
maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The
vehicle should have service performed, and the brake
fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate
repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for
approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the electrical
system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
problem with the ETC system. If a problem is
detected while the vehicle is running, the light
will either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake pedals
are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running,
immediate service is required and you may experience
reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this indicator will
illuminate and a single chime will sound. If the
temperature reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime
will sound for four minutes or until the engine is able to
cool; whichever comes first.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It
will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 117
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop
the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) system is on, turn
it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle
the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service
Ú page 364.
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the hood
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate low
engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while
driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the engine as
soon as possible, and contact an authorized
dealer. A chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns
on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver or
passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on.
When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt
remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash
or remain on continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 315.
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
Trailer Brake has been disconnected.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This may
occur with strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle
and run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until the light
turns off. Once the light turns off, you may continue to
drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle
security system is arming, and then will flash
slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the ACC system. Contact a local
authorized dealer for service
Ú page 175.
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will illuminate when a fault is
detected with the air suspension system.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated
you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact
with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a
fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature
Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe
transmission damage or transmission failure.
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS. The light
will turn on when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then
the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required as soon as possible.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not
also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, have the brake
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the ESC
system is Active. The ESC Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out
with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this warning light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle
has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and
corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indicator Light
come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in an
ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the
ESC is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense system provides the driver with
visual and steering torque warnings when the
vehicle starts to drift out of its lane
unintentionally without the use of a turn signal.
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the LaneSense indicator changes from solid green
to solid yellow.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
LaneSense indicator changes from solid white/green
to flashing yellow
Ú page 187.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
3.2 gal (12 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
A single warning chime will sound with Low Fuel Warning.
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
vehicle coolant level is low.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the fuel
filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to
disengage the light. If the light does not turn
off, please see an authorized dealer.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System
called OBD II that monitors engine and
automatic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position before engine start.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 119
If the bulb does not come on when turning the ignition
switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine
start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most situations,
the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert
serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Rear Axle Locker Fault Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
when a rear axle locker fault has been
detected.
Service Forward Collision (FCW) or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB)
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault in the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) System.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
Ú page 306.
Service LaneSense Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and
requires service. Please see an authorized
dealer.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a fault
with the 4WD system. If the light stays on or
comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD
system is not functioning properly and that
service is required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced
immediately.
Cruise Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate the
Cruise Control System is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a fault in
the sway bar disconnect system.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message is
displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is
lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition previously
mentioned, the display will show the indications
corresponding to each tire.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating conditions.
This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants, wood,
cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious
injury to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control
system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as
handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle,
avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire
repair kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
Air Suspension Alternate Trailer Height
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air
suspension system is set to the Alternate
Trailer Height setting
Ú page 155.
Air Suspension Bed Lowering Mode
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the Bed Lowering
mode procedure is complete
Ú page 155.
Air Suspension Payload Protection
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the maximum payload may have been
exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved
at its current ride height. Protection mode will
automatically be selected in order to “protect” the air
suspension system, air suspension adjustment is limited
due to payload.
Air Suspension Ride Height Raising
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver that the
vehicle is changing to a higher ride height
Ú page 155.
Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will blink and alert the driver that the
vehicle is changing to a lower ride height
Ú page 155.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an
aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you
take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 121
Cargo Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cargo light is activated by pushing the cargo
light button on the headlight switch.
Cold Ambient Derate Mode Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when a derate
(engine power reduction) is activated for
protection of the turbocharger in cold ambient
temperatures.
Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Diesel Exhaust Brake has been activated, and
is in full strength mode
Ú page 139.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indicate that
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) or Pedestrian
Emergency Braking (PEB) is off.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front, rear, or both
axles have been locked. The telltale will display
the lock icon on the front and rear axles to
indicate the current lock status.
Low Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
The Low DEF Indicator will illuminate if the
vehicle is low on DEF
Ú page 391.
NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the 4WD power
transfer case is in the NEUTRAL mode and the
front and rear driveshafts are disengaged from
the powertrain.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle lock has
been activated
Ú page 148.
4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the 4WD Lock mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed
Ú page 148.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the 4WD Low mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels
Ú page 148.
4WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the 4WD High mode. The front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed.
Snowplow Mode Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
Snowplow mode has been activated
Ú page 217.
Sway Bar Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front sway bar is disconnected.
TOW/HAUL Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when
TOW/HAUL mode is selected.
Trailer Merge Assist Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
when Trailer Merge Assist has been activated
Ú page 301.
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Water In Fuel Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The Water In Fuel Indicator Light will illuminate
when there is water detected in the fuel filter. If
this light remains on, DO NOT start the vehicle
before you drain the water from the fuel filter to
prevent engine damage.
Wait To Start Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate for
approximately two seconds when the ignition is
turned to the RUN position. Its duration may be
longer based on colder operating conditions.
Vehicle will not initiate start until telltale is no longer
displayed
Ú page 128.
NOTE:
The Wait To Start telltale may not illuminate if the intake
manifold temperature is warm enough.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Indicator Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set and a
vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 175.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
No Target Detected Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive Cruise
Control is SET and there is no vehicle in front
detected
Ú page 175.
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is set to the desired speed
Ú page 174.
Automatic Diesel Exhaust Brake Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Diesel Exhaust Brake has been activated, and
has switched to Automatic mode
Ú page 139.
ECO Mode Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when
ECO mode is active.
Front Fog Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on.
LaneSense Indicator Light —
If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light illuminates solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs
Ú page 187.
Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
parking lights or headlights are turned on.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash
independently and the corresponding exterior
turn signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indi-
cator flashes at a rapid rate.
If equipped with fog lamps, the fog lamp on the side of
the activated turn signal will also illuminate to provide
additional light when turning.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the vehicle
equipped with ACC has been turned on but not
set
Ú page 175.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
cruise control is ready, but not set Ú page 174.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC feature is
turned on. The light will be on solid when HDC
is armed. HDC can only be armed when the
transfer case is in the 4WD Low position and
the vehicle speed is less then 20 mph (32 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to use the HDC
feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not
armed, the LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid white. This occurs when only
left, right, or neither lane line has been
detected. If a single lane line is detected, the system is
ready to provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
Ú page 187.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate that
the high beam headlights are on. With the low
beams activated, push the multifunction lever
forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn
on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams.
If the high beams are off, pull the lever toward you for a
temporary high beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the
performance of the emissions, engine, and transmission
control systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance
and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further
damage to the emission control system. It could also
affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
3
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have an OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized
service technicians may need to access this information to
assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system
Ú page 225.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an
inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning
and is not on when the engine is running, and
that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may
not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a depleted battery or a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you
can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your
vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this
test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the
ON position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you
should
not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illu-
minated until you place the ignition in the off posi-
tion or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is
not ready, you should see an
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle
as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to
update. A recheck with the previous mentioned test
routine may then indicate that the system is
now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle
operation you should have your vehicle serviced before
going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your
vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician should
connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to read the VIN, diagnose, or service your
vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II
connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking
device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including
personal information.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
125
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE — GASOLINE
ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
The starter should not be operated for more than
10-second intervals. Waiting 10 - 15 seconds between
such intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission in PARK position.
Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range.
NOTE:
This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift inter-
locking system. The brake pedal must be pressed to
shift out of PARK.
If equipped with an 8-speed transmission, starting the
vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible unless the Manual
Park Release has been activated
Ú page 363.
TIP START FEATURE
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition switch
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter
motor will continue to run and will automatically
disengage when the engine is running.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is in the passenger
compartment.
NORMAL STARTING USING ENGINE
START/STOP B
UTTON
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the ENGINE START/STOP
button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF position, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP
Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or
three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed
above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.
The ignition will remain in the ACC position until the
gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed
twice to the OFF position.
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle
speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), the instrument cluster
will display a “
Vehicle Not In Park” message and the
engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out
of the PARK position, or it could roll.
NOTE:
If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once with the vehicle speed below
5 mph (8 km/h), the engine will shut off and the ignition
will remain in the ACC position. If vehicle speed drops
below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark.
Ú page 126.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s
Foot Off The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF, ACC, and ON/
RUN. To change the ignition positions without starting the
vehicle and use the accessories, follow these directions:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position.
AUTOPARK — ROTARY SHIFTER AND
8-S
PEED TRANSMISSION ONLY
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist with placing
the vehicle in PARK should the situations on the following
pages occur. It is a back-up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the driver
shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will engage are
outlined on the following pages.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off the
engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed
transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Ignition is switched from ON/RUN to ACC
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will change to
ACC position. After 30 minutes the ignition switches to
OFF automatically, unless the driver turns the ignition
switch off.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to place the
vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that
your vehicle is in PARK by verifying that a solid (not
blinking) “P” is indicated in the instrument cluster
display and near the gear selector. If the “P” indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As an added
precaution, always apply the parking brake when
exiting the vehicle.
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your vehicle
into PARK. It is a back-up system and should not be
relied upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the vehicle
with the engine running, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with a rotary shifter and an 8-speed
transmission
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not pressed
The message “
AutoPark Engaged Shift To P Then Shift To
Gear” will display in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be displayed in
the instrument cluster, causing the “
AutoPark Engaged
Shift To P Then Shift To Gear” to not be seen. In these
cases, the shifter must be returned to “P” to select desired
gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the vehicle may
AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage
ONLY when vehicle speed is 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h) or less.
The message “
Vehicle Speed Is Too High To Shift To P” will
be displayed in the instrument cluster if vehicle speed is
above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
4WD Low — If Equipped
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the vehicle in
4WD Low.
The message “
AutoPark Disabled” will be displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given when all of
these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
Vehicle is in 4WD Low range
The message “
AutoPark Not Engaged” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster. A warning chime will continue until
you shift the vehicle into PARK or the driver’s door is
closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle is in PARK
by looking for the “P” in the instrument cluster display and
near the shifter. As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not
been started or driven for at least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the
battery to ensure a full battery charge during the
crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition to the START position and release it
when the engine starts. For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™
ignition systems, press and hold the brake pedal
while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, wait
10 to 15 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then
repeat the Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the Extended Park Starting procedure.
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the
transmission will default to NEUTRAL until the vehicle
speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in
the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
continuously for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure and the vehicle has not
experienced an Extended Park condition as previously
defined, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it there while the engine is
cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the ignition
button/key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking
with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor.
Release the accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key
once the engine is running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 10 second
period of engine cranking with the accelerator pedal held
to the floor, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION
(BELOW –22°F OR −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater
(available from an authorized dealer) is recommended.
AFTER STARTING
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
STARTING THE ENGINE — DIESEL ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
The starter should not be operated for more than
25-second intervals. Waiting two minutes between such
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of
start can be dangerous if done improperly
Ú page 361.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF position, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Start the engine with the transmission in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any
driving range.
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition switch
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter
motor will continue to run and will automatically
disengage when the engine is running.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch
with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is in the passenger
compartment.
Normal Starting
USING THE ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 25 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, remove your foot from the brake
pedal and push the ENGINE START/STOP button
again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Under cold weather conditions, the engine may not
immediately crank if the Wait To Start Indicator Light is
illuminated. This is normal operation. For vehicles
equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, the vehicle will
automatically crank when the Wait To Start time has
elapsed
Ú page 130.
TO TURN OFF THE ENGINE USING ENGINE
START/STOP BUTTON
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and
release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE
START/STOP button is pushed once, the instrument
cluster will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message
and the engine will remain running. Never leave a
vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the vehicle
speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), pushing the ENGINE
START/STOP button once will turn the engine off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC position.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds (or three short pushes in a row) to turn the
engine off. The ignition will remain in the ACC position
(NOT the OFF position) if the engine is turned off when
the transmission is not in PARK.
NOTE:
If the ignition is left in the ACC or ON/RUN (engine not
running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity and the ignition return to the OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON FUNCTIONS —
WITH DRIVER’S FOOT OFF THE BRAKE PEDAL
(IN PARK OR NEUTRAL POSITION)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, and ON/
RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change
the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Starting Procedure —
Engine Manifold Air Temperature 0° F To
66° F (–18° C to 19° C)
NOTE:
The temperature displayed in the instrument cluster does
not necessarily reflect the engine manifold air
temperature
Ú page 104. When engine temperatures fall
below 66°F (19°C) the Wait To Start Indicator Light will
remain on indicating the intake air heater system is active.
Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting” procedure
except:
1. Pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button with the
driver’s foot on the brake will move the ignition from
OFF or ACC to ON/RUN, and will illuminate the Wait
To Start Indicator Light. The engine will not
immediately crank, this is normal operation.
2. The Wait To Start Indicator Light will remain on for a
period of time that varies depending on the engine
temperature.
3. While the Wait To Start Indicator Light is on, the
instrument cluster will additionally display a gauge or
bar whose initial length represents the full Wait to
Start time period. Its length will decrease until it
disappears when the Wait to Start time has elapsed.
4. After the engine Wait To Start Indicator Light goes off,
the engine will automatically crank.
5. After engine start-up, check to see that there is oil
pressure.
6. Release the parking brake and drive.
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry
Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to improve
engine warm-up.
The engine will not automatically crank after the engine
Wait To Start Indicator Light goes off if a door or the
hood is ajar.
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left ON for
more than two minutes after the Wait To Start Indicator
Light goes out, reset the intake air heater by turning the
ignition switch to the OFF position for at least five
seconds and then back ON. Repeat steps 1 through 6
of “Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Starting Procedure – Engine
Manifold Air Temperature 0° F To 66° F (–18° C to
19° C).”
EXTREME COLD WEATHER
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine is equipped with
several features designed to assist cold weather starting
and operation:
The engine block heater is a resistance heater installed
in the water jacket of the engine just above and behind
the oil filter. It requires a 110–115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory installed option.
If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords are available
from an authorized Mopar® dealer.
A 12 Volt heater built into the fuel filter housings aid in
preventing fuel gelling. It is controlled by a built-in ther-
mostat.
An intake air heater system both improves engine
starting and reduces the amount of white smoke
generated by a warming engine.
NORMAL STARTING PROCEDURE —
E
NGINE MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE
A
BOVE 66° F (19° C)
Observe the instrument panel cluster lights when starting
the engine.
1. Always apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into PARK for an automatic transmission.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position and
watch the instrument panel cluster lights.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO NOT
START the engine before you drain the water from the
fuel filters to avoid engine damage
Ú page 387.
CAUTION!
Do not crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a
time or starter motor damage may result. Turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position and wait at least
two minutes for the starter to cool before repeating
start procedure.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
4. Place the ignition switch in the START position and
crank the engine. Do not press the accelerator during
starting.
5. Check that the Oil Pressure Warning Light has turned off.
6. Release the parking brake.
STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE
M
ANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE 0°F TO
66°F (–18°C
TO 19°C)
NOTE:
The temperature displayed in the instrument cluster does
not necessarily reflect the engine manifold air temperature
Ú
page 104. When engine temperatures fall below 66°F
(19°C) the Wait To Start Indicator Light will remain on indi-
cating the intake air heater system is active.
Follow the steps in the “Normal Starting” procedure
except:
1. The Wait To Start Indicator Light will remain on for a
period of time that varies depending on the engine
temperature.
2. While the Wait To Start Indicator Light is on, the
instrument cluster will additionally display a gauge or
bar whose initial length represents the full Wait To
Start time period. Its length will decrease until it
disappears when the Wait To Start time has elapsed.
3. After the Wait To Start Indicator Light goes off, place
the ignition switch in the START position. Do not press
the accelerator during starting.
4. After engine start-up, check that the Oil Pressure
Warning Light has turned off.
5. Release the parking brake and drive.
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry Turbo-
charger at low coolant temperatures to improve engine
warm-up.
Automatic equipped vehicles with optional Keyless
Enter ‘n Go™ – If the start button is pushed once while
in PARK with the ignition off and driver’s foot on the
brake pedal, the vehicle will automatically crank and
start after the Wait to Start time has elapsed. If it is
desired to abort the start process before it completes,
the driver’s foot should be fully removed from the
brake pedal prior to pushing the start button again in
order for the ignition to move directly to off.
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left ON for
more than two minutes after the Wait To Start Indicator
Light goes out, reset the intake air heater by turning the
ignition switch to the OFF position for at least five
seconds and then back ON. Repeat steps 1 through 5
of “Starting Procedure – Engine Manifold Air Tempera-
ture 0°F To 66°F (–18°C to 19°C).”
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO NOT
START the engine before you drain the water from the
fuel filters to avoid engine damage
Ú page 387.
CAUTION!
Do not crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a
time or starter motor damage may result. Turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position and wait at least
two minutes for the starter to cool before repeating
start procedure.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO NOT
START the engine before you drain the water from the
fuel filters to avoid engine damage
Ú page 387.
CAUTION!
Do not crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a
time or starter motor damage may result. Turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position and wait at least
two minutes for the starter to cool before repeating
start procedure.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
STARTING PROCEDURE — ENGINE
M
ANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE BELOW
0°F (-18°C)
In extremely cold weather below 0°F (-18°C) it may be
beneficial to cycle the intake air heater twice before
attempting to start the engine. This can be accomplished
by turning the ignition off for at least 5 seconds and then
back to the ON/RUN position after the Wait To Start
Indicator Light has turned off, but before the engine is
started. However, excessive cycling of the intake air
heater will result in damage to the heater elements or
reduced battery voltage.
NOTE:
If multiple pre-heat cycles are used before starting, addi-
tional engine run time may be required to maintain battery
state of charge at a satisfactory level.
1. If the engine stalls after the initial start, the ignition
must be turned to the OFF position for at least five
seconds and then to the ON/RUN position to recycle
the intake air heater.
NOTE:
Excessive white smoke and poor engine performance will
result if intake air heater is not recycled.
2. Heat generated by the intake air heater dissipates
rapidly in a cold engine. If more than two minutes
pass between the time the Wait To Start Indicator
Light turns off and the engine is started, recycle the
intake air heater by turning the ignition switch to the
OFF position for at least five seconds and then back
to the ON/RUN position.
3. If the vehicle is driven and vehicle speed exceeds
19 mph (31 km/h) before the intake air heater
post-heat (after start) cycle is complete, the intake air
heater will shut off.
4. If the engine is cranked for more than 10 seconds,
the post-heat cycle will turn off.
NOTE:
Engine idle speed will automatically increase to
1,000 RPM and engage the Variable Geometry
Turbocharger at low coolant temperatures to improve
engine warm-up.
When a diesel engine is allowed to run out of fuel or the
fuel gels at low temperatures, air is pulled into the fuel
system. If your engine has run out of fuel
Ú page 390.
If the engine stalls, or if the ignition switch is left ON for
more than two minutes after the Wait To Start Indicator
Light goes out, reset the intake air heater by turning the
ignition switch to the OFF position for at least five
seconds and then back ON. Repeat steps 1 through 5
of “Starting Procedure – Engine Manifold Air Tempera-
ture 0°F to 66°F (-18°C to 19°C)”
Ú page 130.
STARTING FLUIDS
The engine is equipped with an automatic electric air
preheating system. If the instructions in this manual are
followed, the engine should start in all conditions.
WARNING!
Starting fluids or flammable liquids must never be used
in the Cummins® diesel engine (see Warning label).
Never pour diesel fuel, flammable liquid, starting fluids
(ether) into the air cleaner canister, air intake piping, or
turbocharger inlet in an attempt to start the vehicle.
This could result in a flash fire and explosion causing
serious personal injury and engine damage.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
keyless ignition node is in the OFF position, remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
gear selector.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
NORMAL OPERATION — DIESEL ENGINE
Observe the following when the engine is operating:
All message center lights are off.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is off.
Engine oil pressure is above 10 psi (69 kPa) at idle.
Voltmeter operation:
The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at various
engine temperatures. This cycling operation is caused by
the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system.
The number of cycles and the length of the cycling
operation is controlled by the engine control module.
Post-heat operation can run for several minutes, and then
the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize.
The cycling action will cause temporary dimming of the
headlamps, interior lamps, and also a noticeable
reduction in blower motor speed.
COLD WEATHER PRECAUTIONS
Operation in ambient temperature below 32°F (0°C) may
require special considerations. The following charts
suggest these options:
Fuel Operating Range
NOTE:
Use Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) Fuels
ONLY.
Fuel Operating Range Chart
*Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel should only be
used where extended arctic conditions (0°F/-18°C) exist.
NOTE:
Use of Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel or
Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel results in a
noticeable decrease in fuel economy.
Climatized Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel is a blend of
Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur and Number 1 Ultra Low
Sulfur Diesel Fuels which reduces the temperature at
which wax crystals form in fuel.
The fuel grade should be clearly marked on the pump
at the fuel station.
The engine requires the use of Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel
Fuel. Use of incorrect fuel could result in engine and
exhaust system damage
Ú page 442.
If Climatized or Diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not avail-
able, and you are operating below (20°F/-6°C), in
sustained arctic conditions, Mopar® Premium Diesel
Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to
avoid gelling (see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Under some circumstances increased engine noise
may be audible in the seconds following a cold start.
This is most likely to occur when using fuel that isn't
blended for the ambient temperature present. This
may occur on an unseasonably cold day or when a
truck is fueled in a warmer climate and driven to a
colder climate. The noise can typically be prevented by
using Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment as
recommended (see Fuel Operating Range Chart).
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave
the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter ’n Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING!
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine Oil Usage
For the correct engine oil viscosity Ú page 381.
Winter Front Cover Usage
A Winter front or cold weather cover is to be used in
ambient temperatures below 32°F (0°C), especially
during extended idle conditions. This cover is equipped
with four flaps for managing total grille opening in varying
ambient temperatures. If a Winter front or cold weather
cover is to be used the flaps should be left in the full open
position to allow air flow to the charge air cooler and
automatic transmission oil cooler. When ambient
temperatures drop below 0°F (-17°C) the four flaps need
to be closed. A suitable cold weather cover is available
from your Mopar® dealer.
Battery Blanket Usage
A battery loses 60% of its cranking power as the battery
temperature decreases to 0°F (-18°C). For the same
decrease in temperature, the engine requires twice as
much power to crank at the same RPM. The use of
120 Volt AC powered battery blankets will greatly increase
starting capability at low temperatures. Suitable battery
blankets are available from an authorized Mopar® dealer.
Engine Warm-Up
Avoid full throttle operation when the engine is cold. When
starting a cold engine, bring the engine up to operating
speed slowly to allow the oil pressure to stabilize as the
engine warms up.
NOTE:
High-speed, no-load running of a cold engine can result in
excessive white smoke and poor engine performance.
No-load engine speeds should be kept under 1,000 RPM
during the warm-up period, especially in cold ambient
temperature conditions.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine warm-up
protection feature that may limit engine performance after
cold starting at low ambient temperatures. The length of
time engine speed is limited is dependent upon engine
coolant temperature. Engine speed may be briefly limited
to 1,000 RPM after starting with coolant temperature
below freezing conditions, and may be limited to
1,000 RPM for up to approximately two minutes
under more severe cold conditions.
NOTE:
If ambient temperatures are low and the coolant
temperature is below 180°F (82°C), the engine idle
speed will slowly increase to 1,000 RPM after two minutes
of idle, if the following conditions are met:
Foot is off brake pedal and accelerator pedal.
Automatic transmission is in PARK.
Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Applying the accelerator pedal will cancel fast idle.
Operating the exhaust brake at idle will greatly improve
warm-up rate and will help keep the engine close to
operating temperature during extended idle.
ENGINE IDLING
Avoid prolonged idling. Long periods of idling may be
harmful to your engine because combustion chamber
temperatures can drop so low that the fuel may not burn
completely. Incomplete combustion allows carbon and
varnish to form on piston rings, engine valves, and injector
nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel can enter the crankcase,
diluting the oil and causing rapid wear to the engine.
If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is driven on low
engine speed drive cycles for more than two hours, the
system will automatically enter an emissions operating
mode that will increase the engine idle speed to 900 RPM.
While in this mode, which is designed to help maintain the
diesel particulate filter, the engine idle speed will return to
normal when the brake pedal is applied. A small change in
engine tone or a slight change in engine performance
while accelerating may also be noticeable at speeds below
20 mph (32 km/h). This operating mode may last for up to
an hour of idle time, or around 20 minutes of driving time.
Your truck may have been ordered with an optional
voltage monitoring Idle-Up feature. If a load is placed on
the electrical system while the truck is in park, this feature
will attempt to maintain normal system voltage by
automatically increasing engine idle speed. You may
notice several consecutive increases in idle speed, up to a
maximum of 1,450 RPM, as the system will attempt to
utilize the smallest increase in idle speed necessary to
maintain normal system voltage. The idle speed will return
to normal when either the electrical load is removed, or
when the brake pedal is applied.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
NOTE:
For instrument cluster display messages related to the
vehicle's exhaust system Ú page 104.
Idle-Up Feature
The driver-controlled high idle speed feature will help
increase cylinder temperatures and provide additional cab
heat, however, excessive idling may still cause the
exhaust aftertreatment system to not properly regenerate.
Extended periods of idle time should be avoided.
The Idle-Up feature uses the Cruise Control buttons to
increase engine idle speed and quickly warm the vehicle's
interior.
1. With the transmission in PARK, the parking brake
applied, and the engine running, push the On/Off
button to the ON position, then push the SET (-)
button.
2. The engine RPM will go up to 1,100 RPM. To increase
the RPM, push and hold the RES (+) button and the
idle speed will increase to approximately 1,500 RPM.
To decrease the RPM, push and hold the SET (-)
button and the idle speed will decrease to approxi-
mately 1,100 RPM.
3. To cancel the Idle–Up feature, either push the
CANCEL button, push the On/Off button, or press the
brake pedal.
NOISE
Diesel engines can create noises that may seem
concerning. The nature of a diesel engine is compression
ignition where compressed air and fuel are mixed and
ignited. Weather, barometric pressure, altitude, and
temperature will affect how fuel is ignited in the engine.
Engines will sound different from day to day or previous
model years. Clicking, ticking, or light knocking is normal
and will change from day to day, as the engine breaks in,
and can vary with changes in ambient temperature.
Clicking sound from under the hood shortly after vehicle
shutdown is normal as actuators such as the EGR valve
are cycled. Fuel pump noise may increase during low
speed/light load conditions when ambient temperature is
above 100°F (38°C), and when fuel tank level is below
10% which is a normal condition of the fuel system and
controls strategy. Diesel equipped vehicles also have an
exhaust after-treatment system to reduce emissions
utilizing a Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) and a Selective
Reduction Catalyst (SCR). The SCR reduces Nitrogen
Oxides (NOx) using the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) system.
DEF is injected directly into the SCR through a dosing
module. This process will create a clicking sound and at
times, will make noise even with the vehicle shut off. This
is normal as the DEF dosing module is purging DEF. If at
any time the Check Engine Light is on, please visit an
authorized dealer.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Idle the engine a few minutes before routine shutdown.
After full load operation, idle the engine three to
five minutes before shutting it down. This idle period will
allow the lubricating oil and coolant to carry excess heat
away from the combustion chamber, bearings, internal
components, and turbocharger. This is especially
important for turbocharged, charge air-cooled engines.
Refer to the following chart for proper engine shutdown:
Driving Condition Load Turbocharger Temperature Idle Time (min.) Before Engine Shutdown
Stop and Go Empty Cool Less than One
Stop and Go Medium - One
Highway Speeds Medium Warm Two
City Traffic Maximum GCWR - Three
Highway Speeds Maximum GCWR - Four
Uphill Grade Maximum GCWR Hot Five
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
IDLE SHUTDOWN
This feature can be enabled so that the truck will
automatically shutdown when the truck has been idling for
a set period of time when the engine is at operating
temperature. Idle time can be set in 5 minute increments
between 5 and 60 minutes. See an authorized dealer to
enable this feature.
NOTE:
The idle shutdown timer is disabled while the Power Take
Off (PTO) is active.
PROGRAMMABLE MAXIMUM VEHICLE
S
PEED
This feature allows the owner to set a maximum vehicle
speed for the vehicle. The 2500 and 3500 Series
maximum vehicle speed can be set between 40 mph
(64 km/h) and 87 mph (140 km/h).
NOTE:
DO NOT set the maximum vehicle speed to a value greater
than what the vehicle tires are rated for.
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
Avoid Overheating The Engine
The temperature of the engine coolant (antifreeze) (a
mixture of 50% ethylene-glycol and 50% water) must not
exceed the normal range of the temperature gauge 240°F
(116°C) with a 21 psi (145 kPa) coolant pressure cap.
Usually the engine coolant (antifreeze) temperature
indicated during operation will be to the left of center in
the normal range of the gauge.
Avoid Low Coolant Temperature Operation
Continual operation at low engine coolant (antifreeze)
temperature below the normal range on the gauge 140°F
(60°C) can be harmful to the engine. Low engine coolant
(antifreeze) temperature can cause incomplete
combustion which allows carbon and varnish to form on
piston rings and injector nozzles. Also, the unburned fuel
can enter the crankcase, diluting the lubricating oil and
causing rapid wear to the engine.
COOLING SYSTEM TIPS
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating in high ambient temperature conditions, take
the following actions:
City Driving — When stopped, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving — Reduce your speed.
Up Steep Hills — Select a lower transmission gear.
Air Conditioning — Turn it off temporarily.
Do Not Operate The Engine With Low Oil
Pressure
When the engine is at normal operating temperature, the
minimum oil pressures required are:
Do Not Operate The Engine With Failed
Parts
All engine failures give some warning before the parts fail.
Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and
visual evidence that the engine requires service. Some
important clues are:
Engine misfiring or vibrating severely.
Sudden loss of power.
Unusual engine noises.
Fuel, oil or coolant leaks.
Sudden change, outside the normal operating range, in
the engine operating temperature.
Excessive smoke.
Oil pressure drop.
Idle 700 to 800 RPM 10 psi (69 kPa)
Full speed and load 30 psi (207 kPa)
CAUTION!
If oil pressure falls to less than normal readings, shut
the engine off immediately. Failure to do so could result
in immediate and severe engine damage.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed behind the
front bumper and accessible through the right hole of
the air dam.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered
strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not
in use for the Winter months. During Winter months,
remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the
c-clip.
NOTE:
The block heater will require 110 Volt AC and 6.5 Amps to
activate the heater element.
Block Heater Usage
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), engine
block heater usage is recommended.
For ambient temperatures below –20°F (-29°C), engine
block heater usage is required.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
GASOLINE ENGINE
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
under which vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 446.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as a problem. Please check your oil level with the
engine oil indicator often during the break in period. Add
oil as required.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS —
DIESEL ENGINE
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine does not require a
break-in period due to its construction. Normal operation
is allowed, providing the following recommendations are
followed:
Warm up the engine before placing it under load.
Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged periods.
Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent
engine lugging.
Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature indica-
tors.
Check the coolant and oil levels frequently.
Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carrying
or towing significant weight.
NOTE:
Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or no load
operation will extend the time before the engine is at full
efficiency. Reduced fuel economy and power may be seen
at this time.
For additional vehicle break-in requirements
Ú page 212.
Because of the construction of the Cummins® Turbo
Diesel engine, engine run-in is enhanced by loaded
operating conditions which allow the engine parts to
achieve final finish and fit during the first 6,000 miles
(10,000 km).
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in
the engine or damage may result.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
The foot-operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
parking brake, firmly push the parking brake pedal fully.
Vehicle should be completely stopped before the parking
brake is applied. To release the parking brake, pull the
parking brake release handle.
Parking Brake Release
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch
ON, the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate.
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the Brake Warning Light will flash
if vehicle speed is detected. A chime will sound if the
vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) to alert the
driver. Fully release the parking brake before
attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from
the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended
children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in
a location accessible to children, and do not leave a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the
ACC or ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking
brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
STARTING AND OPERATING 139
DIESEL EXHAUST BRAKE — ENGINE
BRAKING (IF EQUIPPED)
The purpose of the exhaust brake (engine braking) feature
is to supply negative (braking) torque from the engine.
Typically, the engine braking is used for, but not limited to,
vehicle towing applications where vehicle braking can be
achieved by the internal engine power, thereby sparing the
mechanical brakes of the vehicle.
Benefits of the exhaust brake are:
Vehicle driving control.
Reduced brake fade.
Longer brake life.
Faster cab warm-up.
The exhaust brake feature will only function when the
driver toggles it on by pushing the exhaust brake button
until the Exhaust Brake Indicator is illuminated. Normal
(Full Strength) exhaust brake mode is indicated by a yellow
Exhaust Brake Indicator.
Exhaust Brake Switch
Once the Exhaust Brake Indicator is illuminated and the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h); the exhaust
brake will automatically operate when the driver removes
pressure from the accelerator pedal. Exhaust braking is
most effective when the engine RPM is higher. The
automatic transmission will downshift more aggressively
in TOW/HAUL mode when the exhaust brake is enabled to
increase brake performance.
NOTE:
For optimum braking power it is recommended to use the
exhaust brake while in TOW/HAUL mode.
The exhaust brake feature can also be used to reduce the
engine warm-up time. To use the exhaust brake as a
warm-up device, the vehicle must be stopped or moving
less than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Exhaust Brake Indicator
must be on, and the coolant temperature must be
below 180°F (82°C) and ambient temperature below
60°F (16°C).
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake technology delivers
smoother, less aggressive exhaust braking characteristics
during downhill descents. Although it can apply full
exhaust braking force if needed, Automatic “Smart”
Exhaust Brake may not apply obvious braking if the vehicle
speed is not increasing. Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake
is intended to maintain vehicle speed, while Full Exhaust
Brake is intended to reduce vehicle speed.
Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake can be enabled by
pushing the exhaust brake button (on the center stack)
again anytime after the normal Full Exhaust Brake has
been turned on. The Exhaust Brake Indicator in the
instrument cluster display will change from Yellow to
Green when Automatic “Smart” Exhaust Brake is enabled.
Pushing the exhaust brake button again will toggle the
exhaust brake mode to off.
WARNING!
Do not use the exhaust brake feature when driving in
icy or slippery conditions as the increased engine
braking can cause the rear wheels to slide and the
vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle
control, which may cause an accident possibly resulting
in personal injury or death.
CAUTION!
Use of aftermarket exhaust brakes is not recommended
and could lead to engine damage.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out
of PARK.
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park Interlock
which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the
ignition can be turned to the OFF position. This helps the
driver avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is in the
OFF position.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the ignition
is in the ACC position (even though the engine will be off).
Ensure that the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition
is OFF (not in ACC position) before exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully
when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if
it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the trans-
mission gear selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the
engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is
not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or some-
thing. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling
normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then apply the parking brake, shift
the transmission into PARK, and turn the ignition
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure the igni-
tion is in the OFF position, remove the key fob from
the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
transmission gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in
a location accessible to children), and do not leave
the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or
DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
STARTING AND OPERATING 141
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) SYSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are
applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the engine
must be running and the brake pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
stopped or moving at low speeds.
8-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
I
F EQUIPPED
The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic
gear selector located on the instrument panel. The
transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above
the gear selector and in the instrument cluster. To select
a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. You must
press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK (or NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving
at low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at once
(such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the gear selector
to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range for
normal driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear selector
position and the actual transmission gear (for example,
driver selects PARK while driving), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is returned to the
proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically controlled transmission adapts its shift
schedule based on driver inputs, along with environmental
and road conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual downshifts can be
made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control. Pushing the GEAR “-”/GEAR “+” switches (on the
steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will display that
gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc
Ú page 143. Some models will display both the selected
gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
Electronic Transmission Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is espe-
cially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case
is in a drive position.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 STARTING AND OPERATING
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P), and is
not blinking.
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. Apply the parking brake
and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the
vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL
mode or use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control to select a lower gear range
Ú page 143.
Under these conditions, using a lower gear range will
improve performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified
depending on engine and transmission temperature as
well as vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once
the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission may
not re-engage if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A
message in the instrument cluster will inform the driver of
the more serious conditions, and indicate what actions
may be necessary.
CAUTION!
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition
to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that
limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
Ú page 219.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
Ú page 366.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
STARTING AND OPERATING 143
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message indicates
the transmission may not re-engage after engine
shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
location (preferably, at an authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible conve-
nience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission. If the transmission
cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest
available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For
example, if you set the transmission gear limit to FOURTH
gear, the transmission will not shift above FOURTH gear,
but will shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is in
DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the GEAR “–”
switch (on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode,
display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and set
that gear as the top available gear.
Once in ERS mode, tapping the GEAR “–” or GEAR “+”
switch will change the top available gear.
ERS Control
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR “+”
switch until the gear limit display disappears from the
instrument cluster.
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission
shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate
TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and
reduce the potential for transmission overheating or
failure due to excessive shifting.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
normal operation.
1 — GEAR “+” Switch
2 — GEAR “–” Switch
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal operation is always the default at engine start-up.
If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be pushed
each time the engine is started.
6-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
I
F EQUIPPED
Pickup models may use either AS69RC transmission, or
the 68RFE transmission (which has no PTO access cover).
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
The gear selector is mounted on the right side of the
steering column. You must press the brake pedal to move
the gear selector out of PARK
Ú page 141. To drive, move
the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE
position. Pull the gear selector toward you when shifting
into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK.
The electronically controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting
between these gears.
The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts
can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control. Pushing the GEAR “-”/GEAR “+” switches (on the
steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will display that
gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
Ú page 143. Some models will display both the selected
gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode.
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the
selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is espe-
cially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into PARK.
Turn the engine off.
Remove the key fob.
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case
is in a drive position.
WARNING!
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving in icy or
slippery conditions. The increased engine braking can
cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing
around with the possible loss of vehicle control, which
may cause an accident possibly resulting in personal
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear selector out of
PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise,
damage to the gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can
damage the drivetrain.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
STARTING AND OPERATING 145
The following indicators should be used to ensure that you
have properly engaged the transmission into the PARK
position:
When shifting into PARK, pull the gear selector toward
you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it
stops.
Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully
seated in the PARK gate.
Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
With the brake pedal released, verify that the gear
selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts,
and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head
winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL
mode or use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control to select a lower gear range
Ú page 143. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating
limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger
of overheating, the Transmission Temperature Warning
Light may illuminate and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
NOTE:
Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at
low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep grade, or
in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In these condi-
tions, torque converter slip can impose a significant addi-
tional heat load on the cooling system. Downshifting the
transmission to the lowest possible gear (when climbing a
grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped in heavy
traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat generation.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be
modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature
improves warm-up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is
warm
Ú page 147. On Pickup models with 68RFE
transmission, top overdrive gear is also inhibited until the
transmission fluid is warm, and during extremely cold
temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may
briefly be limited to first and direct gears only. On trucks
with AS69RC transmission, FIFTH and SIXTH gears may be
inhibited briefly on cold starts below 41°F (5°C), and
during very cold temperatures (-4°F [-20°C] or below),
operation may briefly be limited to third gear only. During
this condition, the ability of the vehicle to accelerate under
heavily loaded conditions may be reduced. In all cases,
normal operation will resume once the transmission
temperature has risen to a suitable level.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition
to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that
limit your response to changing traffic or road
conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and
have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage.
For Recreational Towing
Ú page 219.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle
Ú page 366.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in FOURTH gear (for 68RFE transmission) or THIRD gear
(for AS69RC transmission) regardless of which forward
gear is selected. If an AS69RC-equipped truck enters Limp
Home mode at highway speeds, it will initially engage
FIFTH gear, until the vehicle slows to a speed where third
gear can be engaged. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to
normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that
you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. An authorized dealer has diagnostic
equipment to assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The ERS shift control allows the driver to limit the highest
available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For
example, if you set the transmission gear limit to FOURTH
gear, the transmission will not shift above FOURTH gear,
but will shift through the lower gears normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the GEAR “-”
switch will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top
available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the GEAR “–”
or GEAR “+” switch will change the top available gear.
Electronic Range Select
To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR “+”
switch until the gear limit display disappears from the
instrument cluster.
NOTE:
To select the proper gear position for maximum deceler-
ation (engine braking), simply push and hold the GEAR “–”
switch. The transmission will shift to the range from which
the vehicle can best be slowed down.
1 — GEAR “+” Switch
2 — GEAR “–” Switch
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip
and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Transmission
Gear Limit
Display
1 2 3 4 5 6 D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6
CAUTION!
When using ERS for engine braking while descending
steep grades, be careful not to overspeed the engine.
Apply the brakes as needed to prevent engine
overspeed.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
STARTING AND OPERATING 147
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (FIFTH and SIXTH gears). The
transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the
following conditions are present:
The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.
The transmission fluid has reached an adequate
temperature.
The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
ture.
The vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting
occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL
mode. This will improve performance and reduce the
potential for transmission overheating or failure due to
excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode,
transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission
will automatically downshift (for engine braking) when the
throttle is closed and/or during steady braking
maneuvers.
TOW/HAUL Switch
The TOW/HAUL Indicator Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has
been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores
normal operation. Normal operation is always the default
at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the
switch must be pushed each time the engine is started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different
feeling or response during normal operation in the upper
gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some
accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage, until the
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving).
Because engine speed is higher when the torque
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting properly when cold. This is
normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will
demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into
and out of Overdrive.
If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque
converter will refill within five seconds after starting the
engine.
WARNING!
Do not use the TOW/HAUL feature when driving in icy or
slippery conditions. The increased engine braking can
cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing
around with the possible loss of vehicle control, which
may cause an accident possibly resulting in personal
injury or death.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED
There can be up to six auxiliary switches located in the
lower switch bank of the instrument panel which can be
used to power various electronic devices and Power Take
Off (PTO). If equipped, it will take the place of the sixth
auxiliary switch. Connections to the switches are found
under the hood in the connectors attached to the auxiliary
Power Distribution Center.
You have the ability to configure the functionality of the
auxiliary switches via the instrument cluster display. All
switches can now be configured for setting the switch type
operation to latching or momentary, power source of
either battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state
across key cycles.
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is
set to latching and power source is set to ignition.
For further information on using the auxiliary switches,
please refer to the Ram Body Builder’s Guide by accessing
https://www.ramtrucks.com/ram-commercial/
body-builders-guide.html and choosing the appropriate
links.
ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with an Active Noise Cancellation
system that cannot be turned off. This system is designed
to address exhaust and engine noise. The system relies on
four microphones embedded in the headliner, which
monitor exhaust and engine noise, and assists an
onboard frequency generator, which creates
counteracting sound waves in the audio system’s
speakers. This helps keep the vehicle quiet at idle and
during drive. The system is deactivated when the windows
are rolled down.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a
manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted
transfer case.
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER
C
ASE (8-SPEED TRANSMISSION) —
I
F EQUIPPED
This is an electronically shifted transfer case and is
operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case
Switch), which is located on the instrument panel.
Four-Position Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four
positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
N (Neutral)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case position, see the following information:
2WD
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4WD HIGH
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range provides
torque to the front driveshaft (engages four-wheel drive)
which allows front and rear wheels to spin at the same
speed. This provides additional traction for loose, slippery
road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque (increased
torque over 4WD HIGH) to the front wheels, allowing front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range
provides additional traction and maximum pulling power
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h) in this range.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
STARTING AND OPERATING 149
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle Ú page 219.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads.
Driving the vehicle in two-wheel drive will have greater fuel
economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in
two-wheel drive.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be used to
maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by pushing the desired position on the
four-wheel drive control switch.
For specific shifting instructions
Ú page 150.
The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
HIGH and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads
may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
NOTE:
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in the center
of the four-wheel drive Control Switch and is pushed by
using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
only
Ú page 219.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4WD LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and
indicate the current and desired transfer case selection.
When you select a different transfer case position, the
indicator lights will do the following:
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn off.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain on.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Not
Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will
remain on.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will
continue to flash.
3. The transfer case
will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
position have been met. To retry the selection, push the
current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection.
To find the shift requirements
Ú page 150.
The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift
four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start-up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and
that service is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear
wheels are spinning. This could cause damage to driveline
components.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear drive shaft from
the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even
if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in
the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if the vehicle
is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a complete
stop before shifting to PARK, and verify that the
transmission gear position indicator solidly indicates
PARK (P) without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering down
the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light is illuminated.
Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to
roll which may cause personal injury or death.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the two-wheel
drive or 4WD HIGH positions at a given road speed. Take
care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
tion will remain on and the newly selected position indi-
cator light will continue to flash until all the
requirements for the selected position have been met.
If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn off, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator
light for the selected position will stop flashing and
remain on.
2WD TO 4WD HIGH
Push the desired position on the four-wheel drive control
switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts between two-wheel
drive and 4WD HIGH can be done with the vehicle stopped
or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case
will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release
the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If
the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch must be in the
ON/RUN position with the engine either running or off.
This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in
the ACC position.
NOTE:
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts between
2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear wheels are
spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
position indicator light will flash and the original position
indicator light will remain on. At this time, reduce speed
and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD OR 4WD HIGH TO 4WD LOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental
to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use
either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the
transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position and
the engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control
switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the
shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash
continuously while the original position indicator light is
on, until all requirements have been met.
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for
a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON/
RUN position, the shift will not take place and no posi-
tion indicator lights will be on or flashing.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
STARTING AND OPERATING 151
ELECTRONICALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER
C
ASE (6-SPEED TRANSMISSION) —
I
F EQUIPPED
The electronic shift transfer case is operated by the 4WD
Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on
the instrument panel.
Four-Position/Part-Time Transfer Case
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four
positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)
Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4WD HIGH)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)
N (NEUTRAL)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case position, see the following information:
2WD
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4WD HIGH
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range maximizes
torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front
wheels, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional traction and
maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces
only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle
Ú page 219.
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (two-wheel drive) for
normal street and highway conditions on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions can be used to
maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the four-wheel drive Control
Switch to the desired position.
For specific shifting instructions
Ú page 152.
The 4WD HIGH and 4WD LOW positions are designed for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD
HIGH and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads
may cause increased tire wear and damage to the
driveline components.
NOTE:
The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on the lower
left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational
towing only
Ú page 219.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4WD LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and
indicate the current and desired transfer case selection.
When you select a different transfer case position, the
indicator lights will do the following:
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N
(Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 STARTING AND OPERATING
If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Not
Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will
remain ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will
continue to flash.
3. The transfer case
will not shift.
NOTE:
Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the
necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case
position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the
control switch back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments
Ú page 152.
The SERV 4WD Warning Light monitors the electronic shift
four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after
engine start-up or illuminates during driving, it means that
the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and
that service is required.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear
wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to
driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the two-wheel
drive or 4WD HIGH positions at a given road speed. Take
care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous posi-
tion will remain ON and the newly selected position
indicator light will continue to flash until all the require-
ments for the selected position have been met. To retry
a shift: return the control switch back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator
light for the selected position will stop flashing and
remain ON.
2WD TO 4WD HIGH
Push the desired position on the four-wheel drive control
switch to shift the transfer case. Shifts between two-wheel
drive and 4WD HIGH can be done with the vehicle stopped
or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case
will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release
the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If
the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch must be in the
ON/RUN position with the engine either running or off.
This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in
the ACC position.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering down
the vehicle if the SERV 4WD Warning Light is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow
the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal injury.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
STARTING AND OPERATING 153
NOTE:
The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts between
2WD/4WD HIGH if the front and/or rear wheels are
spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected
position indicator light will flash and the original position
indicator light will remain on. At this time, reduce speed
and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift.
2WD OR 4WD HIGH TO 4WD LOW
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise
may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental
to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use
either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the
transfer case control switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position and
the engine running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control
switch.
4. After the desired position indicator light is on (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the
shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash
continuously while the original position indicator light is
on, until all requirements have been met.
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position for
a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON/
RUN position, the shift will not take place and no posi-
tion indicator lights will be on or flashing.
MANUALLY SHIFTED TRANSFER CASE —
I
F EQUIPPED
The transfer case provides four positions:
Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H)
N (Neutral)
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case position, see the following information:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range locks the
front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional
traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
N (Neutral) — This range disengages both the front and
rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle
Ú page 219.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the
2H position for normal street and highway conditions such
as dry, hard surfaced roads.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 STARTING AND OPERATING
When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L
positions can be used to lock the front and rear
driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply
moving the gear selector to the desired positions once the
appropriate speed and gear requirements are met.
Ú page 154 for further information.
The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on
dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear
and damage to the driveline components.
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in
four-wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts
are locked together. This light will illuminate when the
transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position.
There is no light for the 2H or N (Neutral) positions on
some models.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel.
Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause
damage to the drivetrain.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear
wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to
driveline components.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
NOTE:
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced
due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pressures,
excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted
Transfer Case
2H TO 4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle
stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion, shifts can
be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster
if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after
completing the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting
the transfer case lever.
2H OR 4H TO 4L
NOTE:
When shifting into or out of 4L some gear noise may be
heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the
vehicle or occupants.
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
transfer case Neutral.
NOTE:
Pausing in transfer case N (Neutral) in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission may require
shutting the engine off to avoid gear clash while
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the trans-
mission into N (Neutral), hold your foot on the brake,
and turn the engine off. Complete the range shift to the
desired position.
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due
to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several
attempts may be required for teeth alignment and shift
completion to occur. The preferred method is with the
vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid
attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle
moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4L while the trans-
mission is in gear.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if
the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should
always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
STARTING AND OPERATING 155
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Light in the
instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front
axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
DESCRIPTION
This air suspension system is a rear leveling ride height
system. The main purpose of this system is to maintain the
truck’s rear ride height level. There are two selectable
heights that can be chosen based on your operating
conditions.
The system requires that the ignition be in the ON/RUN
position or the engine running.
Rear Leveling Ride Height Switch
Standard Ride Height (SRH) – This is the standard position
of the suspension and is meant for normal driving. It will
automatically adjust to maintain the rear ride height as
conditions change.
Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) – Lowers the vehicle
approximately 1 inch (25 mm) for a level truck, to be used
as required while trailer towing. It will automatically adjust
to maintain the rear ride height as conditions change.
NOTE:
If lightly loaded, 3500 models will lower as close to
1 inch (25 mm) as possible.
Trailer Decoupling/Unloading – The air suspension
system will continue to load level after the vehicle has
been turned off for 5 minutes without compressor
activation. This allows for easy removal of a trailer and/or
load from the back of the truck by maintaining the ride
height. After 5 minutes you will need to turn the ignition to
the ON/RUN position for the air suspension to re-level due
to addition/removal of load in the vehicle. If the air
suspension system is disabled using the settings menu
(Tire Jack Mode, Transport Mode, Alignment Mode, or Bed
Lowering Mode) the system will remain disabled when the
vehicle is turned off. Reactivating the air suspension can
be accomplished via the settings menu or driving the
vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h) for Tire Jack Mode,
Alignment Mode, Transport Mode and Bed Lowering
Mode.
NOTE:
Most 3500 models will not lower to Alternate Trailer
Height (ATH) when unloaded.
For further information
Ú page 204.
AIR SUSPENSION MODES
The air suspension system has multiple modes to protect
the system in unique situations:
Tire/Jack Mode
To assist with changing a tire, the air suspension system
has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled
Ú page 104 or Ú page 226.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running.
WARNING!
The air suspension system uses a high pressure
volume of air to operate the system. To avoid personal
injury or damage to the system, see an authorized
dealer for service.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 STARTING AND OPERATING
Transport Mode
For towing your vehicle with four wheels off the road, the
air suspension system has a feature which will put the
vehicle into Bed Lowering Mode and disable the automatic
load leveling system
Ú page 104 or Ú page 226.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running.
Wheel Alignment Mode
Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be
enabled
Ú page 104 or Ú page 226.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the engine
running.
Bed Lowering Mode
While at zero vehicle speed, this setting is used to lower
the rear suspension to the lowest possible height and
disable the air suspension system. It enables easier
loading/unloading of the truck and makes it easier to
hook up trailers
Ú page 104 or Ú page 226.
Protection Strategy
In order to protect the air suspension system, the vehicle
will disable load leveling as required (suspension
overloaded, battery charge low, etc.). Load leveling will
automatically resume as soon as system operation
requirements are met. See an authorized dealer if system
does not resume.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
M
ESSAGES
When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will
appear in the instrument cluster display
Ú page 104.
An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error
has been detected.
See an authorized dealer for system service if normal
operation does not resume.
OPERATION
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) button once
while at Standard Ride Height (SRH), will lower the vehicle
to Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) and will illuminate the
LED.
NOTE:
The LED will continuously blink until vehicle Alternate
Trailer Height (ATH) has been achieved and the LED will
turn on.
Pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) again will raise
the vehicle to Standard Ride Height (SRH).
NOTE:
The LED will continuously blink until Standard Ride Height
(SRH) has been achieved and the LED will turn off.
Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the
vehicle, or deselecting the mode via the interface.
Tire/Jack Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-
nated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the
vehicle, or by deselecting the mode via the interface.
Wheel Alignment Mode – No indicator lamps will be illu-
minated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by driving
the vehicle, or by deselecting the mode via the inter-
face.
Bed Lowering Mode – Telltale on the cluster will be illu-
minated. Bed Lowering Mode is disabled by driving the
vehicle, deselecting the mode via the interface, or by
pushing the Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) button.
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM —IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an electronically locking rear
differential. Power Wagon also includes a locking front
differential. These differentials, when engaged,
mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the
wheels to spin at an equal rate. This allows the vehicle to
maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming
stuck. The locking differentials, rear or front, should only
be engaged during low-speed, extreme off-road situations
where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with the
ground. It is not recommended to drive the vehicle with
one or both of the differentials locked on pavement due to
the reduced ability to turn and speed limitations.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
AXLE Lock Selector
The locking axles are controlled by the axle lock buttons.
Under normal driving conditions, the vehicle should be left
in the AXLE UNLOCK position.
NOTE:
Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK position, the
limited slip differential in the rear axle still provides torque
biasing capability for moderate low traction environments.
During the command to lock the axle, the indicator light
will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock command
has been successfully executed, the light will remain on
solid.
To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4WD LOW, 4WD
HIGH or two-wheel drive
Ú page 148. Push the REAR
LOCK button while traveling less than 10 mph (16 km/h).
The REAR LOCK indicator light will remain on when the
rear axle is locked.
NOTE:
Left to right wheel speed difference may be necessary to
allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator light is flashing
after placing the vehicle in the REAR LOCK or FRONT/
REAR LOCK position, drive the vehicle in a turn or on loose
gravel to expedite the locking action.
To lock the front axle, if equipped, push the FRONT/REAR
LOCK button while traveling less than 10 mph (16 km/h)
in 4WD LOW. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light will be
solid when the front axle is locked.
NOTE:
The rear axle must be locked before the front axle will lock.
When both the axles are locked, to unlock the front axle,
push the REAR LOCK button while in 4WD LOW. The
FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the
axle is unlocked.
NOTE:
The axle lockers could be torque locked due to side to side
loads on the axle. Driving slowly while turning the steering
wheel from a left hand turn to a right hand turn or driving
in REVERSE for a short distance may be required to
release the torque lock and unlock the axles.
To unlock the rear axle, push the AXLE UNLOCK button.
The REAR LOCK indicator light will go out when the rear
axle is unlocked.
STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
WAGON ONLY
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting
stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front
suspension travel in off-road situations.
1 — FRONT/REAR LOCK – the front and rear axles are
locked (Power Wagon Only)
2 — REAR LOCK – the rear axle is locked
3 — AXLE UNLOCK – the front and rear axles are
unlocked (Rear only if equipped)
CAUTION!
Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced
roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced and
damage to the drivetrain may occur when the axles
are locked on hard surfaced roads.
Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is stuck
and the tires are spinning. You can damage drive-
train components. Lock the rear axle before
attempting situations or navigating terrain, which
could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck.
WARNING!
Do not use the locked axle position for normal driving.
A locked front axle is intended for off-road driving only.
Locking the front axle during on-road driving will reduce
the steering ability. This could cause a collision and you
may be seriously injured.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an
increased ride height of approximately 1.9 inches
(48.3 mm) in the front and 1.5 inches (38.1 mm) in the
rear. A major advantage to increasing ride height is the
positive effect it has on approach/departure and break
over angles.
This system is controlled by the electronic control sway bar
switch located below the instrument panel.
SWAY BAR Disconnect Button
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Push
the switch again to deactivate the system. The Sway Bar
Indicator Light (located in the instrument cluster) will
illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The Sway Bar
Indicator Light will flash during activation transition, or
when activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/
sway bar should remain in On-Road mode during normal
driving conditions.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4WD
HIGH or 4WD LOW and push the SWAY BAR button to
obtain the Off-Road position
Ú page 148. The Sway Bar
Indicator Light will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has
been fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to left
and right suspension height differences. This condition is
due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In
order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect,
the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This
alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level
ground or rocked from side to side.
To return to the On-Road mode, push the SWAY BAR
button again.
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER
WAGON, REBEL OR OFF-ROAD PACKAGE
EQUIPPED ONLY
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS AND VEHICLE
C
HARACTERISTICS
Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road capabilities.
These off-road capabilities will allow you to explore those
wilderness trails where few travel, providing a source of
exciting and satisfying recreation. Before you venture out,
you should contact your local governmental agency to
determine the designated Off-Road Vehicle (ORV) trails or
recreation areas. You should always tread lightly and only
use established roads, trails or ORV recreational areas.
The National Forest Service, Bureau of Land
Management, or local Department of Natural Resources
are a wealth of information and usually have maps with
marked trails.
WARNING!
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard
surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h),
you may lose control of the vehicle, which could result
in serious injury or death. The front stabilizer bar
enhances vehicle stability and assists in maintaining
control of the vehicle. The system monitors vehicle
speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at
speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a
flashing off road light and solid on road light. Once
vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the
system will attempt to return to the Off-Road mode.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to On-Road
mode, vehicle stability is reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster
than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss of control of
the vehicle, which could result in serious injury or
death. Contact your local service center for assistance.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
STARTING AND OPERATING 159
Skid Plates And Underbody Protection
Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components
of the truck including the fuel tank, transfer case and
steering damper. In addition, this vehicle is equipped with
boxed cross members and fore/aft rails. This additional
protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in severe
off-road situations that would be considered impassable
by a normal truck.
Ramp Travel Index (RTI)
The RTI is the distance, in inches, that you can drive
your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree ramp without
lifting any other wheel off the ground. This distance up the
ramp divided by the wheelbase of the vehicle and
multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle has an RTI of
429 (connected sway bar) or an RTI of 538 (disconnected
sway bar), which means you can articulate one front wheel
22 inches (56 cm) or 27.5 inches (70cm) in the air while
the other three wheels remain in contact with the ground.
Water Fording Characteristics
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle's ability to cross
a body of still water, where the powertrain and drivetrain
are safe from water ingestion. This vehicle has high water
fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of
water, without stopping, 24 inches (60 cm) deep at a
maximum speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of
water 30 inches (76 cm) deep at a maximum speed of
5 mph (8 km/h), both with an entrance ramp angle of
1.3 degrees.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle
Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous
use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving). When
climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects, using light
brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from
jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you
need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road.
You should be familiar with the terrain and area before
proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions:
hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
and ice. Every surface has a different effect on your
vehicle's steering, handling and traction. Controlling your
vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so
always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and
maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what isn't. When on a trail you should always be
looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while
remembering what you are currently driving over.
When To Use Low Range
When driving off-road, shift into 4WD LOW for additional
traction or to improve handling and control on slippery or
difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low range will allow
the engine to operate in a higher power range. This will allow
you to idle over obstacles and down hills, with improved
control and less effort. Also, use 4WD LOW in rain, ice, snow,
mud, and sand to get heavy loads rolling, improve traction,
or whenever 4WD HIGH traction will not do the job.
DRIVING IN SNOW, MUD AND SAND
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you
should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle's momentum.
CAUTION!
The door sill height is 25 inches (63.5 cm). Water may
intrude into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo.
Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off-road
situation.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 STARTING AND OPERATING
Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control and trac-
tion at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD LOW if neces-
sary. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to
maintain headway. Over-revving the engine can spin
the wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow
to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than
a quarter turn quickly back and forth, while still
applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh
"bite" and help maintain your momentum.
Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction
around the tires and is very difficult to get through. You
should use 4WD LOW with a gear low enough to main-
tain your momentum without shifting. If you start to
slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more
than a quarter turn quickly back and forth for additional
traction. Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle
damage and getting stuck. They are normally full of
debris from previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good
practice before entering any mud hole, get out and
determine how deep it is, if there are any hidden obsta-
cles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck.
Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with
full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a
trail, maintain your vehicle's momentum and do not
stop. The key to driving in soft sand is using the appro-
priate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding
abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's
momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft
sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a
minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater
tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically
improve your traction and handling, while driving on the
soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal air
pressure before driving on pavement or other hard
surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires back
up prior to reducing the pressure.
CROSSING OBSTACLES (ROCKS AND
O
THER HIGH POINTS)
While driving off road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types
of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path ahead to
determine the correct approach and your ability to safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a
firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a
complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it
makes contact with the object.
Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake
pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
guide you through.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest with your tires. This will
lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of the
tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is
designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make
every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high engine
RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine braking may
cause skidding and loss of control.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce your
speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough
to strike your axles or undercarriage.
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
STARTING AND OPERATING 161
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout
Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut,
the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle's mobility. Approach these obstacles at a
45-degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You
should now be able to drive out following the trench you
just created at a 45-degree angle.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately
10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be on top
of the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While
climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then ease
the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
Getting High Centered
If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out of
the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung
up on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is
the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on
what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place
a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high
point when you let the vehicle down. You can also try
rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.
HILL CLIMBING
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good
understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's
limitations. Hills can cause serious problems. Some are
just too steep to climb and should not be attempted. You
should always feel confident with the vehicle and your
abilities. You should always climb hills straight up and
down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a hill
consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is too
steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill side
trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on top
and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or
other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover
the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
looks good and you feel confident, then change trans-
mission into a lower gear, shift the transfer case into
4WD LOW and proceed with caution. You should use
first gear and 4WD LOW for very steep hills.
Driving Uphill – Once you have determined your ability
to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear,
line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run.
Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply
more power as you start up the hill. Do not race forward
into a steep grade, the abrupt change of grade could
cause you to lose control. If the front end begins to
bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four
tires back on the ground. As you approach the crest of
the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the
top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest
of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway
by turning the steering wheel no more than a quarter
turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh
"bite" into the surface and will usually provide enough
traction to complete the climb. If you do not make it to
the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight
down the grade using engine resistance along with the
vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an
obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high centered.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Downhill – Before driving down a steep hill you
need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent.
What is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to
maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there obsta-
cles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of distance
at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle
descends too fast? If you feel confident in your ability
to proceed then make sure you are in 4WD LOW with
the transmission in FIRST gear (manually select FIRST
gear on automatic transmissions) and proceed with
caution. Allow engine braking to control the descent
and apply your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the
tires to lock.
Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible avoid
driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your
vehicle's abilities. Driving across an incline places
more weight on the downhill wheels, which increases
the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover. Make
sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable
soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angle
heading slightly up or down.
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall or
begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow
your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply
the brake. Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE.
Back slowly down the hill allowing the compression
braking of the engine and transmission to help regulate
your speed. If the brakes are required to control vehicle
speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding
the tires.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be
attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible manner.
You should only drive through areas which are designated
and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage
to the environment. You should know your vehicle's
abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong.
You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing
deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air
intake. If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it.
Determine if it has ingested water first. The key to any
crossing is low and slow. You want to use FIRST gear in
4WD LOW and proceed very slowly with a constant slow
speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h] maximum) and light throttle.
Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through
the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the
bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of
the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn around
on a steep grade. Driving across an incline increases
the risk of a roll over, which may result in severe injury
or death.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use vehicle
brakes in conjunction with engine braking. Descending
a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be
seriously injured or killed.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover,
which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make
it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never attempt to
turn around. To do so may result in tipping and rolling
the vehicle, which may result in severe injury. Always
back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle
brakes. Never drive diagonally across a hill, always drive
straight up or down.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other vehicle
components and your brakes will be less effective once
wet and/or muddy.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
STARTING AND OPERATING 163
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you approach
any type of water you need to determine if you can
cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out
and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You
need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current
and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy
waters, check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will
not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the
vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the
water depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft
bottoms the vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing
the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this
when determining the depth and the ability to safely
cross.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or other
standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy
waters. These water types normally contain hidden
obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accu-
rate water depth, approach angle, and bottom condi-
tion. Murky or muddy water holes are where you want
to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This makes for
a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If you are
able to determine you can safely cross, than proceed
using the low and slow method.
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other
Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely
dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running
stream or river even in shallow water. Fast moving
water can easily push your vehicle downstream
sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water, a
high current can still wash the dirt out from around your
tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy.
There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle
damage with slower water currents in depths greater
than the vehicle's running ground clearance. You
should never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle's running ground clearance.
Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle
downstream out of control if the water is deep enough
to push on the large surface area of the vehicle's body.
Before you proceed determine the speed of the
current, the water's depth, approach angle, bottom
condition and if there are any obstacles, then cross at
an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and
slow technique.
AIRING DOWN FOR OFF-ROAD DRIVING
Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your ride
comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air
pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its
surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or form
to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and vehicles
require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like rock and
heavier vehicles require higher pressures than softer
surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will need
to experiment to determine what is right for your situation.
It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to replace it.
Start high and lower it as required. Remember you must
return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on
road or at highway conditions. Be sure you have a way to
return the tires to their normal on road air pressure.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can push
your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control.
This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury
or drowning.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire damage
and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air
pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a
reduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and avoid
sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE RECOVERY
If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation where
you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle recovery
should always be given consideration before attempting a
questionable obstacle. You should never go off-road
driving without the ability to recover your vehicle from a
situation. Having another vehicle with you usually works
best for most situations. The first thing to do is assess the
situation. Why are you stuck? Are you hung up on
something? Would it be easier to go forward or to go
backward? Can you still move the vehicle? Is there an
anchor point to winch to? Are you alone or do you have
another vehicle to help? Is there high risk of vehicle
damage during the recovery process? Answering these
questions will help you determine the best method of
recovery. If you can still move the vehicle slightly and the
only issue is slick ground, then rock cycling your vehicle
would be the first choice. If you have ample room, an
additional vehicle and there is low risk of vehicle impact
on the surroundings, then using a tow strap to the vehicle
tow hooks would be fast and easy. If the vehicle is severely
hung up or in a situation where great care needs to be
taken during the recovery, then nothing can do the job
better than a winch. If you are severely hung up on
something you should jack the vehicle up and stack
something under the wheels to allow the vehicle to roll off
the object without causing further damage. This should be
tried before attempting any recovery method.
Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your vehicle is
one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly used
methods. This simply involves shifting your vehicle
from DRIVE to REVERSE, while applying throttle after
each shift. During this process, for additional traction,
try turning your steering wheel quickly left and right no
more than a quarter turn. If you are stuck in mud, sand,
or snow try spinning your tires during this process to
clean the debris from the tread and improve the trac-
tion. You want to create a rocking motion with the
vehicle. This helps build vehicle momentum, which
hopefully gets you out. Remember to ease off and on
the accelerator before and after the shift. If after a few
rock cycles your vehicle is not free, stop and try another
method of recovery. Continuous rock cycling will only
cause unnecessary damage to your vehicle and the
environment.
Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow straps
are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from
minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which
is not stuck. The tow hooks on your vehicle are
designed to take the abusive force generated during
vehicle recovery. Do not use the bumper or any other
vehicle component as an attachment point. Using tow
straps requires coordination between the two drivers.
Good communication and line of sight are required for
a safe recovery. First connect the tow strap to the
correct attachment points on both vehicles. There
should be a least 20 to 30 feet (6 to 9 meters) between
the vehicles to allow for a safe recovery. If necessary
join two tow straps together using a 1.5 inch hard wood
dowel. This will keep the straps from becoming knotted
and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap breaks.
Next have the tow vehicle back-up, leaving two to three
feet worth of slack in the strap. Then the tow vehicle,
using light throttle, should accelerate tightening the
strap providing the pulling force needed to free the
vehicle. The vehicle being recovered should assist in
the recovery, at the time of the snap, by slowly spinning
the tires in the same direction as the pulling vehicle.
After the vehicle becomes free, the driver of the previ-
ously stuck vehicle should signal they are free and
should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles. The
driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the throttle
without using the brakes, once signaled by the other
driver. This sequence is important to avoid having the
recovered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.
CAUTION!
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first clearing
the object, may result in additional underbody damage.
CAUTION!
Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an
excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires faster than
an indicated 30 mph (48 km/h).
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
STARTING AND OPERATING 165
Winching (Refer To “Winch Operation” Ú page 166) –
Winching is most commonly used in the following situ-
ations: there is no support vehicle available, a high
controlled force is required to recover the vehicle, there
is a high risk of environmental or vehicle damage, or
where nothing else seems to work. A winch can deliver
a high pulling force with a great deal of control. It allows
you to walk the vehicle out of the situation in a slow
controlled manner. This control works well for avoiding
further vehicle damage. Once you decide it is time to
use the winch look for a good anchor point. It needs to
be strong enough to hold more than the vehicle's
weight and provide a direction of pull as straight as
possible. Use block and tackle if necessary to improve
the angle of pull or increase the winch's pulling force. If
the anchor point is a tree use a strap around its base
and hook the cable to the strap. If it is another vehicle,
then place that vehicle in PARK and block the front
tires. If you cannot find an anchor point within reach try
using your spare tire by burying it. Once you have deter-
mined an anchor point hook up the cable, ensuring
there are a least five wraps of cable left on the drum,
and place a floor mat or something else over the strung
out cable. Placing something over the strung out cable
helps keep the cable on the ground if it breaks. Next,
place the vehicle in FIRST gear and apply a very light
throttle as you power the winch in. Be careful not to
allow slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle. Do
not try to guide the cable into the drum. If it starts to
bunch up on one end, let it. You can re-spool the cable
afterwards. Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and
always stand back while winching.
AFTER DRIVING OFF-ROAD
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always
a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any
problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to
the values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two straps
with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects could
become projectiles if a strap breaks, which could cause
severe injury. Never leave more than 2 to 3 feet (0.60 to
1 meter) of slack in the strap. More slack than this
greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle damage.
Always keep everyone at least 30 feet (9 meters) away
from a strapping or winching situation.
WARNING!
Winch cables are under high tension when in use and
can become a projectile if they fail. Never stand over or
straddle the winch cable. Never jerk or overload the
winch cable. Never stand in front of the vehicle while
winching. Failure to follow these instructions can result
in serious or fatal injury.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 STARTING AND OPERATING
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction on
snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when there is
a difference between the traction characteristics of the
surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit
performs similarly to a conventional differential. On
slippery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more
of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better
traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator will
supply maximum traction. When starting with only one
rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight
momentary application of the parking brake may be
necessary to gain maximum traction.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in
a turn.
WINCH USAGE — IF EQUIPPED
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE USING YOUR
W
INCH
General Winch Information
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery
winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the
vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds the
winch rope onto the winch drum via planetary gear
reduction. By nature, a winch is capable of generating very
high forces and should be used with care. Do not operate
the winch without reading and understanding the
complete winch owner's manual.
Tensioning The Winch Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.
Follow the instructions listed to tension the rope:
1. Un-spool the rope leaving five wraps of rope on the
winch drum.
2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.
3. Apply at least 1,000 lb (454 kg) of tension to the rope
while winding the rope. Always use care to ensure the
rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is
neatly wound onto the drum.
Low Voltage Interrupt
Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt
winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage
drops to a low level. The winch will not power-in or out for
30 seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt is
tripped, the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a
few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to
recover before continuing to winch.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not
have full braking power when you need it to prevent a
collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty
conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as
necessary.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground
since the vehicle may drive through the rear wheel
remaining on the ground. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load required
to tension the winch rope.
CAUTION!
The winch rope must spool on the winch drum in the
direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the
winch.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
STARTING AND OPERATING 167
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF
Y
OUR WINCH
Winch Components
1.
Remote Control:
The remote control provides the
interface between the winch operator and the
winch. The remote control provides the ability to
power the winch in, out, and stop the winch. To
operate the winch, the toggle switch is pushed down
to power the winch in and up to power the winch out.
The winch will stop if the switch is left in the neutral
(center) position.
2. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle
charging system.
3.
Remote Socket: The remote socket (which will be
located on the bumper assembly) allows the remote
control to be attached to the control pack to allow the
winch to function.
4.
Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch drum
allows the rope to be stored on the winch and
transmits force to the rope. The winch is equipped
with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the
winch drum if the winch motor is stopped.
5. Synthetic Rope: The synthetic rope allows the winch
to be connected to an anchor to provide a pulling
force. This synthetic rope is highly flexible,
lightweight, and it floats.
6.
Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum
to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the
rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.
Fairlead: The hawse fairlead acts as a guide for the
synthetic rope and minimizes damage to the rope.
WINCH ACCESSORIES
The following accessories are necessary to attach the
winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe
winching.
Gloves: It is extremely important to wear
protective gloves while operating the winch or
handling the winch rope. Avoid loose fitting
clothes or anything that could become
entangled in the rope and other moving parts.
Snatch/Block Pulley: Used properly, the
multi-purpose snatch block allows you to (1)
increase the winch's pulling power; and (2)
change your pulling direction without damaging
the winch rope. Proper use of the snatch block is covered
in “Before You Pull.”
Clevis/D-Shackles: The D-Shackle is a safe
means of connecting the looped ends of
cables, straps and snatch blocks. The shackle's
pin is threaded to allow easy removal.
Tree Trunk Protector: Typically made of tough,
high-quality nylon, it provides the operator an
attachment point for the winch rope to a wide
variety of anchor points and objects, as well as
protects living trees.
Abrasion Sleeve: The abrasion sleeve is provided with the
synthetic rope and must be used with the synthetic rope at
all times to protect the rope from potential abrasion wear.
The sleeve has a loose fit so it can easily be positioned
along the synthetic rope to protect from rough surfaces
and sharp corners.
CAUTION!
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the hook.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
OPERATING YOUR WINCH
General Information
Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key
points to remember when using your winch are:
Always take your time to assess the situation and plan
your pull carefully.
Always take your time when using a winch.
Use the right equipment for the situation.
Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the
synthetic rope to slip through your hands when
handling the rope.
Only the operator should handle the synthetic rope and
remote control.
Think safety at all times.
Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch
WARNING!
Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding
proper winch usage may result in severe injury.
Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook
when spooling wire rope in or out.
Never use as a hoist.
Never use to move persons.
Never exceed winch or synthetic rope rated capacity.
Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling the
synthetic rope.
Never touch synthetic rope or hook while in tension
or under load.
Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under
load, synthetic rope is in tension, or rope drum is
moving.
Always stand clear of synthetic rope and load and
keep others away during winching.
Always keep hands and clothing clear of the
synthetic rope, hook and fairlead opening during
operation and when spooling.
Never wrap synthetic rope back onto itself. Always
use a choker chain, wire choker rope or tree trunk
protector on the anchor.
Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to
increase the length of a pull.
Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery
strap attached directly to the winch hook.
Never use bungee or kinetic straps that develop
tremendous and potentially dangerous amounts of
force when stretched.
Always disconnect the remote control when not in use.
Never winch when there are less than 10 wraps of
synthetic rope around the winch drum.
Always pass remote control through a window to
avoid pinching lead in door, when using remote
inside a vehicle.
Never leave the remote control plugged into the
winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Always know your winch: Take the time to fully read
and understand the included Installation and Opera-
tions Guide and Basic Guide to Winching Tech-
niques, in order to understand your winch and the
winching operation.
Always inspect winch installation and synthetic rope
condition before operating the winch. Frayed, kinked
or damaged rope must be replaced immediately.
Loose or damaged winch installation must be
corrected immediately.
Always be sure any element which can interfere with
safe winching operations is removed prior to initi-
ating winching.
Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum,
synthetic rope and rigging.
Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed rope, or loose
connections. Replace if damaged.
Be careful not to pull the winch rope collar through
the rollers. Watch and listen to winch for proper
snugness.
Never power hook through fairlead. Could cause
damage.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
STARTING AND OPERATING 169
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and synthetic rope for
damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or
rope shows excessive wear, frays, or damage.
Winch Rope
2. Put on gloves.
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the
winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to
disengage. Freespooling conserves battery power.
Free Spool Lever
4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap. Free
the winch hook from its anchor point. Attach the hook
strap to the hook (if not attached).
Hook Strap
5. Pull the synthetic rope to the anchor point. Pull out
enough synthetic rope to reach your anchor point. To
prevent losing the end, hold the hook strap while you
work.
Pulling Synthetic Rope
6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have
established your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk
protector or choker-chain around the object.
Tree Trunk Protector
WARNING!
Never touch winch rope or hook while someone else
is at the control switch or during winching operation.
Never touch winch rope or hook while under tension
or under load.
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will withstand
the load.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
How to choose an anchor point: A secure anchor is critical
to winching operations. An anchor must be strong enough
to hold while winching. Natural anchors include trees,
stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as low as possible. If no
natural anchors are available when recovering another
vehicle, your vehicle becomes the anchor point. In this
case, be sure to put the transmission in NEUTRAL, apply
the hand brake and block its wheels to prevent your
vehicle from moving. Ideally, you'll want an anchor point
that will enable you to pull straight in the direction the
vehicle will move. This allows the synthetic rope to wind
tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum. An anchor point
as far away as possible will provide the winch with its
greatest pulling power.
7. Attach the Clevis/D-Shackle and Tree Trunk
Protector. Attach the shackle to the two ends of the
strap or chain and through the hook, being careful not
to over tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
Clevis/D-Shackles
8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the
clutch lever on the winch to engage.
NOTE:
Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or disengaged.
9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box,
located on the front fascia/bumper. Be careful not to
let the remote control cord dangle in front of the
winch. If you choose to control the winch from inside
your vehicle, always pass the remote through a
window to avoid pinching the cord in the door. Always
disconnect the remote control when not in use.
Winch Box Remote Control Connector
10. Put synthetic rope under tension. Using the remote
control switch, slowly wind the rope until no slack
remains. Once the rope is under tension, stand well
clear of it and never step over it.
Pulling Synthetic Rope Under Tension
11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are
secured and free of debris before continuing with the
winching procedure.
12. Check synthetic rope. The rope should be neatly
wound around the spooling drum. Improper winding
can cause damage to the synthetic rope.
Synthetic Rope Neatly Wound Around The Spooling Drum
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
STARTING AND OPERATING 171
Heavy Blanket Over Rope
In certain situations you may decide to throw a heavy
blanket or similar object over the rope. A heavy blan-
ket can absorb energy should the synthetic rope
break. Place it on the rope midway between the winch
and the anchor point. Do this before the rope is put
under tension. Do not approach or move the blanket
once tension is applied. Do not allow it to get pulled
into the fairlead. If it is necessary to move or remove
the blanket, slack the tension on the rope first.
13.
Establish "no people" zones: Make your intentions
clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity
surrounding the winching operation is completely
aware of your intentions before you pull.
Declare
where the spectators should not stand — never
behind or in front of the vehicle and never near the
synthetic rope or snatch block. Your situation may
have other "no people" zones.
No People Zones
14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine on
and light tension already on the synthetic rope, begin
winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the rope is
winding evenly and tightly around the spooling drum. For
additional assistance, the winched vehicle can be slowly
driven while being pulled by the winch. Continue pulling
until the vehicle is on stable ground. If you are able to
drive the vehicle, the winching operation is complete.
Using The Remote Control
NOTE:
Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended
winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow the
winch motor to cool down.
What to look for under load: The synthetic rope
must always spool onto the drum as indicated by
the drum rotation decal on the winch. As you
power-in, make sure the synthetic rope winds
evenly and tightly on the drum. This prevents the
outer rope wraps from drawing into the inner
wraps, binding and damaging the synthetic rope.
Avoid shock loads by using the control switch
intermittently to take up rope slack. Shock loads
can momentarily far exceed the winch and
synthetic rope ratings. During side pulls the
synthetic rope tends to stack up at one end of the
drum. This stack can become large enough to
cause serious damage to the winch. So, line up
pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop
winching if the synthetic rope comes close to the
tie rods or mounting plate. To fix an uneven stack,
spool out that section of the rope and reposition it
to the opposite end of the drum, which will free up
space for continued winching.
15. Secure the vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle is
complete, be sure to secure the vehicle's brakes and
shift the transmission to PARK. Release tension in
the synthetic rope.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 STARTING AND OPERATING
16. Disconnect the synthetic rope, and disconnect from
the anchor.
17. Rewind the synthetic rope. The person handling the
synthetic rope should walk the rope in and not let it
slide through the hand, control the winch at all times.
Rewinding The Synthetic Rope
NOTE:
How to spool under no load: Arrange the remote control
lead so it cannot be caught in the winch. Arrange the
synthetic rope so it will not kink or tangle when spooled.
Be sure any synthetic rope already on the spooling drum is
wound tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and straighten
the layer if necessary. Keep the synthetic rope under light
tension and spool the rope back and onto the winch drum
in even layers.
Stop frequently to tighten and straighten the layers as
necessary. Repeat this process until the winch hook is the
same distance as the full length of the remote control from
the winch. Pinch the hook between your thumb and fore-
finger and attach the hook strap. Hold the hook strap
between the thumb and forefinger to keep tension on the
synthetic rope. Walk the synthetic rope towards the
fairlead, carefully spooling in the remaining rope by
pulsing the remote control switch.
18. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the
hawse fairlead.
Hook In Stored Position
19. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the
remote control cord from the control box and store in
a clean and dry place. Winching operations are now
complete. Put the cap on the solenoid plug-in.
NOTE:
Always store the remote control in a protected, clean, dry
area.
RIGGING TECHNIQUES
Various winching situations will require application of
other winching techniques. These could range from too
little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight line
rigging, simply increasing pulling power, or maintaining a
straight-line pulling situation. You will have to assess what
technique is correct for your situation. Think "safety" at all
times.
How To Change The Pulling Direction
Change Pulling Directions
All winching operations should have a straight line from
the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the
synthetic rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting
pulling efficiency and damaging synthetic rope. A snatch
block, secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle will
enable you to change your pulling direction while still
allowing the synthetic rope to be at 90° to wind properly
onto the spooling drum.
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers inside
the hook area as you are powering-in.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
STARTING AND OPERATING 173
Increasing Pulling Power
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more pulling
power. The use of snatch blocks increases mechanical
advantage and that increases your pulling power.
Double Line
Wire Rope Routing
Because pulling power decreases with the number of
layers of synthetic rope on the winch drum, you can use a
snatch block to double line out more rope. This decreases
the number of layers of synthetic rope on the drum, and
increases pulling power. Start by feeding out enough
synthetic rope to free the winch hook. Attach the hook to
your vehicle's frame/tow hook and run the rope through a
snatch block. Disengage the clutch and, using the snatch
block, pull out enough synthetic rope to reach your anchor
point. Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit. Secure
to the anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker
chain. Attach the clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the
two ends of the strap/chain, being careful not to over
tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and maneuverability in tight
spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering
capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these
conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This
is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system.
This noise should be considered normal, and it does
not in any way damage the steering system.
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING FLUID
C
HECK
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as
anticipated. Check fluid level when the engine is cold and
off. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized
dealer.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces
Ú page 448.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts
and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not
overfill. Use only manufacturer's recommended power
steering fluid.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 STARTING AND OPERATING
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise Control
system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system:
Cruise Control will keep your vehicle at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) will adjust the vehicle
speed up to the preset speed to maintain a distance
with the vehicle ahead.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if ACC is not enabled,
Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature
selected.
Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a time.
For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control is enabled,
Adaptive Cruise Control will be unavailable, and vice
versa.
CRUISE CONTROL
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over accelerator
operations at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the right side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise Control.
The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster display
will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the on/off
button a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push
the SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. Release the
accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected
speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on
level ground before pushing the SET (+) or SET (-) button.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (-)/Decel
4 — On/Off
5 — RES/Resume
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when not in use is
dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or
cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have an accident. Always ensure the system
is off when you are not using it.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
STARTING AND OPERATING 175
(Continued)
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) or SET (-) button,
the new set speed will be the current speed of the vehicle.
To Accelerate For Passing
While the Cruise Control is set, press the accelerator to
pass as you would normally. When the pedal is released,
the vehicle will return to the set speed.
USING CRUISE CONTROL ON HILLS
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up and down
hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it
may be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC (cancel)
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle
will deactivate the Cruise Control system without erasing
the set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the Cruise
Control system without erasing the set speed from
memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition in the
OFF position, erases the set speed from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by Cruise Control while traveling on
highways and major roadways. However, it is not a safety
system and not designed to prevent collisions. The Cruise
Control function performs differently
Ú page 174.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged in light
to moderate traffic conditions without the constant need
to reset your speed. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a vehicle
directly ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed the
original set speed) automatically to maintain a preset
following distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications to
the vehicle will affect the performance of the Adaptive
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC not enabled) will not
detect vehicles directly ahead of you. Always be aware
of the feature selected
Ú page 454.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the system
cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control
and have an accident. Do not use Cruise Control in
heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driver involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead and,
most importantly, brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road conditions.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion and death or serious personal injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehi-
cles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel operate
the Adaptive Cruise Control system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the current ACC
system settings. The information it displays depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button until
one of the following appears in the instrument cluster
display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, the
display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the instrument
cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of the
following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the last
display selected after five seconds of no ACC display
activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is 20 mph
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready state, the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather condi-
tions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop while
following a vehicle ahead and hold the vehicle
for approximately two seconds in the stop posi-
tion. At this point, there will be an “ACC May
Cancel Soon” chime and warning to the driver.
When ACC is canceled, the system will release
the brakes and the driver must take over
braking. The system can be resumed when
the vehicle ahead drives off by releasing the
brake and pushing the resume button on the
steering wheel.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e., in
highway construction zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off-ramp; when
driving on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered,
slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
WARNING!
1 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — Distance Setting Decrease
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
STARTING AND OPERATING 177
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the minimum speed
range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of your
vehicle in close proximity
When Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full Off mode is
active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button. The ACC menu in the instrument cluster displays
“ACC Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. At this time, the
system will turn off and the instrument cluster display will
show “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET
(+) button or the SET (-) button and release. The
instrument cluster display will show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without ACC
enabled. To change between the different modes, push
the ACC on/off button which turns the ACC and the Fixed
Speed Cruise Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on (changing to)
Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph
(32 km/h), the set speed will default to 20 mph
(32 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the current
speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can cause
the vehicle to continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs, the message “ACC Driver Over-
ride” will display in the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set speed
while ACC is enabled, the system will not control the
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by the posi-
tion of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed Speed
Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The trailer brake is applied manually (if equipped)
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
System (ESC/TCS) activates
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always leave
the system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system will not
react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound even
if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since neither
the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed in memory
if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button is
pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES (resume)
button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The instrument cluster display will show the last set
speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h)
when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph (0 km/h)
when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to a
complete stop longer than two seconds, the system will
cancel. The driver will have to apply the brakes to keep
the vehicle at a standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set speed by
pushing the SET
(+) button, or decrease speed by pushing
the SET
(-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 5 mph increments until the button
is released. The new set speed is reflected in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET
(+), or SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to adjust in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The new set speed is reflected in
the instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET
(+) button or SET (-)
buttons, the new set speed will be the current speed of the
vehicle.
When ACC Is Active
When you use the SET
(-) button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle suffi-
ciently to reach the set speed, the brake system will
automatically slow the vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a full stop
when following a vehicle in front. If your vehicle follows
the vehicle in front to a standstill, your vehicle will
release the brakes two seconds after coming to a full
stop.
The ACC system maintains set speed when driving
uphill and downhill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting may
occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to maintain set
speed. When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC
system will cancel if the braking temperature exceeds
normal range (overheated).
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic and
road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed that is
too high or too low for prevailing traffic and road
conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate or
decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and death
or serious personal injury.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
STARTING AND OPERATING 179
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) can be set by varying the distance setting
between four bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this distance setting
and the vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the
distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance setting
displays in the instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the Distance
Increase button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the Distance
Decrease button and release. Each time the button is
pushed, the distance setting decreases by one bar
(shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the instrument cluster displays the ACC Set
With Target Detected Indicator Light, and the system
adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the
distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the
set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of the
sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however,
the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC system
applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts that
its maximum braking level is not sufficient to maintain the
set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will
flash in the instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster display is a
warning for the driver to take action and does not mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying the
brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a vehicle,
the system will provide an additional acceleration up to
the ACC set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes
the left turn signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill while
following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will resume motion,
without any driver interaction, if the vehicle ahead starts
moving within two seconds of your vehicle coming to a
standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within two
seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill, the ACC
with Stop system will cancel and the brakes will release.
A cancel message will display on the instrument cluster
display and produce a warning chime. The driver must now
manually operate the vehicle’s accelerator and brakes.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver door is
opened, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and the
brakes will release. A cancel message will display on the
instrument cluster display and produce a warning chime.
The driver must now manually operate the vehicle’s
accelerator and brakes.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 STARTING AND OPERATING
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
VEHICLE” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning will display and a chime will sound when
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt
or ice. In these cases, the instrument cluster display will
display “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and the system will deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow, or tunnels with
reflective tiles). The ACC system will recover after the
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still
available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the camera in the
center of the windshield, on the forward side of the
rearview mirror.
To keep the ACC system operating properly, it is important
to note the following maintenance items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully clear the wind-
shield.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
Do not attach or install any accessories near the
sensor, including transparent material or aftermarket
grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstructions, have the radar sensor realigned at an
authorized dealer.
Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an after-
market grille or modifying the grille is not recom-
mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” warning will display and a chime will sound
when conditions temporarily limit system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as
in snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system may also
become temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as
mud, dirt, or ice on windshield, driving directly into the sun
and fog on the inside of glass. In these cases, the
instrument cluster display will show “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” and the system will
have degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
adverse weather conditions. The ACC/FCW system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas. Under rare
conditions, when the camera is not tracking any vehicles
or objects in its path this warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the windshield and the camera located on the
back side of the inside rearview mirror. They may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited functionality is no
longer present, the system will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once
on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstructions, have the windshield and forward facing
camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must
ensure that there are no pedestrians, vehicles or
objects in the path of the vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision and death or serious
personal injury.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
STARTING AND OPERATING 181
SERVICE ACC/FCW WARNING
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster displays
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW
Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
NOTE:
Aftermarket add-ons such as snowplows, lift kits, and
brush/grille bars can hinder module performance.
Ensure the radar/camera has no obstructions in the
field of view.
Height modifications can limit module performance
and functionality.
Do not put stickers or easy passes over the camera/
radar field of view.
Any modifications to the vehicle that may obstruct the
field of view of the radar/camera are not recom-
mended.
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or
unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need
to intervene. The following are examples of these types of
situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
ACC while towing a trailer is recommended only with an
Integrated Trailer Brake Controller. Aftermarket trailer
brake controllers will not activate the trailer brakes when
ACC is braking.
OFFSET DRIVING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
TURNS AND BENDS
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may increase or decrease the vehicle speed for stability,
with no vehicle ahead detected. Once the vehicle is out of
the curve, the system will resume your original set speed.
This is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
USING ACC ON HILLS
ACC performance may be limited when driving on hills.
ACC may not detect a vehicle in your lane depending on
the speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the following lane
changing example, ACC has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC may not
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There
may not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
NARROW VEHICLES
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES
ACC does not react to stationary objects or vehicles. For
example, ACC will not react in situations where the vehicle
you are following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead is
stopped in your lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a
stationary object as it did not previously detect movement
from it. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes
if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
STARTING AND OPERATING 183
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and
audible indications of the distance between the rear, and/
or front fascia/bumper, and a detected obstacle when
backing up or moving forward (e.g. during a parking
maneuver).
For limitations of this system and recommendations, see
Ú page 186.
ParkSense will retain the system state (enabled or
disabled) from the previous ignition cycle when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in
REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of
these gear selector positions, the system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A warning will
appear in the instrument cluster display when the vehicle
is in REVERSE, indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense
operating speed. The system will become active again if
the vehicle speed is decreased to less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within
the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately
12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on
the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
NOTE:
If equipped as a dually, the ParkSense system has six rear
sensors to assist in detection around the dually flares.
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/
bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and
orientation of the obstacle.
NOTE:
The dually flares are only protected when the vehicle is in
REVERSE. There is no detection for the flares when the
vehicle is moving forward.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the
instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to
indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper
and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
The warning display will turn on indicating the system
status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle
is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a
single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the
obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 STARTING AND OPERATING
Front/Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
STARTING AND OPERATING 185
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is
detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches (200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None
Single 1/2 Second
Tone
Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT
Front Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than 47 inches
(120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than 12 inches
(30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense Camera Activation
If the ParkSense system detects an obstacle, a camera
image will display in the radio. The camera will continue to
display as long as the ParkSense system continues to
detect an object. This can be turned on or off in the
Uconnect system
Ú page 226.
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert
(chime) after approximately three seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
The Front and Rear chime volume settings are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 226.
The chime volume settings include low, medium, and high.
The factory default volume is medium.
ENABLING AND DISABLING FRONT
A
ND/OR REAR PARKSENSE
Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled
with the Front ParkSense switch.
Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the
Rear ParkSense switch.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
Front or Rear system is disabled, the instrument cluster
display will show a vehicle graphic with an “Off” message
overlay over the system that is off (Front or Rear system).
This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on when
Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires service.
The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be off when
the Front or Rear system is enabled. If the Front or Rear
ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires
service, the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink
momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE FRONT/
R
EAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the Front/Rear ParkSense
System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument
cluster display will show the "Front/Rear ParkSense
Unavailable Service Required" or the "Front/Rear
ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors" message.
When the gear selector is moved into REVERSE, a vehicle
graphic will show in the instrument cluster display, along
with the display overlay “Wipe Sensors.” If the system
needs service, the display overlay will read “Service.”
Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate.
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Sensors"
appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the
outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstructions, and then cycle the ignition. If the message
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If "Front/Rear ParkSense Unavailable Service Required"
appears in the instrument cluster display, see an
authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage
the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
NOTE:
Ensure that the front and rear fascias/bumpers are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense.
When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE posi-
tion and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off, the
instrument cluster display will show "Off" on the vehicle
graphic arcs. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an
obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an obstacle is
behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
STARTING AND OPERATING 187
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 18 inches (45 cm) from
the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in
the system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a
sensor problem, causing the “Front/Rear ParkSense
Unavailable Service Required” message to appear in
the instrument cluster display.
On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position. A lowered tailgate could provide a
false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h). It
uses a forward-looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts out of the lane while no turn signal
has been applied OR the driver departs the lane on the
opposite side of the applied turn signal (if the left turn
signal is applied and the vehicle departs to the right), the
LaneSense system provides a haptic warning in the form
of torque applied to the steering wheel to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. The
LaneSense system will also provide a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic warning by
applying torque to the steering wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected and the driver
unintentionally drifts across that lane marking (no turn
signal applied), the LaneSense system provides a visual
warning through the instrument cluster display to prompt
the driver to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque) warning will not
be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the Lane-
Sense system will monitor if the driver’s hands are on the
steering wheel and provides an audible and visual warning
to the driver when the driver’s hands are not detected on
the steering wheel. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12-inch Uconnect Display
screen, the LaneSense button is located above the
display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the LaneSense
button (LED turns off). A “LaneSense On” message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
and blind spots before backing up. You are respon-
sible for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended
that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly be
disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is
not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in
injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because
the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than
the rear fascia/bumper when the vehicle sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the
ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its
size and shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the
sensors will not be detected when they are in close
proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an
obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 STARTING AND OPERATING
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the LaneSense
button again (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last system state
(on or off) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift
condition through the instrument cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane lines are
gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been
detected and the LaneSense telltale is solid white.
System ON (Gray Lines) With White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the LaneSense
Telltale is solid white when only the left lane
marking has been detected and the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display if an unintentional lane departure occurs on
the left side.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
visual warning in the instrument cluster display will
show the left lane line flashing yellow (on/off). The
LaneSense telltale changes from solid white to
flashing yellow.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With
Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
a right lane departure when only the right lane marking
has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lane Lines Detected
When the LaneSense system is on and both the lane
markings have been detected, the system is ready to
provide visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display and a torque warning in the steering wheel if an
unintentional lane departure occurs. The lane lines
turn from gray to white and the LaneSense telltale
is solid green.
Lanes Sensed (White Lines) With
Green Telltale
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
STARTING AND OPERATING 189
When the LaneSense system senses a lane drift situa-
tion, the left lane line turns solid yellow. The LaneSense
telltale changes from solid green to solid yellow. At
this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Approached (Solid Yellow Lane Line) With
Solid Yellow Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane has been
approached and is in a lane departure situation, the
left lane line flashes yellow (on/off). The LaneSense
telltale changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow.
At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in
the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: If approaching the left side of the lane the
steering wheel will turn to the right.
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Lane Line) With
Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar behavior for
a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust the intensity
of the torque warning and the warning zone sensitivity
(Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure through the
Uconnect system
Ú page 226.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above 37 mph
(60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
Use of the turn signal suppresses the warnings.
The system will not apply torque to the steering wheel
whenever a safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes,
Traction Control System, Electronic Stability Control,
Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
TURN SIGNAL ACTIVATED BLIND SPOT
A
SSIST — IF EQUIPPED
When enabled in the Uconnect system and a turn signal is
activated, the corresponding side view mirror camera will
display in the radio. The camera will continue to display as
long as the turn signal is engaged. If “Only With Trailer” is
selected (if equipped), the camera will only display when a
trailer is connected to the vehicle
Ú page 226.
WARNING!
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid to help detect objects in
the blind spot zones and may not provide alerts when
changing lanes under all driving conditions. Even if your
vehicle is equipped with the BSA system, always check
your vehicle's mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
use turn signals before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an
on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle
whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
image will be displayed on the Uconnect display along with
a caution note to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView Camera is located in the center
of the tailgate handle.
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the Rear View Camera
function.
Manual Activation Of The
Rear View Camera
1. Press the Vehicle button located on the bottom of
the Uconnect display and then select the Controls
menu.
2. Press the Back Up Camera icon to turn the Rear View
Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera
delay turned off, the rear Camera mode is exited and the
previous screen appears again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Camera
delay turned on, the rear Camera image will be displayed
for up to 10 seconds after shifting to another gear, unless
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
transmission is shifted into PARK, the ignition is placed in
the OFF position, or the touchscreen X button to disable
display of the Rear View Camera image is pressed.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated
through the Back Up Camera button in the Controls menu,
and the vehicle speed is greater than, or equal to, 8 mph
(13 km/h), a display timer for the image is initiated. The
image will continue to be displayed until the display timer
exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h),
the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continu-
ously until deactivated via the touchscreen X button,
the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen X button to disable display of the
camera image is made available ONLY when the
vehicle is not in REVERSE.
Cargo Camera Icons — If Equipped
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button is
made available to indicate the current active Camera
image being displayed whenever the Rear View Camera
image is displayed.
If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button to
switch the display to Cargo Camera image is made
available whenever the Rear View Camera image is
displayed.
A touchscreen X button to disable display of the camera
image is made available when the vehicle is not in
REVERSE gear.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on the Back
Up camera image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and
its projected back up path based on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The corresponding settings can be adjusted
within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 226.
Back Up Camera Touchscreen Button
Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button
AUX Camera Touchscreen Button
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
STARTING AND OPERATING 191
(Continued)
A dashed centerline overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera is located in the
center of the tailgate handle.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry
with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below
8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear selector
position, Zoom View is available. By pressing
the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the display
screen, the image will zoom in to four times the standard
view. Pressing the icon a second time will return the view
to the standard Back Up Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the
Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle
speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the
gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped), see
Ú page 199.
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The Surround View Camera system allows you to see an
on-screen image of the surroundings and the Top View of
your vehicle. This occurs whenever the gear selector is in
REVERSE or when enabled through the Uconnect system.
The Top View of the vehicle will also show if any doors are
open. The image will be displayed on the Uconnect display
along with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”.
After five seconds, this note will disappear. The Surround
View Camera system is comprised of four cameras located
in the front grille, rear tailgate and side mirrors.
NOTE:
Removing the tailgate will disable the Rear View
Camera function.
The Surround View Camera system has programmable
settings that may be selected through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 226.
Zones
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
CAUTION!
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 STARTING AND OPERATING
Press this button on the touchscreen to enter
the Surround View Camera menu in the
Uconnect system.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear View
and Top View is the default view of the system.
If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image will
display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE.
The camera image will not display for 10 seconds if the
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. The touchscreen X button disables the display of
the camera image.
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image will
close and display the previous screen after shifting out of
REVERSE.
If active guidelines are enabled, the lines are overlaid on
the image in the Rear View to illustrate the width of the
vehicle. The view will also include the side view mirrors
and its projected back up path based on the steering
wheel position.
There are different colored zones to indicate the distance
to the rear of the vehicle. Refer to the following chart:
Modes Of Operation
Standard Rear View can be manually activated by
selecting “Back Up Camera” through the Controls menu
within the Uconnect system.
Top View
The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with Rear
View and Front View in a split screen display. There are
integrated ParkSense arcs in the image at the front and
rear of the vehicle. The arcs will change color from yellow
to red corresponding the distance zones to the oncoming
object.
The fifth button of the ParkSense Camera View screen will
change based on vehicle options. If not equipped with a
Cargo Camera or Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Back Up
Camera button will be displayed. If equipped with a Cargo
Camera but no Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Cargo
Camera button will be displayed. If equipped with both a
Cargo Camera and Trailer Reverse Guidance, the Cargo/
Trailer Reverse Guidance button will be displayed.
ParkSense Camera View
NOTE:
Front tires will display on the image when the tires are
turned.
Due to wide angle cameras in mirrors, the image will
appear distorted.
Top View will show which doors are open.
Open front doors will cancel the outside image.
Top View Plus Rear View
This is the default view of the system in
REVERSE and is always paired with the
Top View of the vehicle with optional active
guidelines for the projected path when
enabled.
Rear Cross Path View
The Rear Cross Path will give the driver a wider
angle view of the Back Up Camera system. The
Top View will be disabled when this is selected.
Top View Plus Front View
The Front View will show what is immediately in
front of the vehicle and is always paired with
the Top View of the vehicle.
Front Cross Path View
The Front Cross Path will give the driver a wider
angle view of the front camera system. The Top
View will be disabled when this is selected.
Zone
Distance To The Rear Of
The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
STARTING AND OPERATING 193
Back Up Camera View
The Back Up Camera will provide a full screen
rear view with Zoom View.
NOTE:
If the Back Up Camera view was selected through the
Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the Rear View
screen will return to the Surround View menu. If the Back
Up Camera was manually activated through the Controls
menu of the Uconnect system, exiting out of the display
screen will return to the Controls menu.
Cargo Camera
The Cargo Camera will provide a full screen
view of the cargo area.
NOTE:
If the Cargo Camera view was selected through the
Surround View screen, exiting out of the Cargo Camera
screen will return to the Surround View screen. If the Cargo
Camera was manually activated through the Controls
menu of the Uconnect display, exiting out of the display
screen will return to the Controls menu.
Trailer Reverse Guidance
NOTE:
Trailer Reverse Guidance can only be selected through the
Surround View screen; exiting out of the Trailer Reverse
Guidance screen will return to the Surround View screen.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being displayed, and
the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any
gear, Zoom View is available. By pressing the “magnifying
glass” icon in the upper left of the display screen, the
image will zoom in to four times the standard view.
Pressing the icon a second time will return the view to the
standard Back Up Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Back Up Camera view. If the
vehicle is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the
Zoom View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle is
below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available until the
gear selector is placed in DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds
are at or above 8 mph (13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be visible.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated in the following conditions if it
was activated
automatically:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds, unless
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. There is a touchscreen X button to
disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the Surround View Camera
mode is exited and the last known screen appears
again.
The Trailer Reverse Guidance will provide
a full screen view of the cargo area and
trailer.
Pressing the Left & Right Tow Mirror Split
Screen View button within the Trailer
Reverse Guidance screen will display a
split screen to allow the driver to see
both sides of the trailer at the same time.
This view allows the driver to pan
left/right to better frame the trailer in
the image.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system is deactivated in the following conditions if it
was activated
manually from the Uconnect controls menu
via the Surround View button, Back Up Camera button,
Cargo Camera button or Forward Facing Camera button:
The touchscreen X button on the display is pressed
Vehicle is shifted into PARK
Ignition is placed in the OFF position
Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for 10 seconds
NOTE:
If the Surround View Camera, Cargo Camera, Back Up
Camera, or Forward Facing Camera is activated manually,
and the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, deactivation
methods for automatic activation are assumed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually through
the Uconnect Settings menu
Ú page 226.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see an
authorized dealer.
Cargo Camera With Dynamic Centerline — If Equipped
The Dynamic Centerline feature provides an overlay on the
Cargo Camera display screen that aligns to the center of
the pickup box to aid in hooking up a fifth-wheel camper or
gooseneck trailer. The centerline auto aligns to the center
of the pickup box, and can also be manually adjusted. The
centerline will adjust in response to steering angle inputs,
and will not obstruct the gooseneck receiver or an
approaching trailer gooseneck in the camera feed.
Activation
The Dynamic Centerline feature can be activated through
the Uconnect settings by pressing the Cargo Camera
button, followed by the Dynamic Centerline button on the
touchscreen.
If the Dynamic Centerline feature is turned on, the overlay
will display any time the Cargo Camera image is displayed.
Adjusting Centerline
To manually adjust the centerline, proceed as follows:
1. Press the Adjust Centerline button located in the
bottom right corner of the Cargo Camera display.
2. Use the arrows on the bottom left corner of the Cargo
Camera display to adjust the centerline horizontally
or vertically.
3. Once the desired position is achieved, press the
Accept button to set the centerline to the newly
specified position.
Deactivation
The Dynamic Centerline feature will automatically be
deactivated whenever the Cargo Camera display is
deactivated. It can also be manually deactivated through
the Uconnect Settings.
Cargo Camera Zoom View
When the Cargo Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below
8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear selector
position, Zoom View is available. By pressing
the “magnifying glass” icon in the upper left of the display
screen, the image will zoom in to four times the standard
view. Pressing the icon a second time will return the view
to the standard Cargo Camera display.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay view
will display the standard Cargo Camera view. If the vehicle
is then returned to REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom
View selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain the
selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as the vehicle is
below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Zoom View is available until the gear selector is placed in
DRIVE or REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, and
speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph (13 km/h),
Zoom View is unavailable and the icon will appear gray.
While in Zoom View, the dynamic centerline will not be
visible.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
Forward Facing Camera With Tire Lines — If Equipped
The Forward Facing Camera displays a front view image of
the road ahead, along with tire lines to guide the driver
when driving on narrow roads. Tire lines can be activated/
deactivated through the Uconnect Settings.
Activation
The Forward Facing Camera can be activated in the
following ways:
Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button in the
Controls screen or Apps menu
Pressing the Forward Facing Camera button located in
the upper left corner of the Back Up camera display
Once activated, the camera image will remain on as long
as the vehicle speed is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Deactivation
The Forward Facing Camera is deactivated in the following
conditions:
The vehicle exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), except when
vehicle is in 4WD Low.
The touchscreen X button on the display is pressed.
The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in 4WD Low, the Forward Facing Camera
image will be displayed until the touchscreen X button is
pressed or the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
Trailer Reverse Guidance — If Equipped
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature assists the driver in
backing up a trailer by providing adjustable camera views
of the trailer and surrounding area. The cameras are
mounted on the side mirrors and the images will be
displayed side-by-side on the touchscreen. Left and
right camera images are swapped and mirrored on the
touchscreen to show the equivalent area behind the
vehicle as though the driver is using the side mirrors.
Activation
The Trailer Reverse Guidance feature can be activated by
pressing the Trailer Reverse Guidance button on the Back
Up/Cargo Camera Display.
Deactivation
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera
delay turned on, the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF position. There is
a touchscreen X button to disable the display of the
camera image.
If Trailer Reverse Guidance is selected through manually
activated Surround View, Back Up Camera, or Cargo
Camera, the following deactivation conditions apply:
The touchscreen X button on the display is pressed
The vehicle is shifted into PARK
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
The vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for
10 seconds
Blind Spot Assist Cameras — If Equipped
There are cameras located in the exterior mirrors to assist
in blind spot detection by providing a wide camera view of
the selected side of the vehicle. The blind spot cameras
will work in the ON/RUN or ignition ON position. Press the
touchscreen X button or the More Cams button to exit the
screen. The Blind Spot Assist Cameras can also be
activated with Turn Signal engagement, see
Ú page 189
for more information.
Activation
Press the Driver Blind Spot or Passenger Blind Spot
buttons by locating the Vehicle screen, then Cameras
screen.
Driver Blind Spot
Pressing the Driver’s Blind Spot button will provide a full
screen view of the driver’s outside mirror camera.
Passenger Blind Spot
Pressing the Passenger’s Blind Spot button will provide a
full screen view of the passenger’s outside mirror camera.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Surround View Camera. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
If the vehicle is not equipped with a Pickup Box:
The bottom wedge of the Top View will be displayed in
black.
The Rear Cross Path button will be grayed out.
The guidelines will not be overlaid on Top View/Rear
View and Full Screen of Back Up Camera view.
Black video will be displayed for the right side of the
Top and Rear View, and full screen of the Back Up
Camera view when the Rear View Camera is not
connected.
To access all camera options when the vehicle is in
REVERSE, select the More Cams button on the surround
view screen.
For information on Auxiliary Cameras (if equipped), see
Ú page 199.
TRAILER CAMERAS — IF EQUIPPED
TRAILER SURROUND VIEW CAMERA
S
YSTEM
The Trailer Surround View Camera system allows you to
see an on-screen image of the surroundings and the
Top View of a trailer using four mountable cameras.
This occurs whenever the More Cams button is
selected, or when enabled through the Uconnect system.
The image will be displayed on the Uconnect display along
with a caution note “Check Entire Surroundings”.
After five seconds, this note will disappear.
NOTE:
Trailer Surround View Camera kit is only available for
vehicles equipped with the Surround View Camera
system.
The Trailer Surround View Camera system has
programmable settings that may be selected through
the Uconnect system
Ú page 226.
Set Up
The Trailer Surround View Camera system includes an
installation kit with a Trailer Surround View Module and
four Trailer Surround View Cameras that must be installed
on your trailer prior to connecting to your vehicle. See the
installation instructions included with the Trailer Surround
View installation kit for more information.
NOTE:
The trailer will be connected to the vehicle via the 12-way
connector, and the installation location varies for Conven-
tional or Gooseneck trailers.
For Conventional trailers, the connection from the rear
fascia goes to the receptacle in the bumper.
Conventional Trailer Connection
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View should only
be used as a parking aid. The Surround View Camera
is unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using Surround View to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder
when using Surround View.
1 — Rear Fascia Connector
2 — Receptacle
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
For Gooseneck trailers, the connection from the rear
fascia goes to the rear chassis inline.
Gooseneck Trailer Connection
NOTE:
When the 12-way connector goes to the rear chassis,
there is a black cap on the bumper receptacle for
protection.
In order to make the connection from the rear chassis
to the bumper, the cap must be unplugged from the
bumper and put on the rear chassis after making the
12-way connection and vice versa.
Once the Trailer Surround View Module and cameras are
installed and the trailer is connected to the vehicle via the
12-way connector, the Trailer Surround Camera settings
can be accessed. The Trailer Surround Camera settings
can be accessed through Uconnect Settings by pressing
the Trailer button in the Trailer Settings or the Camera
Settings. The system requires input of the trailer
dimensions prior to use of the system.
NOTE:
If a trailer is connected but the trailer dimensions have
not been entered in the Trailer Surround settings page,
the system will default to the settings page.
If a trailer is not connected and any button is selected,
a message will appear: “Connect Trailer Equipped With
Trailer Surround View System”.
Inputting Trailer Values
For the Trailer Surround View Camera system to function,
all fields must be entered. When a value is needed the
screen will display “Required”.
When the Trailer Type button is selected two options are
available: Conventional or Gooseneck/Fifth Wheel.
Activation
The Trailer Surround Camera can be activated through the
Uconnect system when the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL,
or DRIVE.
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, Surround View
Camera showing the Top View and Back Up Camera is the
default view of the system. Press the More Cams button
and press the Trailer tab to access the Trailer Cameras.
Press Trailer Surround Camera button to access Top View
and Rear View of the trailer.
If the camera delay is turned on, the camera image will
display for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE.
The camera image will not display for 10 seconds if the
vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is
shifted into PARK, or the ignition is placed in the OFF
position. The touchscreen X button disables the display of
the camera image.
If the camera delay is turned off, the camera image will
close and display the previous screen after shifting out of
REVERSE.
Modes Of Operation
The Trailer Surround View Camera system offers two
different camera displays:
Top View split screen with one selected mounted
camera
Full screen view of a selected mounted camera
Press the More Cams button on the Surround View screen
and select the Trailer tab to access the Trailer Cameras.
Press Trailer Surround Camera button to access the
default Top View and Rear View of the trailer.
1 — Rear Chassis Inline
2 — Rear Fascia Connector
Setting Description
Trailer Length
Input the total length of
the trailer
Trailer Width
Input the total width of
the trailer
Camera Height
Input the height of the
mounted camera
Trailer Type
Choose the trailer type
from menu
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
Top View
The Trailer Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
Top View and Rear View in a split screen display.
Trailer Top and Rear Camera View
NOTE:
Due to wide angle cameras, the image will appear
distorted.
Rear View
Pressing the Rear View button will show the
Top View and Rear View in a split screen
display.
Front View
Pressing the Front View button will show you
what is immediately in front of the trailer and is
paired with the Top View of the trailer.
Left View
Pressing the Left View button will give the driver
a wider angle view of the left side trailer
camera and is paired with the Top View of the
trailer.
Right View
Pressing the Right View button will give the
driver a wider angle view of the right side trailer
camera and is paired with the Top View of the
trailer.
Full Screen Camera View
To display a full screen image of the Trailer Surround View
mounted cameras, select one of the following options
from the Trailer Cameras screen: Trailer Left, Trailer Right,
Trailer Front or Trailer Rear. Exiting out of the full screen
view will return the system to the previous screen.
NOTE:
If the Trailer Surround Camera was selected through the
More Cameras menu, an option to return to the More
Cameras menu will display. If the Trailer Surround Camera
was manually activated through the Controls menu of the
Uconnect system, exiting out of the display screen will
return to the Controls menu.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated in the following conditions if it
was activated
automatically:
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds, unless
the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the
vehicle is shifted into PARK or the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. There is a touchscreen X button to
disable the display of the camera image.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the Trailer Surround View
Camera mode is exited and the last known screen
appears again.
The system is deactivated in the following conditions if it
was activated
manually from the Uconnect controls menu
via the Trailer Surround Camera button:
The touchscreen X button on the display is pressed
Vehicle is shifted into PARK
Ignition is placed in the OFF position
Vehicle speed is over 8 mph (13 km/h) for 10 seconds
NOTE:
If the Trailer Surround Camera is activated manually, and
the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, deactivation methods
for automatic activation are assumed.
The camera delay system is turned off manually through
the Uconnect system
Ú page 226.
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on
the camera lenses, clean the lenses, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
If a malfunction with the system has occurred, see an
authorized dealer.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
AUX CAMERA
Your vehicle may be equipped with one or two AUX
Cameras, which display rear view and side view images
from the trailer on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
Two Aux Cameras are only available on vehicles with NAV
equipped radios if the vehicle is not equipped with a
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) and Surround
View Camera system.
Activation
The AUX Camera is activated by first pressing the Back Up
Camera or Cargo Camera (if equipped) button on the
touchscreen, followed by the AUX button located in the
upper left corner of the rearview display. On vehicles with
Surround View Camera (if equipped), the AUX Camera can
be activated when the vehicle is in REVERSE by first
pressing the More Cams button in the Surround view
screen, followed by the AUX tab. The AUX camera can also
be activated when the vehicle is in REVERSE by pressing
the AUX button.
If equipped with two AUX Cameras, you can switch
between each camera by pressing the AUX 1 or AUX 2
buttons on the Trailer Camera display.
Deactivation
The AUX Camera is deactivated by pressing the
touchscreen X button in the upper right corner of the
touchscreen. This will return the display back to the
previously displayed screen.
NOTE:
If the AUX button is pressed and no AUX Camera is
connected, the touchscreen will display a blue screen
along with the message “Camera System Unavailable.”
The screen can be exited out by pressing the touch-
screen X button in the upper right hand corner. This will
return the display back to the previously displayed
screen.
Zoom View is not available with the AUX Camera
feature.
The display will always default to the Trailer Camera
display AUX 1.
ENGINE RUNAWAY — DIESEL ENGINE
Diesel engine runaway is a rare condition affecting diesel
engines, where the engine consumes its own lubrication
oil and runs at higher and higher RPM until it overspeeds
to a point where it destroys itself due to either mechanical
failure or engine seizure through lack of lubrication.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Trailer Surround View Camera. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for
the safety of your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, Trailer Surround View
should only be used as a parking aid. The Trailer
Surround View Camera is unable to view every
obstacle or object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using Trailer Surround View to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using Trailer Surround View.
AUX 1 Camera Button
AUX 2 Camera Button
WARNING!
In case of engine runaway due to flammable fumes
from fuel spills or turbocharger oil leaks being sucked
into the engine, do the following to help avoid personal
injury and/or vehicle damage:
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
Using a CO2 or dry chemical type fire extinguisher,
direct the spray from the fire extinguisher into the
grille on the driver side so that the spray enters the
engine air intake.
The inlet for the engine air intake is located behind the
driver’s side headlamp and receives air through the
grille.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — GASOLINE
ENGINE
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the fuel filler
door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open the fuel door and
remove the fuel filler cap by turning it counter-clockwise.
Fuel Filler Cap
1. Fully insert the gasoline nozzle into the filler pipe.
2. Fill the vehicle with fuel.
3. Remove gasoline nozzle, reinstall fuel cap and close
fuel filler door.
NOTE:
When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap tether in
the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened prop-
erly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if
the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure that the
gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP MESSAGE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
loose gASCAP indicator will display in the instrument
cluster telltale display area
Ú page 104. Tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and push the RIGHT button to turn off
the message. If the problem continues, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place gas containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler tube cap.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off”
the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
Always place container on the ground before filling.
Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container
when you are filling it.
Use only approved containers for flammable liquid.
Do not leave container unattended while filling.
A static electric charge could cause a spark and
fire hazard.
CAUTION!
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
REFUELING THE VEHICLE — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Open the fuel filler door.
Fill Locations
NOTE:
There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the filler
pipe seals the system.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while
refueling.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
4. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE:
In the event that you run the vehicle out of fuel, once
refueled, place the ignition in the ON position for 30
seconds, then turn the ignition OFF and wait 30 seconds.
Repeat this procedure three times, prior to cranking the
engine.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID
Your vehicle is equipped with a Selective Catalytic
Reduction (SCR) system to meet the very stringent diesel
emissions standards required by the Environmental
Protection Agency.
The purpose of the SCR system is to reduce levels of NOx
(oxides of nitrogen emitted from engines) that are harmful
to our health and the environment to a near-zero level.
A small quantity of Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is injected
into the exhaust upstream of a catalyst where, when
vaporized, it converts smog-forming nitrogen oxides (NOx)
into harmless nitrogen (N2) and water vapor (H2O), two
natural components of the air we breathe. You can
operate with the comfort that your vehicle is contributing
to a cleaner, healthier world environment for this and
generations to come.
System Overview
This vehicle is equipped with a Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
injection system and a Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)
catalyst to meet the emission requirements.
The DEF injection system consists of the following
components:
DEF tank
DEF pump
DEF injector
Electronically-heated DEF lines
DEF control module
NOx sensors
Temperature sensors
SCR catalyst
UQS Sensor
For system messages and warnings
Ú page 104.
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in
violation of most state and federal fire regulations
and may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the
fuel tank after filling.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with a DEF injection system.
You may occasionally hear an audible clicking noise.
This is normal operation.
The DEF pump will run for a period of time after engine
shutdown to purge the DEF system. This is normal
operation.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) is considered a very stable
product with a long shelf life. If DEF is kept in
temperatures between 10°F and 90°F (-12°C and 32°C),
it will last a minimum of one year.
DEF is subject to freezing at the lowest temperatures.
For example, DEF may freeze at temperatures at or
below 12°F (-11°C). The system has been designed to
operate in this environment.
NOTE:
When working with DEF, it is important to know that:
Any containers or parts that come into contact with
DEF must be DEF compatible (plastic or stainless
steel). Copper, brass, aluminum, iron or non-stainless
steel should be avoided as they are subject to corro-
sion by DEF.
If DEF is spilled, it should be wiped up completely.
Adding Diesel Exhaust Fluid
The DEF gauge (located on the instrument cluster) will
display the level of DEF remaining in the tank
Ú page 104.
NOTE:
Driving conditions (altitude, vehicle speed, load, etc.)
will affect the amount of DEF that is used in your
vehicle.
Another factor is that outside temperature can affect
DEF consumption. In cold conditions, 12°F (-11°C)
and below, the DEF gauge needle can stay on a fixed
position and may not move for extended periods of
time. This is a normal function of the system.
There is an electric heater inside the DEF tank that
automatically works when necessary. If the DEF supply
does freeze, the truck will operate normally until it
thaws.
DEF FILL PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For the correct fluid type Ú page 446.
Remove cap from DEF tank (located on drivers side of the
vehicle or in fuel door).
Fill Locations
NOTE:
The DEF gauge may take up to five seconds to update
after adding a gallon or more of DEF to the DEF tank. If
you have a fault related to the DEF system, the gauge
may not update to the new level. See an authorized
dealer for service.
The DEF gauge may also not immediately update after
a refill if the temperature of the DEF fluid is below 12°F
(-11°C). The DEF tank heater will possibly warm up the
DEF fluid and allow the gauge to update after a period
of run time. Under very cold conditions, it is possible
that the gauge may not reflect the new fill level for
several drives.
1 — Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Fill Location
2 — Diesel Fuel Fill Location
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
(Continued)
At 40°F (4°C) you could see some increase in the DEF
gauge due to the tank thawing. The gauge and level
sensor are working properly and are just updating with
proper thawed DEF.
Excessive overfilling of the DEF tank can result in a MIL
lamp/fault code and inaccurate level readings.
Refilling With Nozzles
You can fill up at any DEF distributor.
Proceed as follows:
Insert the DEF nozzle in the filler tube, start refilling and
stop refilling at the first shut-off (the shut-off indicates
that the DEF tank is full). DO NOT proceed with the
refilling, to prevent spillage of DEF.
Extract the nozzle.
Refilling With Containers
Proceed as follows:
Check the expiration date.
Read the advice for use on the label before pouring the
content of the bottle into the DEF tank.
After the indication appears on the instrument cluster
display
Ú page 104 fill the DEF tank with no more than
4 gallons (15 liters).
Stop filling the DEF tank immediately if DEF splashes or
wells back in the filler neck.
Reinstall cap onto DEF filler tube.
Filling The Def Tank In Cold Climates
Since DEF will begin to freeze at 12°F (-11°C), your
vehicle is equipped with an automatic DEF heating
system. This allows the DEF injection system to operate
properly at temperatures below 12°F (-11°C). If your
vehicle is not in operation for an extended period of time
with temperatures below 12°F (-11°C), the DEF in the
tank may freeze. If the tank is overfilled and freezes, it
could be damaged. Therefore, do not overfill the DEF tank.
Extra care should be taken when filling with portable
containers to avoid overfilling. Note the level of the DEF
gauge in your instrument cluster. You may safely add a
maximum of 2 gallons (7.5 liters) of DEF from portable
containers when your DEF gauge is reading ½ full.
VEHICLE LOADING
GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT RATING
(GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
PAYLOAD
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver,
all passengers, options and cargo.
CAUTION!
To avoid DEF spillage, and possible damage to the
DEF tank from overfilling, do not “top off” the DEF
tank after filling.
DO NOT OVERFILL. DEF will freeze below 12ºF
(-11ºC). The DEF system is designed to work in
temperatures below the DEF freezing point, however,
if the tank is overfilled and freezes, the system could
be damaged.
When DEF is spilled, clean the area immediately with
water and use an absorbent material to soak up the
spills on the ground.
Do not attempt to start your engine if DEF is acciden-
tally added to the diesel fuel tank as it can result in
severe damage to your engine, including but not
limited to failure of the fuel pump and injectors.
Never add anything other than DEF to the tank –
especially any form of hydrocarbon such as diesel
fuel, fuel system additives, gasoline, or any other
petroleum-based product. Even a very small amount
of these, less than 100 parts per million or less than
1 oz. per 78 gallons (295 liters) will contaminate the
entire DEF system and will require replacement.
If owners use a container, funnel or nozzle when
refilling the tank, it should either be new or one that
has only been used for adding DEF. Mopar® provides
an attachable nozzle with its DEF for this purpose.
CAUTION!
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability do not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
TIRE SIZE
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
RIM SIZE
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
INFLATION PRESSURE
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
CURB WEIGHT
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of
the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale
before any occupants or cargo are added.
LOADING
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear
of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by
weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial
scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then
be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axles.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either
the front or rear axle has been exceeded but the total load
is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information on
limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your
vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this
information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing-related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR
Ú page 203.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or
temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and
ready for operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the
trailer must be supported by the scale.
WARNING!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR,
maximum Payload or the maximum front and rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it
can change the way your vehicle handles. This could
cause you to lose control. Overloading can shorten the
life of your vehicle.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and
trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR
Ú page 203.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by
the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on
your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a swaying
trailer and automatically applies individual wheel brakes
and/or reduces engine power to attempt to eliminate the
trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight,
just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some
other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds of
hitches are commonly used to tow small and medium
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage
through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for
heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow
vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions, it provides
for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and
brake control, thereby enhancing towing safety. The
addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes
positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and a weight-distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) or
more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you
use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose
control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability and braking
performance and could result in a collision.
Weight-distributing systems may not be compatible
with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch
and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational
Vehicle dealer for additional information.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
ADJUSTMENT
Towing With 2500/3500 Air Suspension
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the
trailer (do not connect the trailer).
NOTE:
Standard Ride Height (SRH) or Alternate Trailer Height
(ATH) can be used. The vehicle must remain in the engine
running position while attaching a trailer for proper
leveling of the air suspension system. It may not be
possible to enter Alternate Trailer Height (ATH) while lightly
loaded.
2. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground, this is height H1.
Measuring Height (H)
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height from the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to the ground, this is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturers’ recommen-
dations so that the height of the front fender is
approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2 the
difference between H2 and H1 above Standard Ride
Height [H1]).
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and weight
distributing hitch to confirm manufacturer’s
recommendations have been met.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with
TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
Towing With All Other 2500/3500 (Non-Air Suspension)
1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the
trailer (do not connect the trailer).
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to ground, this is height H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight
distribution bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel
opening on the fender to ground, this is height H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
distributing bars per the manufacturer’s recommen-
dations so that the height of the front fender is
approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2 the
difference between H2 and H1 above Standard Ride
Height [H1]).
6. Perform a visual inspection of the trailer and
weight-distributing hitch to confirm manufacturer’s
recommendations have been met.
NOTE:
For all towing conditions, we recommend towing with
TOW/HAUL mode engaged.
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a
coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle
in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel
trailer with a coupling king pin.
Your truck may be equipped with a fifth-wheel hitch option.
Refer to the separately provided fifth-wheel hitch safety,
care, assembly, and operating instructions.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Measurement Example
Example 2500/3500
Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
Measurement Example
Example 2500/3500
Height (mm)
H1 1030
H2 1058
H2-H1 28
(H2-H1)/2 14
(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER HITCH TYPE AND MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your
intended towing condition.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM
T
RAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
NOTE:
For trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight
ratings) refer to the following website addresses:
ramtrucks.com/towing/towing-guide
ramtruck.ca (Canada)
rambodybuilder.com
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put
in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. For
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle
Ú page 420.
Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight
Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max. Tongue Weight
Class V - 2500 Models 20,000 lb (9,071 kg) / 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class V - 3500 Models 23,000 lb (10,432 kg) / 2,300 lb (1,043 kg)
Fifth-Wheel - 2500 Models 25,000 lb (11,339 kg) / 3,750 lb (1,700 kg)
Fifth-Wheel - 3500 Models 30,000 lb (13,607 kg) / 4,500 lb (2,041 kg)
Gooseneck - 2500 Models 20,000 lb (9,071 kg) / 3,000 lb (1,360 kg)
Gooseneck - 3500 Models 37,100 lb (16,828 kg) / 5,565 lb (2,524 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
TRAILER REVERSE STEERING
CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Feature Overview
Trailer Reverse Steering Control (TRSC) is a feature that
will assist the driver when backing up a trailer. Use the
TRSC knob, located on the center stack, to more
accurately control the direction of the trailer.
The driver controls the accelerator and brake while using
the TRSC knob to steer. The trailer is steered according to
the direction the knob is turned.
This feature will also allow the driver to back up a vehicle
and trailer in a straight line when the knob is in the center
position.
Minimal setup is required to use this feature.
Set Up:
To use the system, attach your trailer to the truck and
ensure all electrical wiring is connected
Ú page 215.
Make sure that the cable is secured out of the camera
view and does not interfere with any part of the rear-view
image as it may impact system performance.
During normal forward driving, the system will
automatically calibrate the attached trailer provided that
the driving incorporates calibration maneuvers such as
going straight and 90-degree turns. If the vehicle has not
had enough time to automatically calibrate after
connecting a trailer, you will see a “Calibrate Trailer”
message in the instrument cluster when pressing the
TRSC button to activate the system. The TRSC button is
located above the TRSC knob. If this is the case, perform
the following maneuver to calibrate the trailer:
Drive forward at least 100 ft (30 m), perform a 90 degree
turn and return to a straight position for at least another
100 ft (30 m). Perform another 90 degree turn, followed
by another straight drive of at least 100 ft (30 m). Check
that the system has calibrated by pushing the TRSC
button.
NOTE:
The 90 degree turns could be in either the left or right
direction.
Trailer Reverse Steering Control Calibration
Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot Assist will be
unavailable during the calibration procedure.
Instead of the Blind Spot camera view, an
image showing the unavailable feature will
display on the radio screen when the turn signal is used.
NOTE:
Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot Assist will function
normally during automatic calibration.
0 — When the vehicle is not in Reverse, press the TRSC
button while at a standstill. A “Calibrate Trailer” message
will display.
1 — Drive straight 100 ft (30 m). A “Calibrating Trailer”
message will display when vehicle is in motion.
2 — Perform intersection turn with radius 50-65 ft
(15-20 m) in either direction.
3 — Drive straight 100 ft (30 m).
4 — Perform intersection turn with radius 50-65 ft
(15-20 m) in either direction.
5 — Drive straight 100 ft (30 m).
6 — Drive straight 100 ft (30 m), making sure to align
vehicle/trailer to path center line.
7 — Once calibration is complete, feature will be available
for use. For calibration runs under 30mph (48 km/h) a
“To Enable Trailer Steering Shift to P” message will
appear to indicate calibration completion.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
Using TRSC
Trailer Reverse Steering Control Knob
To use the system, place the gear selector in PARK. Push
the TRSC button located above the TRSC knob in the
center stack. The LED on the button will glow solid and the
instrument cluster display will direct you to shift to
REVERSE. Once in REVERSE the system is active. Remove
hands from the steering wheel and slowly back up while
turning the TRSC knob in the direction you want the trailer
to go. A trajectory line will show the intended path of the
trailer on the radio display. Turning the knob clockwise will
cause the trailer to turn right. Turning the knob
counterclockwise will cause the trailer to turn left. If you
release the knob, it will return to its center position, and
the trailer will back up in a straight line.
Continue to control the accelerator and brake while
backing the trailer up. The following graphics will display
on the radio screen to warn the user if the trailer is
approaching a jackknife angle. Left or right zones in the
graphic will change color based on which side the event
occurs.
An orange arch will display when approaching a
jackknife angle.
A red arch will display when reaching the
jackknife angle.
NOTE:
While active, TRSC will automatically disable the Rear Park
Assist system if it was previously enabled.
The TRSC system will limit the top speed your vehicle can
travel in REVERSE while using the feature. If needed, you
can shift to DRIVE or NEUTRAL to pull forward to get more
room or straighten out the trailer, and shift back to
REVERSE without the need to reactivate the feature.
The feature will cancel after 30 seconds in DRIVE or when
the vehicle speed reaches 8 mph (12 km/h).
To cancel out of the feature, come to a stop and shift to
PARK, or push the TRSC activation button.
Instrument Cluster Messages:
“Calibrate Trailer” will display when a trailer is not cali-
brated and the vehicle is at a standstill while the button
is pushed.
“Calibrating Trailer” will display when the trailer is not
calibrated and the vehicle is moving while the button is
pushed.
“To Enable Trailer Steering Shift To P” will display when
the trailer is calibrated successfully, the TRSC activa-
tion button is pushed, vehicle speed is less than
30 mph (48 km/h) and the vehicle is not in PARK. This
message will also display if calibration maneuver is
performed successfully under 30 mph (48 km/h).
“Press Trailer Steering To Begin” will display if vehicle
is shifted to PARK from any other gear within 5 seconds
of the “To Enable Trailer Steering Shift To P” message
appearing.
“Trailer Steering Ready Shift To R And Use Knob To
Steer Trailer” will display when trailer is calibrated,
vehicle is in PARK and the TRSC activation button is
pushed. The message may also appear when feature is
active and vehicle is shifted to DRIVE/NEUTRAL from
REVERSE.
“Trailer Steering Active Check Surrounding Backup
Slowly” will display after the driver shifts to REVERSE
and indicates the feature is active.
“Calibration Failed See User Manual” will display when
calibration has failed during an active calibration
attempt.
“Trailer Steering Unavailable” will display if there is a
fault in the system preventing activation or the driver’s
door is open with the driver’s seat belt unbuckled.
CAUTION!
Always observe the position of the trailer and
surroundings using the camera and mirrors to avoid
damage to the truck or trailer.
CAUTION!
Continuing after the red warning may lead to damage to
the vehicle and/or trailer.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
“Trailer Steering Unavailable Trailer Angle Too Steep”
will display when trailer is calibrated, the TRSC button
is pressed and the trailer is at a jackknife angle.
“Trailer Steering Canceled Hands On Wheel Detected”
will display when driver overrides steering wheel input.
“Trailer Steering Canceled Trailer Not Found” will
display when sufficient trailer data cannot be esti-
mated using camera for TRSC to continue functioning.
“Trailer Steering Canceled Vehicle Speed Too High” will
display when vehicle speed goes over 8 mph (12 km/h)
while the feature is active in REVERSE. System will limit
the speed in REVERSE and prevent feature cancellation
due to this event.
“Trailer Steering Canceled” will display when the
maneuver is canceled due to any of the following reasons:
Trailer tracking is lost.
TRSC button is pushed while active.
Vehicle speed goes over 8 mph (12 km/h) in DRIVE.
Driver door is open and seat belt is unbuckled.
Transmission is shifted to PARK.
Trailer Memory
The trailer steering system will automatically retain the
calibration of the previous five trailers connected, so
recalibration will not be necessary when hooking up a
previously calibrated trailer.
To store a trailer to memory, calibrate the trailer and then
allow the vehicle to be off for a minimum of 2 minutes.
The next time the vehicle is started the trailer system will
attempt to identify the attached trailer. If successful, the
TRSC system can then be activated.
NOTE:
If the trailer is not identified, drive forward to align the
trailer to the vehicle in a straight line, 0 degree trailer
angle, and shift to PARK. Ensure that there is no
camera feed displayed on the radio screen and wait for
up to 10 seconds for the system to attempt to identify
the trailer. Press TRSC button to activate the feature.
Trailers may look different during day and night condi-
tions. In such cases, the trailer may need to recalibrate.
Some trailers (such as boat trailers) will need to recali-
brate while loaded and unloaded.
The system may not detect a trailer in low light condi-
tions. In sunny conditions, the performance may be
degraded as shadows pass over the trailer.
The driver is always responsible for safe operation of
truck and trailer.
The driver is always in control of the truck as well as the
trailer and is responsible for controlling the accelerator
and brakes.
The system may not function when the camera lens is
blocked, blurred (covered with water, snow, ice, dirt,
etc) and will not work unless the tailgate is upright and
fully latched.
Trailer Sticker
As there are many variations of trailers on the market you
may encounter one that is particularly difficult to use with
the TRSC. High-contrast stickers have been provided to be
placed on the trailer for when this scenario is
encountered. By applying these stickers to your trailer, it
aids the vision system with learning the trailer by providing
high contrast features to track in the rear camera image.
The following are guidelines for attaching the stickers to
your trailer:
Gooseneck Trailer
Gooseneck Trailer
1 — 1st Option Decal Placement
2 — 2nd Option Decal Placement
1 —Decal Placement
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Enclosed Gooseneck Trailer
1.
TRAILER SURFACE:
Surface temperature should be
between 70°F and 90°F during decal application to
ensure proper adhesive bond.
2. ALCOHOL WIPE: Wipe the body surface with a clean,
lint-free cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol to
remove contaminants.
3.
LINER REMOVAL: Use tab on decal to remove the liner
exposing the adhesive.
4.
LOCATING THE DECALS: Use photos to determine the
style of trailer. Place one decal on both sides of the
trailer as shown. To get ideal functionality, place
decals at the same height of the camera and at each
vertical edge of the trailer without going over.
5.
PRESSURIZING THE DECAL: Use firm hand pressure
over entire decal starting at the center and fanning
out to the edges trying not to trap air.
6.
POST APPLICATION: Do not power wash decal area for
72 hours.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain
components, the following guidelines are recommended.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Scheduled
Servicing” Ú page 369. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
1 — Decal Placement
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the
engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo
that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can
occur that may be difficult for the driver to control.
You could lose control of your vehicle and have a
collision.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not over-
load your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspen-
sion, chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains
under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for
turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the
tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always, block or
"chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
WARNING!
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing
while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle
Ú page 416.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures
before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer
Ú page 416.
For the proper tire replacement procedures
Ú page 416. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do
not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically actu-
ated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a
hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess
of 2,000 lb (907 kg).
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an ITBM for Electric and Electric
Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes.
NOTE:
This module has been designed and verified with electric
trailer brakes and new electric over hydraulic systems.
Some previous EOH systems may not be compatible
with ITBM.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)
The user interface consists of the following:
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to activate
power to the trailer's electric brakes independent of the
tow vehicle's brakes. If the manual brake control lever is
activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the
two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s stop lamps will come on when
braking normally with the vehicle brake pedal. Only the
trailer stop lamps will come on when the manual brake
control lever is applied.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you. Failure to do so could result in an acci-
dent.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should
be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal
effort, and longer stopping distances.
1 — GAIN Adjustment Button
2 — GAIN Adjustment Button
3 — Manual Brake Control Lever
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding
the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN
setting for 10 seconds and the Trailer Brake Disconnected
Warning Light will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the ITBM, the
Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control power
output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The GAIN
setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or
decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for
the specific towing condition and should be changed as
towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions
include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and
weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE:
This should only be performed in a traffic free environment
at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h).
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally and properly
adjusted. See your trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical
connections according to the trailer manufacturer's
instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged in,
the trailer connected message should appear in the
instrument cluster display (if the connection is not
recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be
available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and the
correct type of trailer must be selected from the
instrument cluster display options.
4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel
until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.
5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter
“TRAILER TOW”.
6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until the Trailer Brake
Type appears on the screen.
7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or DOWN
buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears
on the screen.
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h)
and squeeze the manual brake control lever
completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels
turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer,
trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the
maximum GAIN setting of 10.
* The suggested selection depends and may change depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road state may also
affect the selection.
Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH
Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes
Electric Over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Electric Over Hydraulic
Trailer Brakes
Load *Under 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Above 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Under 10,000 lb (4,536 kg) *Above 10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument
cluster display. Display messages, along with a single
chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is determined
in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or on the
trailer
Ú page 104.
NOTE:
An aftermarket controller may be available for use with
trailers with air or EOH trailer brake systems. To deter-
mine the type of brakes on your trailer and the avail-
ability of controllers, check with your trailer
manufacturer or dealer.
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause
damage to the electrical system and electronic
modules of the vehicle. See an authorized dealer if an
aftermarket module is to be installed.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and
connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect the trailer wiring connector from the vehicle
(or any other device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connectors) before launching a boat into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water area.
Four-Pin Connector
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
trailer braking. There may be an increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of
trailer braking. There may be an increase in stopping
distance or trailer instability which could result in
damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
Seven-Pin Connector
Trailer Light Check
This feature will run the trailer lights through a sequence
to check the trailer light function. It is available in the
instrument cluster under the Trailer Tow menu
Ú page 109.
When activated the feature will enable all of the exterior
lights sequentially for up to five minutes for time to walk
around and verify functionality. The following exterior
lights will remain on for the entirety of the sequence:
Park/Running Lamps
Side Marker Lamps (if equipped)
License Lamp
Signature Lamp (if equipped)
Low Beams
Fog Lamps (if equipped)
Daytime Running Lamps
During this time the following lights will sequence, each
activating for three seconds:
1. Brake and CHMSL (third brake light)
2. Left turn signal
3. Right turn signal
4. Reverse Lamps
5. High Beam
This light check sequence will continue for a total of
five minutes.
The sequence will only activate if the following conditions
are met:
Vehicle is equipped with the Trailer Tow Package
Vehicle is in PARK
Vehicle is not in motion
Ignition in ACC or RUN
Remote start is inactive
Brakes are not applied
Left turn signal is not applied
Right turn signal not applied
Hazard switch is not applied
The sequence will cancel if any of the following conditions
occur:
Brakes are applied
Vehicle is shifted from PARK
Vehicle is no longer stationary
Left turn signal activated from stalk
Right turn signal is activated from stalk
Hazard switch is activated
Any button on the key fob is pushed
Ignition button is pushed
High Beam stalk position is changed
Sequence is canceled in the instrument cluster
1 — Backup Lamps
2 — Running Lamps
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Ground
5 — Battery
6 — Right Stop/Turn
7 — Electric Brakes
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
TOWING TIPS
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid
frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent
shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL
mode or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic
Range Select [ERS] shift control).
NOTE:
Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower gear range
(using the ERS shift control) while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve performance
and extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide
better engine braking.
Tow/Haul Mode
To reduce potential for automatic transmission
overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when driving in
hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the
Electronic Range Select [ERS] shift control) on more
severe grades.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Air Suspension System
To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the vehicle,
the air suspension system can be used Ú page 155.
NOTE:
The vehicle must remain in the engine running position
while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of the air
suspension system.
SNOWPLOW
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
installed option. These packages include components
necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
NOTE:
Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recom-
mended that the owner/installer obtain and follow the
recommendations contained within the current Body
Builder’s Guide. See an authorized dealer, installer or
snowplow manufacturer for this information.
There are unique electrical systems that must be
connected to properly ensure operator safety and prevent
overloading vehicle systems.
BEFORE PLOWING
Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper
fluid level.
Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper
tightness.
Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
The cutting edge should be ¼ to ½ inches (6 cm to
1.2 cm) above ground in snow plowing position.
Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func-
tioning properly.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described
earlier in this manual.
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exterior
lamps are not properly installed.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
SNOWPLOW PREP PACKAGE MODEL
A
VAILABILITY
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body Builder’s
Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck
should not exceed two.
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR
should never be exceeded.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
options or passengers, etc.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers,
options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). These weights are specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label on the driver's side door
opening.
NOTE:
Detach the snowplow when transporting passengers.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to
specifications at the factory without consideration for the
weight of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked
and reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the
snowplow season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow
equipment following the recommendations provided by
the specific snowplow manufacturer.
OVER THE ROAD OPERATION WITH
S
NOWPLOW ATTACHED
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or surface
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h).
The operator should always maintain a safe stopping
distance and allow adequate passing clearance.
OPERATING TIPS
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
should be maximum operating speed. The operator should
be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned.
Reduce speed and use extreme caution when plowing
unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
plow manufacturer's instructions.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery
terminals clean and free of corrosion.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drivetrain
damage, the following precautions should be observed.
Operate with transfer case in 4WD LOW when plowing
small or congested areas where speeds are not likely to
exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in
4WD HIGH.
Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use
4WD LOW when plowing deep or heavy snow for
extended periods of time to avoid transmission over-
heating.
Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
practice of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting
the transmission.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed in Transport mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck
Ú page 155. If the vehicle cannot be
placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to
be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK
Transfer case in N (Neutral)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
RECREATIONAL TOWING — TWO-WHEEL
D
RIVE MODELS
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will
result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed
ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the
vehicle is set to Standard Ride Height.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic
transmission in PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer's instructions.
5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key fob.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for
towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight
position.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
OUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
NOTE:
Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer cases
must be shifted into N (Neutral) for recreational towing.
Automatic transmissions must be shifted into PARK for
recreational towing. Refer to the following for the proper
transfer case N (Neutral) shifting procedure for your
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may
leak from the transmission, causing damage to
internal parts.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only
one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will
cause severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the
ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to
the transfer case.
CAUTION!
Before recreational towing, the transfer case must
be in N (Neutral). To be certain the transfer case is
fully in N (Neutral), perform the procedure outlined
under “Shifting Into N (Neutral)”. Internal transmis-
sion damage will result, if the transfer case is not in
N (Neutral) during towing.
The transmission must be placed in PARK for recre-
ational towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the previously listed
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid
will leak from the transfer case, causing damage to
internal parts.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on
your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged.
CAUTION!
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
Shifting Into N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level ground,
with the engine running. Firmly apply the parking
brake.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure the
vehicle is set to Standard Ride Height.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transfer case into N (Neutral):
With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer
case lever into N (Neutral).
With electronic shift transfer case, push and hold
the transfer case N (Neutral) button. Some models
have a small, recessed “N” button (at the center of
the transfer case switches) that must be pushed
using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Other
models have a rectangular N (Neutral) switch,
below the rotary transfer case control knob. The
N (Neutral) indicator light will blink while the shift
is in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on
solid) when the shift to N (Neutral) is complete.
After the shift is completed and the N (Neutral)
light stays on, release the N (Neutral) button.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
7. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 with automatic transmission in
DRIVE.
9. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply the
parking brake. Turn off the engine. For vehicles with
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, push and hold the ENGINE
START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.
10. Shift the transmission into PARK. On 8-speed
transmissions the shifter will automatically select
PARK when the engine is turned off.
11. Turn the ignition to the OFF mode, then cycle the
ignition to the RUN mode and back to the OFF mode.
Remove the key fob from the ignition.
12. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
13. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
With electronic shift transfer case:
Steps 2 through 3 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the N (Neutral) button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before
pushing the N (Neutral) button or are no longer met
during the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light will flash
continuously until all requirements are met or until the
N (Neutral) button is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the
engine should be started and left running for a
minimum of 60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at
least once every 24 hours. This process allows the air
suspension to adjust the vehicle’s ride height to
compensate for temperature effects.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you leave
the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
N (Neutral) position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case N (Neutral) position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
automatic transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is not in the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in N (Neutral) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Out Of N (Neutral)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it
connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer
case lever to the desired position.
With electronic shift transfer case with rotary
selector switch, push and hold the transfer case N
(Neutral) button until the N (Neutral) indicator light
turns off. After the N (Neutral) indicator light turns
off, release the N (Neutral) button. After the N
(Neutral) button has been released, the transfer
case will shift to the position indicated by the
selector switch.
With electronic shift transfer case with push
button selector switch, push and hold the switch
for the desired transfer case position, until the N
(Neutral) indicator light turns off and the desired
position indicator light turns on.
NOTE:
When shifting out of transfer case N (Neutral), turning the
engine off is not required, but may be helpful to avoid gear
clash. With the 8-speed automatic transmission, the
engine must remain running, since turning the engine off
will shift the transmission to PARK (and the transmission
must be in NEUTRAL for the transfer case to shift out of
NEUTRAL).
5. Turn the engine off. Shift automatic transmission into
PARK. On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will
automatically select PARK when the engine is turned
off.
6. Release the brake pedal.
7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
8. Start the engine.
9. Press and hold the brake pedal.
10. Release the parking brake.
11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
NOTE:
With electronic shift transfer case:
Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met
before pushing the button to shift out of N (Neutral),
and must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not met
before pushing the button or are no longer met during
the shift, the N (Neutral) indicator light will flash contin-
uously until all requirements are met or until the button
is released.
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to
take place and for the position indicator lights to be
operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the
shift will not take place and no position indicator lights
will be on or flashing.
A flashing N (Neutral) position indicator light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
DRIVING TIPS
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery
surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to
the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a
difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving)
wheels.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow
standing water, consider the following Cautions and
Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow,
wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water
can wear away the road or path's surface and cause
your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore,
flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away
swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
WARNING!
Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing
water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake
pedal several times to dry the brakes.
Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
4
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep hills
or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural
obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,
choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diagonally
across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain, shift
to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator slowly
to avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is always
a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any
problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly
on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and
suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to
the values specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
CAUTION!
Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
Determine the condition of the road or the path that
is under water and if there are any obstacles in the
way before driving through the standing water.
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmis-
sion, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid
that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving
through standing water. Do not continue to operate
the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this
may result in further damage. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause
it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal
damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might not
have full braking power when you need it to prevent a
collision. If you have been operating your vehicle in dirty
conditions, get your brakes checked and cleaned as
necessary.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
225
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect 5/5 NAV
With 8.4-inch Display system or your Uconnect 5 NAV With
12-inch Display system, refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only
and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Depending on applicability, your vehicle may be able to
send or receive information from a wired or wireless
network. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time
and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and
takes appropriate steps as needed. As always, if you
experience unusual behavior, contact an authorized
dealer immediately,
Ú page 449, or refer to your
Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual for additional contact
information.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
installed.
NOTE:
To help further improve user experience, features,
stability, etc., and minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn
about available Uconnect software updates.
WARNING!
ONLY insert trusted media devices/components into
your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could possibly
contain malicious software, and if installed in your
vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, contact an authorized dealer immediately.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel. These buttons allow
you to access and change the Customer Programmable
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or beside
the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument
panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ENTER control knob
located on the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the center of
the control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF and
MUTE buttons on the faceplate.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn off
the Uconnect screen. Push the button again or tap the
screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu or
certain option on the Uconnect system.
For the Uconnect 5 systems, push and hold the
Power button on the radio’s faceplate for a minimum of
15 seconds to reset the radio.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 5 NAV With 12-inch Display Touchscreen And
Faceplate Buttons
For The Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, The Uconnect
5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display, And The Uconnect 5 NAV
With 12-inch Display
For Uconnect 3, push the SETTINGS button on the side of
the faceplate. In this menu, the Uconnect system allows
you to access all of the available programmable features.
For Uconnect 5, press the Vehicle button on the
touchscreen, then press the Settings tab on the top of the
touchscreen. In this menu, the Uconnect system allows
you to access all of the available programmable features.
NOTE:
Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings
may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on the
touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred setting
option until a check mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting
is complete, press the Vehicle button to exit to the screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of
the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
MULTIMEDIA 227
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the touchscreen. The available
settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English (United States), Español (Mexico), Italiano
(Italy), and Français (Canada).
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system set it
automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust the display
brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the brightness of the
display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”, the headlights must be on, and the
dimmer wheel must be in the lowest position. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF/Brightness
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units to “US”, “Metric”, or “Custom”. The
available options within Custom are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa,
or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque”
(lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable keyboards are
“ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY Keyboard”.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 MULTIMEDIA
My Profile
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
“Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes
the theme with the headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically after five
seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display incoming calls in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Fuel Saver Display This setting will enable fuel saver mode in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ready To Drive Pop-ups This setting will enable the Ready To Drive Pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system and Instrument Cluster
Display. The available languages are English (United States), Español (Mexico), Italiano
(Italy), and Français (Canada).
Display Mode
This setting will adjust the display brightness for the radio to “Auto” or “Manual”.
“Manual” allows for more customization with the radio display brightness.
Display Brightness Headlights On
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”, the headlights must be on, and the
dimmer wheel must be in the lowest position. The “+” setting will increase the brightness;
the “-” will decrease the brightness.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
MULTIMEDIA 229
Display Brightness Headlights Off
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To access this
setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will increase the
brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Units
This setting will allow you to change the units to “US”, “Metric”, or “Custom”. The
available options within Custom are “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Current Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa,
or bar), “Temperature” (°C or °F), “Power” (HP [US], Gal HP [UK], or kW), and “Torque”
(lb-ft or Nm) units of measurement independently.
Theme Mode
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting options are
“Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”. Select to show themes in Light or Dark mode. “Auto” changes
the theme with the headlights.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed in Cluster This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display incoming calls in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be
“Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male” or “Female”.
“Wake Up” Word
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available options are
“Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
Voice Barge-in This setting will allow Voice Barge-in to be turned on or off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown. The options are “On” and “Off”.
Key Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec” and “45 sec”.
Setting Name Description
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 MULTIMEDIA
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Radio Power Off
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are “0
sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Radio Off With Door
This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the doors are
opened.
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
App Drawer Unfavoritings Popups This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off” options.
New Text Message Popups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages. Setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Missed Calls Message
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting options
are “On” and “Off”.
Navigation Popups
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting options are
“On” and “Off”.
Navigation Settings
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your Uconnect Radio
Instruction Manual for further information.
Audio Settings
This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings
Ú page 245.
Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Setting Name Description
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
MULTIMEDIA 231
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is selected on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These options will differ
depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a subfolder, select the desired folder; the
available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking
Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) alert
sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is in view,
and the possibility of a collision is detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system
signal when the object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
Forward Collision Warning — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off” setting will
deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide only an audible chime
when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an
audible chime and apply some brake pressure when a collision is detected.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking — Located In Automatic Emergency Braking Submenu
This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off. This setting is
located in Automatic Emergency Braking.
LaneSense Warning — Located In LaneSense Submenu
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will provide lane
departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”, “Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength — Located In LaneSense Submenu
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a lane
departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is detected and
can provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available settings are
“Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 MULTIMEDIA
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected in a
vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The “Lights” setting will
activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting
will activate both the lights on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Trailer Length For Blind Spot Alert
This setting will auto detect the length of an attached trailer. The “Auto” setting will have
the system automatically set the trailer length. The “Max” setting will always set the
length to the maximum 39.5 ft (12 m).
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
Power Side Steps
This setting will raise and lower or stow the Power Side Steps. The available options are
“Automatic” to raise and lower the Power Side Steps and “Stow” to deactivate the Power
Side Steps.
Rear Seat Alert
When this setting is turned on and the rear doors are opened while the engine is running,
or if the engine is turned on within 10 minutes of the door opening, a message will
appear to check the rear seat when the vehicle is powered OFF.
Front ParkSense Camera Activation
This setting will allow you to enable or disable the front camera when an obstacle is
detected.
Setting Name Description
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
MULTIMEDIA 233
Clock & Date
When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system will control
the time via the GPS location.
Set Time
This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS must be off
for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours or minutes.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the time to a 12-hour
format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour format.
Set Date
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you can scroll
through the available days, months, and years.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off
This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off. Available
options are “On” and “Off”.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio device or smartphone.
The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
Do Not Disturb All
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All Settings menu. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Enable Two Active Phones
This setting will enable or disable two active phones within the vehicle. The setting
options are “On” and “Off”.
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster This setting will display incoming calls in the Instrument Cluster Display.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
MULTIMEDIA 235
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Voice Options This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or “Female”.
Wake Up Word
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available options are
“Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Ram”.
Voice Barge-In
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement is
completed by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always” setting will
always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show the Command List and
provide a brief description of what the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the
Command List off.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation — If Equipped
Trailer Brake/Trailer — If Equipped
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can change which icons
display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual.
When the Trailer Brake/Trailer button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to trailer towing.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Trailer 1
Options for each trailer are “Use This Trailer”, “Braking” (Light Electric, Heavy Electric,
Light Electric Over Hydraulic, and Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic), “Trailer Name”, and
“Tire Pressure” (Setup All Tires, Replace Single Tire, Set Target Tire Pressure, and Delete
Tire Settings).
Trailer 2
Options for each trailer are “Use This Trailer”, “Braking” (Light Electric, Heavy Electric,
Light Electric Over Hydraulic, and Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic), “Trailer Name”, and
“Tire Pressure” (Setup All Tires, Replace Single Tire, Set Target Tire Pressure, and Delete
Tire Settings).
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
MULTIMEDIA 237
Trailer 3
Options for each trailer are “Use This Trailer”, “Braking” (Light Electric, Heavy Electric,
Light Electric Over Hydraulic, and Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic), “Trailer Name”, and
“Tire Pressure” (Setup All Tires, Replace Single Tire, Set Target Tire Pressure, and Delete
Tire Settings).
Trailer 4
Options for each trailer are “Use This Trailer”, “Braking” (Light Electric, Heavy Electric,
Light Electric Over Hydraulic, and Heavy Electric Over Hydraulic), “Trailer Name”, and
“Tire Pressure” (Setup All Tires, Replace Single Tire, Set Target Tire Pressure, and Delete
Tire Settings).
Trailer Surround Camera This setting will let you access options related to the Trailer Surround Camera.
Trailer Select
Select from “Trailer 1”, “Trailer 2”, “Trailer 3”, and “Trailer 4”. These trailer designations
can be used to save different trailer settings.
Trailer Brake Type
This setting will set the system to a specific trailer type. The available options are “Light
Electric”, “Heavy Electric”, “Light Electric Over Hydraulic”, and “Heavy Electric Over
Hydraulic”.
Trailer Name
This setting will personalize the trailer name depending on the type of trailer you are
hauling. Select the trailer name from the following list: trailer, boat, car, cargo, dump,
equipment, flatbed, gooseneck, horse, livestock, motorcycle, snowmobile, travel, utility,
and 5th wheel.
Setting Name Description
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Surround View Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when shifting out of
REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guidelines on or off.
Turn Signal Activated Blind Spot View
For vehicles not equipped with towing, this setting will allow you to enable or disable the
turn signal blind spot view. For vehicles equipped with towing, the selectable options are
“Off”, “On”, or “Only with Trailer”.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
MULTIMEDIA 239
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will
move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Auto Folding Side Mirors
This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the vehicle is
turned off, the doors are locked, or the key fob button is pushed. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights to shut off
after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and
“90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
on the key fob on or off.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Steering Directed Lights
This setting will turn the headlights with the steering wheel. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
Rear Guidance Lights w/ Cargo Lights This setting will turn the Rear Guidance Lights on when Cargo Lights are activated.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
MULTIMEDIA 241
Brakes
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when the vehicle
reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock button is pushed
on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key fob. The “Off”
setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed. The “1st Press” setting
will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will
sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed twice.
Sound Horn With Remote Start This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the key fob.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 MULTIMEDIA
Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob are needed
to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock the driver door on the
first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting will unlock all doors with only one
push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n Go™)
on or off.
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have been linked
to the key fob.
When the Seats & Comfort/Auto-On Comfort Systems button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote
start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or heated
steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting
will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the
comfort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort
systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Easy Exit Seats
This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine is shut off.
The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
MULTIMEDIA 243
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate when
the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
Key Off Power Delay/Engine Off Power Delay
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount of time. The “-” will
decrease the amount of time.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 MULTIMEDIA
Suspension/Air Suspension
When the Suspension/Air Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Display Suspension Messages
This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster Display. The “All”
setting will display all available messages. The “Warnings Only” setting will only display
warning messages.
Tire Jack Mode This setting will disable the Air Suspension system to assist in changing a spare tire.
Transport Mode This setting will disable the Air Suspension system for flat towing.
Wheel Alignment Mode
This setting must be activated before performing a wheel alignment. Contact an
authorized dealer for further information.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
MULTIMEDIA 245
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio location within the
vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back and left/right
of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio location.
Equalizer — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting, the volume
will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”.
Surround Sound — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the AUX port. The
available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
Auto-On Radio — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu
This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started. The available
settings are “Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With “Recall Last”, the system resumes the
previous task before vehicle shut off.
Volume Adjustment — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu
This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option (Media, Phone,
Navigation, etc.). You can set the volume between 0 and 38.
Loudness — Located In the Audio Settings Submenu This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 MULTIMEDIA
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Notification Sounds
This setting will turn off the Notification chime that plays when a new notification is sent.
The options are “On” and “Off”.
App Drawer Favoriting Popups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Popups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Popups
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages from any connected
phone on or off.
Missed Calls Message
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls from any connected phone
on or off.
Navigation Popups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
MULTIMEDIA 247
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be used to skip specific radio
channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel list will display of
the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM® Travel Link is a
separate subscription.
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® Settings menu within the SiriusXM® menu.
Block Explicit
This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings are
“On” and “Off”.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 MULTIMEDIA
Software Updates — If Equipped
System Information
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable options for the
setting are “On” and “Off”.
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Version Information
When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear, displaying
information about the version of your radio.
License Information
When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear, displaying the
licensing information of your radio.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
MULTIMEDIA 249
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings. These settings can clear
personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description
Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available options are
“Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Restore Settings to Default This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory defaults.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal data from
the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone projection.
The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel
the screen.
Reset Performance Values This setting will reset the performance values for your vehicle.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — RADIO Button 6 — COMPASS Button
2 — MEDIA Button 7 — SETTINGS Button
3 — PHONE Button 8 — MORE Button
4 — VOLUME & On/Off Button 9 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL Knob
5 — MUTE Button 10 — SCREEN OFF Button
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
MULTIMEDIA 251
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press/Push the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media Mode and
access the radio functions and external audio sources Ú page 253.
Phone
Press/Push the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free phone
system Ú page 263.
Settings
Press/Push the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 226.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted selection on
the screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or tune a radio
station.
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the MUTE button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio system off. Push it
again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the VOLUME & On/Off button on the
faceplate to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
Push and hold the VOLUME & On/Off button for approximately 10 seconds to reset the
radio manually. Doing this can also recover the radio screen from freezing.
BACK Push the BACK button on the faceplate to go back to a previous screen in the headunit.
MUTE/VOLUME
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the MUTE/VOLUME button on the
faceplate to mute or unmute the system.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 MULTIMEDIA
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using the system.
It contains instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen. Doing so
can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety precautions. Failure to
do so may result in injury or property damage.
Become familiar with the Uconnect features and appli-
cations in this vehicle before you drive on the roadway
so using Uconnect will be more intuitive and will not
require prolonged viewing of the screen while you are
driving.
When driving, looking at the touchscreen should only
be done by a glance when safe to do so. If prolonged
viewing of the screen is required, choose a safe and
secure location where you can pull over and park safely
to do so.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs. Failure to do
so may cause injury or damage to the product. See an
authorized dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set to a level
that still allows you to hear outside traffic and emer-
gency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated electronic
device. Do not let young children use the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play your
music or sound system at loud volumes. Exercise
caution when setting the volume on the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of moisture away
from the system. Besides damage to the system, mois-
ture can cause electric shocks as with any electronic
device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed dependent. For
your own safety, it is not possible to use some of the touch-
screen features while the vehicle is in motion.
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard or sharp
objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, etc.), which could
scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly on the
screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber lens cleaning
cloth in order to clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened with a
cleaning solution, such as isopropyl alcohol or an
isopropyl alcohol and water solution ratio of 50:50. Be
sure to follow the solvent manufacturer's precautions
and directions
Ú page 454.
Feature Description
COMPASS Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to access the vehicle’s compass.
MORE Push the MORE button on the faceplate to access additional options.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
Your complete attention is always required while driving
to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Only use and
interact with the features and applications when it is
safe to do so. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
MULTIMEDIA 253
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center and controls the volume and mode of
the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker
switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the right-hand control’s center button will make
the radio switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a push
button in the center. The function of the left-hand control
is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the next
available station and pushing the bottom of the switch will
seek down for the next available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have
programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next track on the
selected media (AUX/USB/Bluetooth®). Pushing the
switch up twice will go forward two tracks. Pushing the
bottom switch goes to the beginning of the current track,
or the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play. Double
pressing the bottom button switch will skip to the previous
track if it is after eight seconds into the current track.
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — All Preset Radio Stations
3 — Seek Down
4 — Radio Band (AM/FM)
5 — Tune
6 — Station Info
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 MULTIMEDIA
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to enter the
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM,
can then be selected by pressing the corresponding
button in Radio Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the VOLUME & On/Off control knob to turn on and off
the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns continuously
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping.
Turning the VOLUME & On/Off control knob clockwise
increases the volume, and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set
at the same volume level as last played.
Mute Button
Push the MUTE button to mute or unmute the system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the radio station
frequency. Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a
selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated by pressing
the double arrow buttons on the touchscreen to the right
and left of the radio station display or by pushing the left
steering wheel audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down
button to tune the radio to the next available station or
channel. During a Seek Up/Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek Up or
Seek Down button to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate. The radio
stops at the next available station or channel when the
button on the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different frequency
bands at a slower rate.
Info — If Equipped
Press the Info button to display information related to the
currently playing song and radio station.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of the radio
screen to directly tune to a desired radio station or
channel.
Press the available number button on the touchscreen to
begin selecting a desired station. Once a number has
been entered, any numbers that are no longer possible
(stations that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
MULTIMEDIA 255
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been entered, press
“Ok”. The Direct Tune screen will close, and the system will
automatically tune to that station.
RADIO VOICE COMMANDS
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or SiriusXM®
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear.
(Subscription or included SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial
required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and wait for
the beep to say a command. See an example:
“
Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“
Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of what
to say or want to learn a Voice Command, push the
VR button and say “
Help”. The system provides you
with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode —
If Equipped
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To SiriusXM®
NOTE:
Some SiriusXM® features are not supported by all
SiriusXM® channels or content, for example song and
artist favorites, sport game notifications, tune start, and
others.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver
broadcasting technology to provide clear, coast-to-coast
radio content. SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin or review
your SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s Manual
kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold separately
after the trial included with the new vehicle purchase. If
you decide to continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will automatically renew
and bill at then-current rates until you call SiriusXM® at
866-635-2349 to cancel. See SiriusXM® Customer
Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com (US)
or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change. SiriusXM®
satellite service is available only to those at least 18 and
older in the 48 contiguous US and D.C. Our SiriusXM®
satellite service is also available in Canada and Puerto
Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite service area
and in AK. © 2022 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and
all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios equipped with
a Satellite receiver. In order to receive satellite radio, the
vehicle needs to be outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows “Acquiring Signal”, you might have to
change the vehicle’s position in order to receive a signal.
In most cases, the satellite radio does not receive a signal
in underground parking garages or tunnels.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 MULTIMEDIA
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver require a
subscription to the SiriusXM® Service. When the radio
does not have the necessary subscription, the radio is
able to receive the Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio subscription,
US residents visit https://www.siriusxm.com/phx/getlogin
or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or
call: 1-888-539-7474.
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID) located at
the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is highlighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the top of the
screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed in the
center.
The Program Information is displayed at the bottom of
the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are displayed below
the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by Direct
Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions common to
all radio modes, the Replay, Traffic/Weather button, and
Favorite button functions are available in SiriusXM®
Mode.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
MULTIMEDIA 257
REPLAY
Replay provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The Play/Pause, Rewind/Forward and Live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause
the playing of live or rewound content at any time. Play can
be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on
the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the
content in steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind
button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds
rewinds the content. The radio begins playing the content
at the point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding
of the content can only be done when the content is
previously rewound, and therefore, cannot be done for live
content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the
touchscreen also forwards the content. The radio begins
playing the content at the point at which the press is
released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the
playing of live content.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 MULTIMEDIA
FAVORITES
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen to activate
the favorites menu, which will time out within 20 seconds
in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of the X button.
The Favorites feature enables you to set a favorite artist or
song that is currently playing. The radio then uses this
information to alert you when either the favorite artist or
song is being played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be stored in
the Radio is 50.
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set a favorite
artist, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and
then the Favorite Artist button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set a favorite
song, press the Favorites button on the touchscreen and
then the Favorite Song button on the touchscreen.
BROWSE IN SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to edit
Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump settings, along
with providing the SiriusXM® Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can exit
submenus to return to a parent menu by pressing the
Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen. When pressing
the All button, the following categories become available:
Channel List: Press the Channel List to display all the
SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can scroll the
Channel List by pressing the Up and Down arrows,
located on the right side of the screen. Scrolling can
also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre List: Press the Genre button on the touchscreen
to display a list of Genres. You can select any desired
Genre by pressing the Genre List. The radio tunes to a
channel with the content in the selected Genre.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit the Favorites
list and to configure the Alert Settings, along with
providing a list of Channels currently airing any of the
items in the Favorites list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows located at the right side of the screen.
Scrolling can also be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL
knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the screen.
Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
all of the Favorites or press the Trash Can icon next to the
Favorite to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the Favorites
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from
a visual alert or audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left of the
Browse screen. This feature provides you with the ability to
select teams, edit the selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The On-Air list
provides a list of Channels currently airing any of the items
in the Selections list, and pressing any of the items in the
list tunes the radio to that channel.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
MULTIMEDIA 259
Add/Delete — If Equipped
Press the Add/Delete button on the touchscreen to
activate the League Scroll list. Press the chosen league
and a scroll list of all teams within the league will appear,
then you can select a team by pressing the corresponding
box. A check mark appears for all teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the screen.
Press the Delete All button on the touchscreen to delete
all of the selections or press the Trash Can icon next to the
selection to be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the screen.
The Alert Settings menu allows you to choose from “Alert
me to on-air games upon start” or “Alert upon score
update” or both when one or more of your selections is
airing on any of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of
the 12 presets. This feature occurs the first time the
preset is selected during that current song.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes, and are
activated by pressing any of the Preset buttons, located at
the top of the screen.
When you are on a station that you wish to save as a
preset, press and hold the numbered button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
A set of four presets will appear on the screen. Press the
All button to view all saved presets. To remove a saved
preset, a new preset must be saved over the old one.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main menu to
activate the Audio Settings screen.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio between the front
speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front speakers. Press the Front, Rear,
Left or Right button or press and drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or - button or press and drag the level bar to increase or decrease each of the
equalizer bands. The level value, which spans between plus or minus nine, is displayed at
the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”. This
alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation to vehicle speed.
Volume increases automatically as speed increases to compensate for normal road
noise.
Surround Sound
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direction as in a
movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and - buttons. This alters the AUX input
audio volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed
above the adjustment bar.
Radio Off With Door
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
passenger door is opened or until the “Radio Off Delay” selected time has expired.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
MULTIMEDIA 261
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate.
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or Source Select
button on the touchscreen and the desired mode button
on the touchscreen. USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the
Media sources available. When available, you can select
the Browse button on the touchscreen to be given these
options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media Mode is
entered by pushing the MEDIA button located on the
faceplate.
Types of Media Modes
USB MODE
Overview
USB Mode is entered by inserting a USB device into the
USB port. Another way is by pushing the MEDIA button on
the faceplate and then selecting the USB button.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you insert a USB
device with the ignition in ON/RUN, the unit will switch to
USB Mode and begin to play. The display will show the
track number and index time in minutes and seconds.
Play will begin at the start of track 1.
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth® Mode is
entered by pairing a Bluetooth® device, containing music,
to the Uconnect system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must be paired
to the Uconnect Phone to communicate with the Uconnect
system.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
press the Source button on the touchscreen and select
the Bluetooth® button
Ú page 263.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the Bluetooth® button
on the left side of the touchscreen or under the Source
Select/Select Source button (if equipped).
AUX MODE
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device
using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port.
Another way is by pushing the MEDIA button on the
faceplate, selecting the Source button and then the
AUX button.
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the Auxiliary
device cable into the AUX port. If you insert an Auxiliary
device with the ignition and the radio on, the unit will
switch to AUX Mode and begin to play.
1 — Seek Down
2 — Browse
3 — Source
4 — Pause/Play
5 — Info
6 — More Options
7 — Seek Up
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 MULTIMEDIA
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an AUX device
using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack into the AUX port.
Another way is by pushing the MEDIA button on the
faceplate, selecting the Source button, and then the AUX
button.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio output
from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if the volume control
on the Auxiliary device is set too low, there will be insuffi-
cient audio signal for the radio unit to play the music on
the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB device.
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the current
selection, or to return to the beginning of the previous
selection if the USB device is within the first three seconds
of the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the Seek Up
button on the touchscreen for the next selection on the
Bluetooth® device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the beginning of
the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the Bluetooth® device is within the
first second of the current selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the touchscreen
to display the browse window. In USB Mode, the left side
of the browse window displays a list of ways you can
browse through the contents of the USB device. If
supported by the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired button on the
touchscreen on the left side of the screen. The center of
the browse window shows items and their sub-functions,
which can be scrolled through by pressing the Up and
Down buttons to the right. The TUNE/SCROLL knob can
also be used to scroll.
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the faceplate or press the Browse
button on the touchscreen to scroll through and select a
desired track on the device. Press the Exit button on the
touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse function.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen
to select the desired audio source: USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the touchscreen
to select the desired audio source: AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the touchscreen
to toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat button on
the touchscreen is highlighted when active. The Radio will
continue to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button again to
enter Repeat All. The radio will continue to play all the
current tracks, repeatedly, as long as the repeat function
is active. To cancel Repeat, press the Repeat button a
third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen
to play the selections on the USB device in random order
to provide an interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
button on the touchscreen a second time to turn this
feature off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the Audio
button
Ú page 253.
Info
In USB Mode, press the Info button on the touchscreen to
display the current track information. Press the Info or
X button on the touchscreen a second time to cancel this
feature.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
MULTIMEDIA 263
Tracks
In USB Mode, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The song currently
playing is indicated by an arrow and lines above and below
the song title. When in the Tracks List screen you can
rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight a track
(indicated by the line above and below the track name)
and then push the ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing
that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device supports
this feature, press the Tracks button on the touchscreen
to display a pop-up with the Song List. The currently
playing song is indicated by a red arrow and lines above
and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen while the
pop-up is displayed will close the pop-up.
MEDIA VOICE COMMANDS
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth®, and
auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice operation is only available for
connected USB and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering wheel.
After the beep, say one of the following commands and
follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose
an artist:
“
Change source to Bluetooth®”
“
Change source to AUX”
“
Change source to USB”
“
Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Hits”;
“
Play song Moonlight Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB device.
Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist,
album, song, and genre information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free,
in-vehicle communications system. It allows you to
dial a phone number with your mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile”
or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward one of
18 predefined SMS messages to incoming calls/text
messages.
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming Calls,”
“Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Calls,” or
“Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for
John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks
displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging via
Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call 877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 800-465-2001 (English) or
(French) call 800-387-9983
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system's microphone
for private conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect features
Bluetooth® technology — the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you phone is
turned on with Bluetooth® active and has been paired to
the Uconnect system. Up to 10 mobile phones or audio
devices are allowed to be linked to the system. Only one
linked (or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can
be used with the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc. When you push the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your signal to give
a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
are already in a call or want to make another
call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used to access
the Voice Commands for the Uconnect Voice Command
features if your vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
OPERATION
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect
Phone and to navigate its menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect Phone
prompts. There are two general methods for how Voice
Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith
mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John Smith
mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for
it. For example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
can break the compound command form into two voice
commands: “Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect Phone works
best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as
if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/meters away
from you.
NATURAL SPEECH
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” and
“eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I would
like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or
sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the system
requires more information from the user, it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pushing
the Voice Command button on the steering wheel.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the Uconnect features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it
is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
MULTIMEDIA 265
HELP COMMAND
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following the
beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle, simply push the
Phone button (if active) on your steering wheel and say a
command or say “Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a
push of the VR button or the Phone button.
CANCEL COMMAND
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone button on your
steering wheel when the system is listening for a
command and be returned to the main or previous menu.
PAIR (LINK) UCONNECT PHONE TO A MOBILE
PHONE
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
To begin using your Uconnect Phone,
you must pair your compatible
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Mobile phone pairing is the process of
establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the
Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to
reference your mobile phone’s manual. Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile phone
compatibility information.
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow these steps to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user enters
Phone Mode and no other device(s) have previ-
ously been paired. If the system has a phone previ-
ously paired, even if no phone is currently
connected with the system, this pop-up will not
appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is enabled.
Once enabled, the mobile phone will begin to
search for Bluetooth® connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on
your touchscreen asking you to make sure the PIN on the
touchscreen matches the PIN from the pop-up on your
mobile phone.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 MULTIMEDIA
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to pair a
mobile phone, press the Phone Pairing or Settings
button from the Uconnect Phone main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button or the Add Device
button.
Search for available devices on your Blue-
tooth®-enabled mobile phone. When prompted
on the phone, select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the Uconnect system,
select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone, accept the
connection request from Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to choose
whether or not this is your favorite phone. Selecting
“Yes” will make this phone the highest priority. This
phone will take precedence over other paired phones
within range and will connect to the Uconnect system
automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth® audio device
can be connected to the Uconnect system at a time.
If “No” is selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® screen, and
the Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the phone
priority is determined by the order in which it was paired.
The most recent phone paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a pop-up on
your mobile phone for the Uconnect system to access your
“messages” and “contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will
sync your contacts with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the VR command “Show Paired Phones”
to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any screen on
the radio.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the Uconnect system
may interfere with the Bluetooth® connection. If this
happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first
make sure to delete the device from the list of phones on
your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Uconnect
from the list of devices in your phone’s Bluetooth®
settings.
CONNECTING TO A PARTICULAR MOBILE
PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE AFTER PAIRING
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to the highest
priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within range. If
you need to choose a particular phone or audio device
follow these steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the particular
audio device. A pop-up menu will appear; press
“Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A PHONE OR
AUDIO DEVICE
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or Settings
button.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Audio Sources button.
3. Press the Settings button located to the right of the
device name for a different phone or audio device
than the currently connected device or press the
preferred Connected Phone from the list.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
MULTIMEDIA 267
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete Device
button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
MAKING A PHONE OR AUDIO DEVICE A
FAVORITE
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio Sources screen, press
the Settings button located to the right of the device
name for a different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the preferred
“Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of
the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
PHONEBOOK DOWNLOAD (AUTOMATIC
PHONEBOOK TRANSFER FROM MOBILE
PHONE) — IF EQUIPPED
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone has the
ability to download contact names and number entries
from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific Bluetooth®
Phones with Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a pop-up asking
for permission for the Uconnect system to access your
messages and contacts. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com, for
supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook
Ú page 271.
Automatic download and update of a phonebook, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with four numbers
per contact will be downloaded and updated every time
a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before the
latest downloaded names can be used. Until then, if
available, the previously downloaded phonebook is
available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
MANAGING YOUR FAVORITES — IF EQUIPPED
There are two ways you can add an entry to your favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press the
Favorites button on the touchscreen, and then press
one of the +Add Favorite Contact buttons that
appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen, and then
select the appropriate number. Press the Down Arrow
button or the Settings Gear button next to the
selected number to display the option’s pop-up.
In the pop-up, select “Add to Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to remove an
existing favorite.
TO REMOVE A FAVORITE — IF EQUIPPED
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites” from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon or the Settings Gear
icon next to the contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for that
Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the Favorite.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan. For
example, if your mobile service plan provides three-way
calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Here are the phone options with Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
CALL CONTROLS
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
KEY PAD NUMBER ENTRY
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Dial/Call”.
RECENT CALLS — IF EQUIPPED
You may browse a list of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent Calls
button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your steering wheel
and perform the operation. For example, say “Show my
incoming calls”.
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
NO CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system.
Push the Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen.
1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Ignore
4 — Transfer
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
MULTIMEDIA 269
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
ANSWER OR IGNORE AN INCOMING CALL —
CALL CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile
phone. Push the Phone button on the steering wheel,
press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold and answer
the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect system in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
DO NOT DISTURB
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on
the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while Do Not Disturb is active.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call, or both when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-
ters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the touch-
screen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, “Conference Call” can be selected
so you can still place a second call without being
interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible with
iPhone® devices.
Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that support Bluetooth® Message Access
Profile (MAP).
PLACE/RETRIEVE A CALL FROM HOLD
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On Hold button
on the Phone main screen.
MAKING A SECOND CALL WHILE CURRENT
CALL IS IN PROGRESS
You can place a call on hold by pressing the Hold button
on the Phone main screen, then dial a number from the
keypad (if supported by your mobile phone), recent calls,
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks.
TOGGLING BETWEEN CALLS
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the Swap Calls button on the phone main screen.
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle between the
active and held phone call.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 MULTIMEDIA
JOIN CALLS
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button on the Phone
main screen to combine all calls into a conference call.
CALL TERMINATION
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End Call
button on the touchscreen or the Phone End button on the
steering wheel. Only the active call(s) will be terminated
and if there is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
REDIAL
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
CALL CONTINUATION
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio system until
the phone becomes out of range for the Bluetooth®
connection. It is recommended to press the Transfer
button on the touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
TRANSFER CALL TO AND FROM MOBILE
PHONE
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without terminating
the call. To transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press
the Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
VOICE COMMAND
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away
from you
Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during a
voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names in your
Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for
“0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the wheel.
You have full responsibility and assume all risks related
to the use of the Uconnect features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
MULTIMEDIA 271
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not the
Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering
the in-vehicle audio volume.
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with
Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on
your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep to say a
command. Here are some examples:
“
Call John Smith”
“
Dial 123 456 7890”
“
Redial” (call previous outgoing phone number)
“
Call back” (call previously answered incoming
phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Command, push
the Phone button and say “
Call”, then pronounce the
name
exactly as it appears in your phonebook. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“
Call John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce
incoming text messages. Push
the VR button or Phone button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an incoming text
message. (Must have compatible mobile phone
paired to Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has been
read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, re-
peat one of the predefined messages and follow the
system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided table.
Otherwise, the system will not transpose the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the
Message Access Profile (MAP) to
take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 5 or later supports reading
incoming
text messages only. For further information on how to
enable this feature on your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your
iPhone® “User Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri® Eyes
Free, you can use your voice to send a text message.
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone® connected to your
vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri lets you use your voice to send
text messages, select media, place phone calls and much
more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what
you mean and responds back to confirm your requests.
The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform
useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the Uconnect
Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After
you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play podcasts
and music, get directions, read text messages, and many
other useful requests.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are you? I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5 <or
10, 15, 20, 25,
30, 45, 60>
minutes.
I’m on my way.
Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 MULTIMEDIA
BLUETOOTH® COMMUNICATION LINK
Mobile phones may lose connection to the Uconnect
Phone. When this happens, the connection can generally
be re-established by restarting the mobile phone. Your
mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth®
ON Mode.
POWER-UP
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system
Ú page 454.
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED?
If equipped, vehicles with an ASSIST and an SOS button
are connected vehicles. These buttons will be located on
either the rearview mirror or overhead console, depending
on the vehicle. If these buttons are present in your vehicle,
you have a connected radio and can take advantage of the
many connected vehicle features.
For further information about the ASSIST and SOS buttons
Ú page 349.
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE
S
ERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s Uconnect
system is that you can now take advantage of SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services. To unlock the full
potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first
need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, transmission
and use of data from your vehicle Ú page 288.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
US residents visit: https://www.driveuconnect.com/
sirius-xm-guardian.html or call 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.ca/en/sirius-xm-guardian or call 1-877-324-9091
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device in the
Uconnect system installed in your vehicle, which receives
GPS signals and communicates with the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care center via wireless and
landline communications networks. Depending on the
type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services require an operable LTE (voice/data)
or 4G (data) network compatible with your device.
SiriusXM Guardian™ is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and Canada.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
dependent upon an operative telematics device, a
cellular connection, navigation map data, and GPS
satellite signal reception, which can limit the ability to
reach the response center or reach emergency
support.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
enclosed areas.
Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service delivery
are hills, structures, buildings, tunnels, weather,
damage to the electrical system or other important
parts of your vehicle, network congestion, civil distur-
bances, actions of third parties or the government,
Internet failure, and/or the physical location of your
vehicle, such as in an underground parking structure or
under a bridge.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
Your complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Only use
and interact with the features and applications when
it is safe to do so. Failure to follow these warnings
can result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
MULTIMEDIA 273
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are available for all
models.
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock and remote start
your vehicle from virtually anywhere by using the
Vehicle Branded App or your computer.
If equipped — Send & Go capability with the Vehicle
Branded App. Use the Vehicle Branded App to easily
search, map and send your locations directly to your
Uconnect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you forget
where you parked, using the Vehicle Finder function of
the Vehicle Branded App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the easy-to-use
Uconnect system and SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your Rearview Mirror
Or Overhead Console
If equipped, the ASSIST Button is used for contacting
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, and
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care. The SOS Call button
connects you directly to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care for assistance in an emergency.
Activation — If Equipped
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM Guardian™ in your
vehicle, you must activate your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your list of
apps.
3.
For customers in the United States, select “Customer
Care” to speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent who will activate services in your vehicle,
or select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For customers in Canada, enter your email address to
activate services in your vehicle.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial* period
for use of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services
starting on the date of vehicle purchase. To get started
with your trial, enrollment in SiriusXM Guardian™ is
required.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a subscription to
continue your services by calling a SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent.
GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED
V
EHICLE SERVICES
Download The Vehicle Branded App
Once you have activated your services, you’re only a few
steps away from using connected services.
Download the Vehicle Branded App to your mobile
device.
Use your Owner Account login and password to open
the app and then set up a PIN.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 MULTIMEDIA
For customers in the United States, if your vehicle is not
registered at the dealership, you will have to call the
Customer Care call center from inside your vehicle or
press the in-vehicle registration button. From there,
you will be able to register your vehicle and add your
vehicle’s VIN to your account.
For customers in Canada, register your account via
your vehicle.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom menu bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from the
apps list.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confirmation
email will be sent to the provided email address.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the confirmation
email. It may take a short time before remote
services will be available, but you will be able to
log into the Vehicle Branded App and the
Owner’s Site.
Once on the Remote screen and you have set up
your four-digit PIN, you can begin using Remote Door
Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your
horn and lights remotely, if equipped.
Press the Location button on the bottom menu bar of
the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send
a location to your Mobile Navigation, if equipped.
Press the Settings side menu in the upper left corner of
the app to bring up app settings and access the Assist
Call Centers.
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website https://www.mopar.com/
en-us.html (US Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian
Residents) provides you with all the information you need,
all in one place. You can track your service history, find
recommended accessories for your vehicle, watch videos
about your vehicle's features, and easily access your
manuals. It is also where you can manage your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account. This section will familiarize you with
the key elements of the website that will help you get the
most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services.
For customers in the United States, press the Sign In/
Register button and enter your email address and
password.
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle button.
Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle Health Report”, and
“Recalls”. The website will then prompt you to log in using
your email address and password.
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM Guardian™
account, such as your contact information, password
and SiriusXM Guardian™ PIN, click on the Edit/Edit
Profile button to access the details of your account.
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, press one of these icons and enter your
four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely
start (if equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the horn
and flash the lights.
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account. For example, any time you use your
remote services (such as Remote Door Unlock), you can
elect to receive a text message, push notification, and/or
E-mail to notify you of the event. To set up the
notifications, please follow these instructions.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
MULTIMEDIA 275
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents) and
select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
(Canadian
Residents), select “My Vehicle” and then
“Dashboard”.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™” where you
can edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email address
to notify you, and you can customize the types of
messages.
USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
SOS Call — If Equipped
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A Button
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has onboard
assistance features located on the rearview mirror or
overhead console designed to enhance your driving
experience if you should ever need assistance or support.
Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in contact with a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent in the event of
an emergency. When the connection between the vehicle
and the live agent is made, your vehicle will automatically
transmit location information. In the event of a minor
collision, medical or any other emergency, press the SOS
button to be connected to a call center agent who can
send emergency assistance to your vehicle’s location.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are
dependent on an operational Uconnect system, cellular
network availability that is compatible with the device in
your vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all features
of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available everywhere at all
times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator light will turn
green indicating a call has been placed.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally pushed,
there is a 10-second delay before the SOS call is
placed. The system will verbally alert you that a
call is about to be made. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS Call button on the rear-
view mirror or overhead console or press the
Cancel button on the touchscreen within
10 seconds.
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth®-paired phone
is disconnected so incoming or outgoing calls will
go through your mobile device versus the
hands-free system which is not available due to
the SOS Call.
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent is made,
the agent will stay on the line with you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care center may be recorded or
monitored for quality assurance purposes. Through your
enrollment in and use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services, you consent to being recorded.
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services,
including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call, will
NOT work without a network connection compatible
with your device.
Center Light Status Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Red System error
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 MULTIMEDIA
(Continued)
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US and that
travel into Mexico and Canada may have limited services.
In particular, responses to SOS calls or other emergency
services may be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles
purchased outside the United States and Canada are
unable to receive SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected:
The light will continuously be illuminated red.
The screen will display the following message “Vehicle
phone requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop SOS Call
system operation. These include, but are not limited to,
the following factors:
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware is
damaged during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) coverage and/or GPS
signals are unavailable or obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather conditions.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any reason
(including during or after an accident), the SOS Call
system, among other vehicle systems, will not operate.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the
US or Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services. Vehicle must be regis-
tered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and have an active
subscription that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC (Acces-
sory) position with a properly functioning electrical
system.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS antennas. You
could prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical equipment to
the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your
vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emer-
gency call. To avoid interference that can cause the
SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equip-
ment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or
modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR
VEHICLE LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT),
NEITHER THE VEHICLE BRANDED APPS NOR THE
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ CONNECTED SERVICES
WILL OPERATE.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) turns on the
Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the air bag system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated,
the air bag system may not be working properly and
the SOS Call system may not be able to send a signal
to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center.
If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service your vehicle immediately.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
MULTIMEDIA 277
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. After an accident, a live agent will
contact you through the Uconnect system and alert
emergency services.
NOTE:
An active SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is required for
this feature to function.
After a crash where the airbags deploy:
1. Automatic SOS will initiate a call with an agent.
2. An agent will receive the call and confirm the location
of the emergency.
3. If needed, the agent will request the assistance of
emergency services.
4. First responders will arrive on scene. The agent will
remain on the call until emergency services arrive.
NOTE:
Agents are available 24/7 to assist you in the case of
an emergency.
On your behalf, agents are able to notify family
members about the collision.
Agents can brief first responders of the situation before
they arrive on scene.
In the event vehicle occupants are unable to speak,
emergency services will be dispatched based on the
last known GPS coordinates.
SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services are depen-
dent upon an operative telematics device, a cellular
connection, navigation map data, and GPS satellite
reception, which can limit the ability to reach the
response center or reach emergency support.
Terms of service of the Uconnect and the SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscriber agreement apply. See terms of
services for complete service limitation.
Remote Commands
On the Remote Commands screen, you have access to
several vehicle features that can be controlled remotely
from your mobile device. These features include locking/
unlocking, remote starting, and activating the horn and
lights of the vehicle.
Remote Commands lets you send a request to your
vehicle in one of three ways:
Anywhere using your mobile device and Vehicle
Branded App
From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not available
on all functions)
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(not available on all functions)
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services if needed. If the
Rearview Mirror Light is illuminated, have an autho-
rized dealer service the SOS Call system immedi-
ately.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road condi-
tions or location), do not wait for voice contact from
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately
and move to a safe location.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance and
regular inspection of your vehicle may result in
vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING!
Lock
Press this button to lock
your vehicle.
Vehicle Start
Press this button to start
your vehicle.
Horn & Lights
Press this button to sound
the horn and activate
your lights.
Unlock
Press this button to unlock
your vehicle.
Cancel Vehicle Start
Press this button to cancel
remote start.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 MULTIMEDIA
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile Device
And The Vehicle Branded App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon on your
mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same four-digit
code established when you activated your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services). Enter the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN on the keypad.
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the command to
go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command was
received by your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your Owner’s Site
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the username and
password you used when activating your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links are
provided on the website to help you retrieve them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle registered into your
Owner’s Site, select the vehicle you want to send the
command to by clicking on its image along the top.
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote commands.
Press the desired icon to activate that feature.
4. You will then be asked to enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the same four-digit
code established when you activated your SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services). Please enter your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let you know
if the command was received by your vehicle.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (for
example, in case of an accidental lock-out):
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care if you
are unable to lock your vehicle through the Vehicle
Branded App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent will verify your identity by asking
for your four-digit SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN, you can ask them to perform a remote
command.
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request Remote Door
Lock/Unlock. It is your responsibility to protect your PIN
appropriately.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides you the
ability to lock or unlock the door on your vehicle without
the keys and from virtually any distance.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with SiriusXM
Guardian™.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection. If using the Vehicle
Branded App to command your vehicle, your device
must be compatible and be connected to an operable
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™
and have an active subscription that includes the appli-
cable feature.
An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start and Remote
Door Lock/Unlock if following a Remote Horn & Lights
activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will not be
processed if the vehicle is in motion, the ignition key is
on or during an emergency call.
NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed via your
Owner’s Site or through the Vehicle Branded App on your
compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you with the
ability to start the engine on your vehicle without the keys
and from virtually any distance. Once started, the preset
climate controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool down
the interior.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
MULTIMEDIA 279
You can also send a command to turn off an engine that
has been started using Remote Vehicle Start. After
15 minutes, if you have not entered your vehicle with the
key, the engine will shut off automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped
with a factory-installed Remote Start system.
You can set up push notifications every time a command
is sent to activate or cancel Remote Start.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
The vehicle has been started with the key fob within the
last 14 days.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle’s security system has been armed and not
triggered since the last vehicle start.
The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are closed.
The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank of fuel,
along with oil and battery power.
The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
If equipped, the vehicle must have an automatic trans-
mission.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
If the Panic button has been pressed, the vehicle must
be started at least once after alarming the system.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents are not
authorized for Remote Vehicle Start services. Contact the
Uconnect Care Team for assistance.
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or noisy
parking area by activating the horn and lights. It may also
help if you need to draw attention to your vehicle for any
reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications every time a
command is sent to turn on the horn and lights.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell tower
reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or Wi-Fi
connection.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed to be loud
and get noticed. Please keep in mind the surroundings
when using this feature. You are responsible for
compliance with local laws, rules and ordinances in the
location of your vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Assist — If Equipped
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services feature may contain an ASSIST button
in the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services have been activated, the ASSIST button can
connect you directly to the Customer Care call center (if
equipped). You will be directed to one of the following four
services:
Roadside Assistance — If you get a flat tire or need a
tow, you’ll be connected to someone who can help
anytime.
Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to activate your
services, renew after your trial has expired, for
in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services, or help answering any general
questions surrounding your connected services.
Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
non-connected Uconnect system features, such as
radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance Features —
If Equipped
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has onboard
assistance features located on the rearview mirror or
overhead console designed to enhance your driving
experience if you should ever need assistance or support.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 MULTIMEDIA
How It Works
Simply push the ASSIST button in the vehicle and you will
be presented with your ASSIST options on the
touchscreen. Make your selection by pressing the
touchscreen.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold in the
US and Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™
and have an active subscription that includes the appli-
cable feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or ACC
(Accessory) position with a properly functioning elec-
trical system.
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your vehicle, you
agree to be responsible for any additional roadside
assistance service costs that you may incur. In order to
provide SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services to you,
we may record and monitor your conversations with
Roadside Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether such
conversations are initiated through the SiriusXM
Guardian™ connected services in your vehicle, or via a
landline or mobile device, and may share information
obtained through such recording and monitoring in
accordance with regulatory requirements.
You acknowledge, agree and consent to any recording,
monitoring or sharing of information obtained through any
such call recordings.
Send & Go — If Equipped
Description
The Send & Go feature allows you to search for a
destination on your mobile device, and then send the
route to your vehicle’s Navigation system.
How It Works
1. There are multiple ways to find a destination. After
selecting the Location tab at the bottom of the App,
browse through one of the categories provided, or
type the name or keyword in the search box. You can
also select categories such as “Favorites” or
“Contact List”.
2. Select your destination from the list that appears.
Location information will then be displayed on the
map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current location.
Send the destination to the vehicle (Send & Go).
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect Navigation in
your vehicle. You can also call the destination by
pressing the Call button.
4. Confirm your destination in the vehicle through a
notification or in the Navigation system.
Requirements
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data) network connection compatible with your device.
Vehicle must have an active subscription that includes
the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature allows you to find the location
of your vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights to make
finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Select the Vehicle Finder function within the Vehicle
Branded App and select the Location tab at the bottom of
the App. Then, press the Vehicle icon to find your vehicle.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect
system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection compatible with
your device.
Vehicle must have an active subscription that includes
the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on within
14 days.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
MULTIMEDIA 281
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that connects
your device to an LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
that is ready to go wherever you are. After you've made
your purchase, turn on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect
your devices.
Enables all your passengers to be simultaneously
connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop or any
other portable-enabled media — can connect over your
private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets anyone on your
private network access the Web — great for working
and relaxing.
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides the
vehicle passengers with an internet access
hotspot in the vehicle, using the radio as an
access point. The hotspot will allow
Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle devices (such as a laptop or any
other portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly
connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a complimentary
3-month trial period that includes 1GB of total data. The
trial can be activated any time within the first year of new
vehicle ownership.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a subscription to
the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select the 4G Wi-Fi
Hotspot App, and press the How To Purchase button
and follow the instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link to the
AT&T portal to get set up.
3.
For existing Connected Car customers: Push the
ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T Customer Care
agent who will assist you.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you can change
its name and the password by selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot
App and pressing the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can
also view the connected devices from the app screen by
pressing the View Connected Devices button.
NOTE:
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not required in order
to purchase and use 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot. For more infor-
mation on setting up a Wi-Fi connection, visit https://
myvehicle.att.com.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot
while driving the vehicle as doing so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel and obey all applicable laws. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of
the features and applications in this vehicle. Only use
the features and applications in this vehicle when it is
safe to do so. Failure to comply may result in an
accident involving in serious injury or death.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 MULTIMEDIA
Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If Equipped
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent may be able to locate the stolen vehicle and
work with law enforcement to help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will work
with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care that
your vehicle has been stolen.
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Agent will
ask for the stolen vehicle report number (as issued by
your local law enforcement). If you have downloaded
the Vehicle Branded App, you can push the Settings
menu button on your device, select “Help”, and then
select “SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care” to make
the call.
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will authenticate
that you are the owner of the vehicle and contact the
law enforcement with whom you filed the stolen
vehicle report.
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will work with
your local law enforcement to locate the vehicle. You
will be contacted by law enforcement if your vehicle is
recovered. While the investigation is ongoing, you
should also contact your insurance company to
inform it of the situation.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the Uconnect
system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network connection compatible with your
device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™
and have an active subscription that includes the
applicable feature.
NOTE:
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or enclosed
areas.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report —
If Equipped
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect service
through which a summary of the performance of your
vehicle’s key systems will be sent to you every month so
you can stay on top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs.
This is provided as a convenience to you and does not
substitute for regular maintenance to your vehicle.
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health Report, the
Uconnect system in your vehicle may collect and transmit
vehicle data to SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as
your vehicle’s health and performance, your vehicle’s
location, your utilization of the features in your vehicle,
and other data.
This data collection and transmission begins when you
enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will continue even if you
cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription unless you
call SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell them to
deactivate your connected services.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
information, located at www.driveuconnect.com/
connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™ private
policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/privacy-policy.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must be enrolled in an active subscription
with connected services. If you have concerns about the
operation, function or performance of your vehicle, please
take it to an authorized dealer. This report does not
replace regularly scheduled maintenance. Check the
instrument cluster warning lights and cautions in your
vehicle for the most accurate vehicle health information.
Vehicle Health Alert —If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem with one of your vehicle’s key systems. For further
information, go to your Owner’s website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to register and
activate services. During this process you will be asked to
provide an email address to which the reports will be sent.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
MULTIMEDIA 283
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to remind you when
services are needed, or to alert you of other important
information, such as recall notices. When you receive a
notification through your touchscreen, press OK to dismiss
the message, or press Call Care to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing “OK” or the X button on the pop-up screen will
dismiss or close the pop-up, and the In-Vehicle Messages
mailbox will display. In the Mailbox, you can reopen
messages or delete messages.
Amazon Alexa Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to command
your vehicle with Amazon Alexa!
With Amazon Alexa, you can connect to your vehicle and
remotely access key services and features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect Navigation, you
can send a destination directly to your vehicle using Alexa.
If you need assistance, you can always ask Alexa for help,
or complete a list of commands by saying: “Alexa, ask
<brand name> for help with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can ask Alexa:
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to start my <vehicle
name> with your Voice Code.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my <vehicle name>
with your Voice Code.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000 Chrysler
Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my <vehicle name>.”
“Alexa, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel level of my
<vehicle name>.”
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is required.
To use Amazon Alexa, first, register for SiriusXM
Guardian™
Ú page 273.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle to Amazon
Alexa:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa app on your mobile
device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to SKILLS.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle brand>
Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account credentials. This will
be the same user name and password you used when
registering for SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services. There will be additional settings to confirm
on the following screen.
7. AUTHORIZE the account to return to the <vehicle
brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand> Skill on
Alexa!
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving and give you
peace of mind when your loved ones are out on the road.
You can set boundary limits, monitor driving speed, and
pinpoint your vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use
the Vehicle Branded App to set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your vehicle is
driven either out of or into a geographic boundary that
you set.
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being driven
outside of the curfew time.
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car exceeds a
speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your vehicle is driven
outside a quarter-mile radius of a valet drop-off zone.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 MULTIMEDIA
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Vehicle Branded App
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. To get
started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Vehicle Branded App from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone using the
username and password you created when you first
set up your account.
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Vehicle Branded App should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your SmartWatch, you can
enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the remote lock
button in the app and entering your security PIN.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel level, vehicle
location, tire pressure warning, and more.
MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
A
CCOUNT
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account, press the
ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or turning in
your lease, to call SiriusXM Guardian™ Care to remove
your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM Guardian™,
active subscribers can push the ASSIST button (if
equipped) and then select SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on
your in-vehicle touchscreen to contact SiriusXM
Guardian™. Your call will be directed to a SiriusXM
Guardian™ agent or held in a queue until an agent is
available. If you do not have an active subscription, push
the ASSIST button and press the Activate button on the
touchscreen to activate services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS —
I
F EQUIPPED
1.
What happens if I accidentally push the SOS Call
button on the mirror or overhead console?
You have
10 seconds after pushing the SOS Call button to
cancel the call. To cancel the call, either push the
SOS Call button again, or press the Cancel button on
the in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use the SOS
Call button from my vehicle? Certain vehicle
information, such as make and model, is transmitted
along with the last known GPS location.
3.
When could I use the SOS Call button? You can use
the SOS Call button to make a call if you or someone
else needs emergency assistance.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR
L
OCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1.
How long does it take to unlock or lock the door?
Depending on various conditions, it can take up to
three minutes or more for the request to get to your
vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door more
quickly, however its range is limited and your Vehicle
Branded App comes in handy for these and other
situations.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
MULTIMEDIA 285
3.
Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device? People
sometimes lose their mobile devices, which is why
security measures have been engineered into the
Vehicle Branded App. Asking for your username,
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are
required for the activation of Remote services
through your mobile device. It is your responsibility to
protect your passwords and PINs.
4.
Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded
App? The Vehicle Branded App is compatible with
most devices with the Apple® and Android™
operating systems. The capabilities of these devices
allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the future.
5.
Why is the Vehicle Branded App running slow? The
Vehicle Branded App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send commands to
your vehicle which must have an operable LTE (voice/
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network connection. If
either your device or your vehicle is in an area with
below average coverage, it may take longer to log in
and send commands.
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
What is the phone number for roadside assistance
call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2.
If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™, does it
cover towing or other expenses incurred by using
roadside assistance? No, however your new vehicle
may include Roadside Assistance Call services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO
FAQ
S — IF EQUIPPED
1.
How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle?
Depending on various
conditions, it can take up to three minutes for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
you enter your vehicle, and start the engine, the
pop-up message stating that you have a new route
will appear. There is an exit button on the pop-up that
will cancel the route if selected.
3.
Can I select a different route than the most recent
one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once you enter the
vehicle, and start the engine, the pop-up message
offers a “Locations” option. Once “Locations” is
selected, you can choose from a list of recently sent
destinations.
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER
FAQ
S
1.
Can someone else locate my vehicle?
Your vehicle
may be located by anyone who has your PIN and
access to your account. It is your responsibility to
guard your PIN accordingly. See the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for more
information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the
lights? Depending on various conditions, it can take
three minutes or more for the request to get through
to your vehicle.
3.
How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them
on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can
use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by
pushing the red Panic button.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS — IF EQUIPPED
1.
Can someone locate my vehicle?
To enhance your
privacy, and the privacy of others using your vehicle,
a stolen vehicle police report is required for you to
activate this service. You must involve local law
enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™ locate
your vehicle. We may also locate the vehicle for
other law enforcement or government agencies,
subject to a valid court order telling SiriusXM
Guardian™ to do so. We will also provide the service
for FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you have
purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered? After you
provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
agent with the stolen vehicle report, the agent will
work together with law enforcement to try to locate
your vehicle. If your vehicle is recovered, you will be
contacted by law enforcement.
3.
Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my insurance rates?
Some insurance providers offer lower rates on
vehicles equipped with systems that can deter auto
theft. When shopping for insurance, be sure to inform
the insurance provider of your SiriusXM Guardian™
connected services subscription to find out if the
insurance provider can offer you a lower rate.
NOTE:
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance companies, and
SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an insurance product. You are
responsible for obtaining insurance coverage for your
vehicle and yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE
S
TART FAQS
1.
How long does it take to remotely start my vehicle?
Depending on various conditions, it can take three
minutes or more for the request to get through to
your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will remote start your vehicle more
quickly. However its range is limited. For example,
when you are leaving the stadium after the game, you
can use the Vehicle Branded App to remote start your
vehicle and have the inside of your vehicle
comfortable by the time you get to it.
3.
Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless device?
People sometimes lose their wireless devices, which
is why security measures have been engineered into
the Vehicle Branded App. Asking for your username,
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN help
to ensure that nobody can start your vehicle if they
happen to find your device.
4.
Can someone drive off with my vehicle using the App?
No. Driving your vehicle still requires the keys to be in
the vehicle. The Remote Start feature simply starts
the engine to warm up or cool down the interior
before you arrive.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with the
cancel Remote Vehicle Start command? No. If the
vehicle is in motion, the cancel Remote Vehicle Start
button will not stop the vehicle.
6.
Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded
App? The Vehicle Branded App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and Android™
operating systems. The capabilities of these devices
allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the future.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN
& L
IGHTS FAQS
1.
How long does it take to sound my horn and flash the
lights?
Depending on various conditions, it can take
three minutes or more for the request to get through
to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Vehicle Branded
App? Your key fob will sound the horn and flash the
lights quicker; however, its range is limited.
3.
How do I turn off the horn and lights after I turn them
on? If you are close enough to the vehicle, you can
use the key fob to turn off the horn and lights by
pressing the red Panic button. Otherwise, Remote
Horn & Lights will continue for a maximum of three
minutes.
4.
Why can’t all mobile devices use the Vehicle Branded
App? The Vehicle Branded App has been designed to
work on most devices with the Apple® and Android™
operating systems. The capabilities of these devices
allow us to remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the future.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
MULTIMEDIA 287
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT
FAQ
S — IF EQUIPPED
1.
How do I register for my SiriusXM Guardian™
account? There are three ways that you can register
your SiriusXM Guardian™ Account:
Push the ASSIST button. A call will be placed to an
agent who can assist in registering your new
account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps menu.
Select the button to speak with an agent, who can
assist in registering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the Apps menu.
Enter your email on the touchscreen and then
follow the prompts from the provided email. You
will receive an email with an activation link that
will be good for 72 hours. Once you click the acti-
vation link, you will be prompted to fill out your
information and accept Terms and Conditions.
Then, you will be directed to the SiriusXM
Guardian™ home page to complete your profile
and demo the remote services.
2.
Why do I need an email address? Without an email
address, customers cannot register for SiriusXM
Guardian™. Customers need to register so they can
subscribe to receive additional services and create a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for remote
command requests.
3.
How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ security PIN?
Set up your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN during
the registration process. The SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN will be required to authenticate you
when accessing your account via SiriusXM
Guardian™ Call or performing any remote services,
such as Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
4.
What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™ security PIN?
If you’ve already activated services and forgot your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the
PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s Site.
5.
How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ payment
account address? Your SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment
Account address can be updated online, or by calling
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in
your vehicle. To update online: login to your Owner’s
Site, and select Edit Profile > SiriusXM Guardian™
Payment Account.
6.
How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™ profile?
Your name, home address, phone number, email
address and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN can be
updated online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your
Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit your
personal information. Make your edits and click Save.
7.
Can I try features or packages before I buy them?
Your new vehicle purchase may have come with an
included trial period for certain Apps and services.
8.
Can I access every App and service while driving? No,
some applications and services are not available
while driving. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion (e.g. key pad).
9.
What happens when my subscription comes up for
renewal? If you have added a credit card to your
account information, your subscription will be
automatically renewed for a term length in
accordance with the service plan that you have
selected at the then current subscription rate and on
every renewal date thereafter, unless you cancel your
subscription by calling SiriusXM Guardian™ Care. If
you have not added a credit card to your account,
SiriusXM Guardian™ will send you an email or letter
in advance of your expiration date to remind you that
your subscription is ending soon.
10.
How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™ notifi-
cation preferences? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care, or go to your Owner’s Site and then
update your preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
customer web portal.
11.
How do I purchase a subscription? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care by pushing the ASSIST
button on your rearview mirror or overhead console.
12.
How do I update my credit card information? Login to
your Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile, then select
SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 MULTIMEDIA
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on my
subscription? Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care.
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and choose a sub-
scription to view its expiration date. When your sub-
scription is about to expire, you will receive an email
or letter of notification.
14.
Can I get a refund if I have not used the entire
subscription? Prorated refunds are provided from the
date of cancellation for annual plans or longer.
Please see the Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™
Terms & Conditions for refunds related to billing
plans of other lengths and other circumstances.
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it expires? Yes. If
you have an annual subscription, your subscription
will be canceled the day you cancel. If you have a
monthly subscription, your subscription will be
canceled on the last day of the month in which you
choose to cancel.
16.
What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle? Before
your vehicle is sold to a new owner, you’ll want to
remove your account information. This process
removes all personal information, returns the
Uconnect system to its original factory settings,
removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ connected services
and account information. To remove your account
information from the Uconnect system, contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
17.
What if I forgot to remove my account information
before I returned my lease vehicle or sold it? Contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
18.
What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/data), 4G
(data), or 5G (data) network connection compatible
with my device is temporarily unavailable? The SOS
Call and ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are
not connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G
(data), 5G (data) network. Services that required your
smartphone only direct calls to Roadside Assistance
Call may be functioning if you have an operable
network.
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits data which
may include information about your vehicle, your vehicle’s
health and performance, your vehicle’s location, your
utilization of the features in your vehicle, and other data.
The collection, use and sharing of this information is
required to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
services and is further described by the Uconnect Privacy
Policy, which can be found at www.driveuconnect.com/
connectedservices/privacy.html (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents). This
information may be collected by SiriusXM® Connected
Vehicle Services Inc. and shared with FCA US LLC for the
purposes stated in the Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle
health and diagnostic information including location data
may be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle Health
Report to you.
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription,
this vehicle diagnostic health information, including
location data, may still be transmitted from your vehicle
and you may still have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
Use of any of the connected services including SiriusXM
Guardian™ is deemed to be your consent to the collection,
use and disclosure of this information in accordance with
the Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this
information to be collected, used, or shared, you must
cancel your Uconnect services in their entirety by
contacting us as referenced in the Uconnect Privacy
Policy.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by repositioning the mobile phone within the vehicle. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio
performance does not satisfactorily improve from
repositioning the mobile phone, it is recommended that
the volume be turned down or off during mobile phone
operation when not using the Uconnect system.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
MULTIMEDIA 289
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
US/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is
far below the FCC and IC radio frequency exposure limits.
Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a
manner that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further from
the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
found in radio frequency safety standards and
recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the
scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless
radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy
emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy
emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones.
However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in
some situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the
wireless radio
Ú page 454.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road Pages which
display vehicle information related to the drivetrain,
transfer case, and coolant/oil gauges.
To access Off-road Pages, press the Vehicle button on the
touchscreen, select the Offroad tab, and then select the
OFF ROAD button on the main screen. Off-Road Pages can
also be accessed through the app drawer.
OFF ROAD Button
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 MULTIMEDIA
OFF-ROAD PAGES STATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the bottom
of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of the selectable
page options. It provides information for the following
items:
1. Transfer Case Status
2. Latitude/Longitude
3. Altitude of the vehicle
4. Status of Hill Descent Control and Target Speed in
mph (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Latitude/Longitude
3 — Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control Status And Target Speed
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
MULTIMEDIA 291
VEHICLE DYNAMICS
The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s transfer case and steering angle.
The following information is displayed:
1. Status of Transfer Case
2. Status of Front Axles
3. Status of the Rear Axles
4. Steering angle in degrees
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Transfer Case Status
3 — Rear Axle
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 MULTIMEDIA
ACCESSORY GAUGE
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current status of
the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil Temperature, Oil
Pressure, Transmission Temperature, and Battery
Voltage.
Accessory Gauge Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure
4 — Battery Voltage
5 — Transmission Temperature
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
MULTIMEDIA 293
PITCH & ROLL
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current pitch
(angle up and down) and roll (angle side to side) in
degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a visualization of
the current vehicle angle.
NOTE:
Pitch & Roll values may show upon startup. These
numbers will update once the vehicle is driven.
Pitch & Roll Menu
5
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 MULTIMEDIA
SUSPENSION
The Suspension page displays the current status of the
vehicle’s suspension system and the current ride height of
the vehicle. The Suspension page will also indicate when
the vehicle’s height changes.
Suspension Menu
FORWARD FACING CAMERA
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Forward Facing
Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the
front view of your vehicle. The image will be displayed on
the touchscreen along with a caution note “Check Entire
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.
To activate, press the Forward Facing Camera button on
the touchscreen.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
295
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically prevents wheel lock and enhances vehicle
control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the
ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started
and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight
clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the system
detects one or more wheels are beginning to lock. Road
conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad
tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when the ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may continue
to hear for a short time after the stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop
The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification may
result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long
as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on while
driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS Warning Light does not come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
by improperly installed or high output radio transmit-
ting equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others.
WARNING!
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 SAFETY
REAR SEAT REMINDER ALERT (RSRA)
RSRA alerts you of the possible presence of an object,
passenger, or pet in the rear seats through a visual and
auditory notification. The system will activate
automatically if a rear door was opened within 10 minutes
of the ignition being placed in the ON/RUN position. RSRA
does not directly detect objects, passengers, or pets in the
rear seats. When the previous conditions are met, RSRA
displays the message “Check Rear Seat” on the
instrument cluster display and sounds an auditory alert
upon the driver placing the ignition in the OFF position to
exit the vehicle.
To enable or disable RSRA, see
Ú page 226.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic
Brake Control (EBC) system. This system includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS),
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), Hill
Start Assist (HSA), and Traction Control System (TCS).
These systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce
braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit
of the system, you must apply continuous braking
pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump”
the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not
functioning properly and that immediate service is
required. If the Brake System Warning Light does not
come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting braking
pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip
of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) before the front axle.
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a complete
stop, then shift the automatic transmission into
PARK and apply the parking brake.
Always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the
OFF position, key fob is removed from the vehicle
and vehicle is locked.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally
injured. Children should be warned not to touch the
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving
on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The
capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SAFETY 297
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring
the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and
vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel
lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also
reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift
will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it
cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” mode
(if equipped). For a complete explanation of the available
ESC modes, see
Ú page 297.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability of the
vehicle under various driving conditions. Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract these conditions.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light located in
the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC
system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is active. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed
and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions
and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel
lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel
lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the
roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The
capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
others.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabil-
ities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain
your vehicle, may change the handling characteris-
tics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the
performance of the ESC system. Changes to the
steering system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC
performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance that
reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can
increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SAFETY
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC
system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.
This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally
allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the ESC
OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate.
To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF
button and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the push and
release of the button will toggle the ESC modes. Multiple
attempts may be required to return to "ESC On" mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only
and should not be used on any public roadways. In this
mode, TCS and ESC features are turned off. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the ESC OFF button for five
seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine
running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the ESC
OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF”
message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off”
mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.
When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined
speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes (if
equipped).
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes on
continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has
been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on
after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon as
possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC, except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC
system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
tion and stability features are disabled. Therefore,
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in main-
taining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SAFETY 299
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located in
the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when
TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates that the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is in a reduced
mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and the
ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON position,
the ESC system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off-road driving while in
4WD Low. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending
hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle
speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC Has Three States:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation
conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding
with brake or throttle application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling
vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
The parking brake is released.
The driver door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically if driven
down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for
HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the
HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not acti-
vate.
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target
speed selection, but will not affect the gear chosen by the
transmission. When actively controlling HDC the trans-
mission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set
speed and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or
brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the
following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake
application.
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 40 mph (64 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni-
tude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SAFETY
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the
following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The parking brake is applied.
The driver door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)
for greater than 70 seconds.
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)
(HDC exits immediately).
HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC
switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback to the
driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch light will illuminate and
remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This
is the normal operating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch light will flash for several
seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to
excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch light will flash when HDC
deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will
stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop
while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake
pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction
(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle
backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears.
The system will not activate if the transmission is in
PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will
remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster display,
see Ú page 104.
If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
Ú page 226.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling
vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must
remain attentive to the driving conditions and is
responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist
(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such
as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision
or serious personal injury.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SAFETY 301
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while
towing a trailer.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full braking
during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when
an emergency braking situation may occur by monitoring
how fast the throttle is released by the driver. The
Electronic Brake Control system will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the
driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the Traction
Control System (TCS) may apply brake pressure to the
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD) functions similarly to a
limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across
a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of
the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power to
be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may
remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use
caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue
weight recommendations
Ú page 204.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light will flash, the engine power may be reduced
and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual
wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or
“Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
I
F EQUIPPED
BSM uses two radar sensors, located inside the taillights,
to detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles,
trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones
from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer,
the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated
with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the
trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In
order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or
apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing
the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when exiting your vehicle. Also, be certain
to place the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a colli-
sion or serious personal injury.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down,
stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer
load to eliminate trailer sway.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SAFETY
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rearview mirrors to
let the driver know that the system is operational. The
BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in any
forward gear and enters standby mode when the vehicle is
in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rearview mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper
of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection
zones on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will
alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the
detection zones.
The BSM system may experience dropouts (blinking on
and off) of the side mirror warning indicator lights when
a motorcycle or any small object remains at the side of
the vehicle for extended periods of time (more than a
couple of seconds).
The vehicle’s taillights, where the radar sensors are
located, must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the taillights with foreign objects
(bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The system may also detect blockage if the vehicle is
operated in areas with extremely low radar returns such as
a desert or parallel to a large elevation drop. If blockage is
detected, a “Blind Spot Temporarily Unavailable, Wipe
Rear Corners” message will display in the cluster, both
mirror lights will illuminate, and BSM and RCP alerts will
not occur. This is normal operation. The system will
automatically recover and resume function when the
condition clears.
Radar Sensor Locations
If the system detects degraded performance due to
contamination or foreign objects, a message will warn you
of a blocked sensor and the warning indicators in the side
view mirrors will be on. The warning indicators will remain
illuminated until blockage clearing conditions are met.
First clear the taillights around the sensors of the
blockage. After removing the blockage, cycle the ignition
from ON to OFF and then back ON.
If the blockage message is still present after cycling the
ignition and driving in traffic, check again for a blockage.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM Warning Light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume
Ú page 304.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to see
if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SAFETY 303
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative speed
less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the
warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, snow banks, car washes, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such objects. This is
normal operation and your vehicle does not require
service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes
Ú page 454.
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously out of the
parking space until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed.
The RCP system will then have a clear view of the cross
traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the
driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver
is alerted using both the visual and audible alarms,
including reducing the radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If the sensors
are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the system will
not be able to alert the driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot Alert has three selectable modes of operation
that are available in the Uconnect system.
For further information, see
Ú page 226.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights Only mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate
side view mirror based on a detected object. However,
when the system is operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP)
mode, the system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is present.
Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio is
muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object.
If the turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to
an alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audible alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode
when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a backup aid
system. It is intended to be used to help a driver detect
an oncoming vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even when using
RCP. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots
before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SAFETY 305
Blind Spot Assist Cameras
There are cameras located in the exterior mirrors to assist
in blind spot detection. Refer to
Ú page 189 to learn more
about how the cameras function with turn signal
engagement or refer to Ú page 191 to learn how to
activate the cameras through the Camera's screen.
Trailer Merge Assist
NOTE:
When Trailer Merge Assist is activated, Rear Cross Path is
disabled.
NOTE:
When a trailer with an electric brake is connected to the
vehicle, the instrument cluster display will provide a menu
to allow a selection of the trailer type. There will be two
options provided: Conventional and Goose/Fifth Wheel.
Goose/Fifth Wheel Trailer is incompatible and when
selected, the BSM system will disable until the trailer is
disconnected. If the wrong option is selected, the system
can be reset by either disconnecting and reconnecting the
trailer harness connector or disabling then re-enabling the
Blind Spot Monitoring system in the customer settings in
the Uconnect system. This will prompt the trailer selection
menu again to allow for the correct selection.
Trailer Merge Assist is a function of the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) system that extends the blind spot zone
to work while pulling a trailer. Trailer Merge Assist consists
of three sub functions:
Automatic Trailer Detection
Trailer Length Detection
Trailer Merge Warning
Blind Spot Zones With Trailer Merge Assist
Automatic Trailer Detection
There are two modes of operation for the detection of the
trailer length:
Automatic Mode — When “Auto Mode” is selected, the
system will use the blind spot sensors to automatically
determine the presence and length of a trailer. The
presence of a trailer will be detected using the blind
spot radar within 90 seconds of forward movement of
the vehicle. The vehicle must be moving above 6 mph
(10 km/h) to activate the feature. Once the trailer has
been detected, the system will default to the maximum
blind spot zone until the length has been verified. You
will see “Auto” in the instrument panel cluster .
Maximum Mode — When “Max Mode” is selected, the
system will default to the maximum blind spot zone
regardless of what size trailer is attached .
NOTE:
Selected setting is stored when the ignition is placed in the
OFF position. To change this setting, it must be selected
through the Uconnect Settings
Ú page 226.
Trailer Length Detection
Once the trailer presence has been established, the trailer
length will be established (by making a 90 degree turn)
and then the trailer length category (e.g. 10-20 ft (3 m to
6 m)) will be displayed. This can take up to 30 seconds
after completing the turn.
NOTE:
During the same ignition cycle, if the vehicle is at a stand-
still for a minimum of 90 seconds, a new “trailer detection
request” is enabled by the system once the vehicle
resumes motion.
Maximum length supported by the Trailer Merge Assist
feature is 39.5 ft (12 m). Trailer length is considered the
forward most portion of the trailer hitch to the rearward
most portion of the body, fascia/bumper, or ramp of the
trailer.
Maximum width supported by the Trailer Merge Assist
feature is 8.5 ft (2.59 m). Trailer width is measured at the
widest portion of the trailer and may include wheels, tires,
finders, or rails.
1 — Vehicle
2 — Trailer
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SAFETY
NOTE:
Fifth wheel or gooseneck trailers are not supported by
Trailer Merge Assist.
Trailer Length Detection
Trailer length will be identified and placed into one of the
following categories:
Trailer length up to 10 ft (3 m) — Blind Spot zone will be
adjusted to 10 ft (3 m) .
Trailer length between 10 ft to 20 ft (3 m to 6 m) —
Blind Spot zone will be adjusted to 20 ft (6 m) .
Trailer length between 20 ft to 30 ft (6 m to 9 m) —
Blind Spot zone will be adjusted to 30 ft (9 m) .
Trailer length between 30 ft and 39.5 ft
(9 m to 12 m) — Blind Spot zone will be adjusted
to Max distance .
NOTE:
Trailer length is determined within +/- 3 ft (1 m) of actual
length. Trailers that are the same size as the category
limit, 10/20/30 ft (3/6/9 m), could be subject to being
placed in the category above or below the correct one.
Trailer Merge Warning
Trailer Merge Warning is the extension of the blind spot
function to cover the length of the trailer, plus a safety
margin, to warn the driver when there is a vehicle in the
adjacent lane. The driver is alerted by the illumination of
the BSM Warning Light located in the outside mirror on the
side the other vehicle is detected on. In addition, an
audible (chime) alert will be heard and radio volume
reduced
Ú page 304.
NOTE:
The Trailer Merge Alert system DOES NOT alert the
driver about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system may experience dropouts (blinking on
and off) of the side mirror warning indicator lights when
a motorcycle or any small object remains at the side of
the vehicle for extended periods of time (more than a
couple of seconds).
Crowded areas such as parking lots, neighborhoods,
etc. may lead to an increased amount of false alerts.
This is normal operation.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
warnings, visual warnings (within the instrument cluster
display), and may apply a haptic warning in the form of a
brake jerk, to warn the driver when it detects a potential
frontal collision. The warnings are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC), to
calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the
system determines that a forward collision is probable,
the driver will be provided with audible and visual
warnings as well as a possible haptic warning in the
form of a brake jerk.
1 — Trailer Length
2 — Trailer Hitch
3 — Trailer Width
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to help
detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system
is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance
over your shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SAFETY 307
If the driver does not take action based upon these
progressive warnings, then the system will provide a
limited level of active braking to help slow the vehicle and
mitigate the potential forward collision. If the driver reacts
to the warnings by braking and the system determines
that the driver intends to avoid the collision by braking but
has not applied sufficient brake force, the system will
compensate and provide additional brake force as
required. When towing a trailer, the system will also
respond to activate the trailer brakes (if equipped).
If an FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed below
32 mph (52 km/h), the system may provide the maximum
braking possible to mitigate the potential forward
collision. If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and then release
the brakes.
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle in
front of you is no longer probable, the warning message
will be deactivated
Ú page 454.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guardrails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent such
misuse of the system, after four Active Braking events
within a key cycle, the Active Braking portion of FCW will
be deactivated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If the
vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should be
deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
During an FCW event when towing a trailer, your
Electronic Brake system will respond by activating the
trailer brakes (if equipped).
Turning FCW On Or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect display in the
control settings. For further information, see Ú page 226.
To turn the FCW system on, press the Forward Collision
button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the Forward Collision
button once.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system to warn
the driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the system from
warning the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front. If the FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF" will
be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect every
type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SAFETY
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”, this
prevents the system from providing limited Active
Braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not
braking adequately in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and Braking”, this
allows the system to warn the driver of a possible colli-
sion with the vehicle in front using audible/visual warn-
ings and it applies autonomous braking.
The FCW system state is defaulted to “Full On” from
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned off,
it will reset to “Full On” when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 226.
The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium” setting and
the system status is “Warning & Braking”. This allows the
system to warn the driver of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Far", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects farther
away. This results in earlier warnings and provides the
most reaction time to avoid possible collisions.
NOTE:
The “Far” setting may result in a greater number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
By changing the FCW status setting to "Near", the system
provides possible collision warnings on objects closer to
the vehicle. This results in later warnings and provides
less reaction time than the "Far" and "Medium" settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The “Near” setting may result in a lesser number of FCW
possible collision warnings experienced.
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” prevents
the system from providing limited active braking, or
additional brake support if the driver is not braking
adequately in the event of a potential frontal collision,
but maintains the audible and visual warnings.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from providing autonomous braking, or additional
brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
The system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as over-
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
path of the vehicle, stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
higher rates of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” momentarily, there may be a condition
that limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, Active Braking may not
be fully available. Once the condition that limited the
system performance is no longer present, the system will
return to its full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) —
If Equipped
PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) system which provides the driver with audible
warnings and visual warnings, in the instrument cluster
display. It may apply limited automatic braking when it
detects a potential frontal collision with a pedestrian/
cyclist.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SAFETY 309
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h),
the system may provide maximum braking to mitigate the
potential collision with a pedestrian/cyclist. If the PEB
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will hold
the vehicle at a standstill for two seconds and then
release the brakes. When the system determines a
collision with the pedestrian/cyclist in front of you is no
longer probable, the warning message will be deactivated.
The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph (5 km/h).
Turning PEB On Or Off
NOTE:
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the system
to warn you of a possible frontal collision with the pedes-
trian/cyclist.
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display in the
Control settings
Ú page 226.
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian
Emergency Braking button.
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning Active
Braking button.
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the system,
so no warning or active braking will be available in case of
a possible frontal collision with the pedestrian/cyclist.
NOTE:
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected by the
driver after ignition shut down. The system will not reset to
the default setting when the vehicle is restarted.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in the instrument
cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in
one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values in a different color, or the Uconnect radio will
display a TPMS message. When this occurs you must
increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold
placard pressure in order for the TPMS Warning Light to
turn off.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the
outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven — this is normal and there should be no adjustment
for this increased pressure.
See
Ú page 416 on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the
tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for
any reason, including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low TPMS Warning Light
illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
TPMS Warning Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the TPMS Warning Light will turn
off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
TPMS Warning Light off.
WARNING!
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can PEB detect every
type of potential collision with a pedestrian/cyclist. The
driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure
to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or
death.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SAFETY
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of
30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi
(186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi
(158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to
turn on the TPMS Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may
cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi
(186 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In
this situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only
after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the Tire Fill Alert
feature the TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinfla-
tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pres-
sure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pres-
sure in the tire.
Example: Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure
levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four TPMS sensors
Various TPMS messages, which display in the instru-
ment cluster
TPMS Warning Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low
Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a graphic showing the
pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure
values in a different color. An "Inflate to XX" message will
also be displayed.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-
ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning
have been established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equip-
ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle
to an authorized dealership to have your sensor func-
tion checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent mois-
ture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SAFETY 311
Example: Low Tire Pressure Display
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in
a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
instrument cluster will return to its original color, and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will turn
off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need to be
increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) above the
recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light off.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value
to indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the TPMS Warning Light will no longer flash,
and the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no longer
display, and a pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies
as the TPMS sensors.
Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
A system fault may occur due to an incorrect TPMS sensor
location condition. When a system fault occurs due to an
incorrect TPMS sensor location, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a “Tire Pressure
Temporarily Unavailable” message in place of the tire
pressure display screen. If the ignition switch is cycled,
this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS
Warning Light will no longer flash and the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed showing the tire pressure
values in the correct locations.
Vehicles With Non-Matching Full Size Spare Or Compact
Spare
The non-matching full size spare or compact spare tire
does not have a TPMS sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will
not monitor the pressure in the non-matching full size
spare or compact spare tire.
If you install the non-matching full size spare or
compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a
pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon
the next ignition switch cycle, the TPMS Warning Light
and a “LOW TIRE” message will remain on and a chime
will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument
cluster will still display a pressure value in a different
color and an “Inflate to XX” message.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SAFETY
After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
value.
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instru-
ment cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM"
message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the non-matching
full size spare or compact spare, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPMS Warning Light will
turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster will
display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TTPMS) — If Equipped
The Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TTPMS) is a
feature that displays the trailer tire pressure values and
warns the driver of a low tire pressure event based on the
drivers set target tire pressure value, through the TTPMS
settings found in the radio.
The TTPMS monitors the pressure of each tire and warns
the driver through the instrument cluster, when either a
low tire pressure condition falls below 25% of the drivers
set pressure or if a system malfunction occurs. The
instrument cluster will display the actual tire pressure or
dashes for each of the trailer tires in the correct trailer
position, based on trailer configuration. The TTPMS can
support up to 12 trailer tires per configured trailer on up to
four configurable trailers
Ú page 226.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Trailer Tire Pressure Sensor Pairing
In order use this feature, the provided tire pressure
sensors must be installed in the desired trailer tires and
the sensors must be paired to the truck. If the target trailer
requires more than the provided four sensors, additional
sensors can be purchased at an authorized Ram
dealership.
With the sensors installed and the trailer near or
connected to your Ram truck, initiate the pairing process
by entering the settings menu in the radio and selecting
trailer. Select the desired trailer profile to pair to, open the
“Tire Pressure” menu, and hit “Setup All Tires”
Ú page 226.
NOTE:
The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing process is
complete.
Trailer Tire Pressure Settings
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SAFETY 313
Trailer Tire Pressure Pairing
Follow the on screen prompts to select the number of
axles (1 - 3), the number of trailer tires (2, 4, 6, 8, or 12),
and the set trailer tire pressure. The range is selectable
anywhere between 25-125 psi (172-862 kPa).
Once psi (kPa) is programmed, the pairing screen
appears. Tire sensors must be paired in order shown.
Starting with Tire 1, deflate tire by 5 psi (34 kPa) and wait
for a horn chirp. It may take up to three minutes for the
chirp to occur, indicating that the sensor has paired.
Repeat process on each tire, in order, until complete.
Do not exit the pairing screen until process is complete.
If pairing was unsuccessful, a double horn chirp will
sound, and a prompt on the touchscreen will allow you to
retry the procedure; “Retry” will only appear when setup
fails. Each tire must be successfully paired during a single
pairing process to receive the success screen.
NOTE:
If the pairing process times out after three minutes of no
communication with a sensor, a double horn chip will
occur indicating the pairing has failed and a message will
display on the radio indicating the process was unsuc-
cessful. Under certain circumstances, the double horn
chirp may continue to happen every three minutes indi-
cating the failed pairing. If this happens, the horn chirping
may be canceled by cycling the ignition button OFF and
then back to RUN position.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Pressure
Warnings
When a tire pressure low in one or more of the active road
tires is detected, the instrument cluster will display a
message stating “Trailer Tire Pressure Low”. The
instrument cluster will then display the TTPMS graphic
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
pressure values in a different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in
a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the
customer programmed target tire pressure value as
shown at the top of the TTPMS instrument cluster graphic.
Once the tire(s) are inflated, the system will automatically
update the graphic display in the instrument cluster,
returning to its original color. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TTPMS to receive the updated information.
Service TTPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster will
display a “Trailer Tire Pressure System Service Required”
message for a minimum of five seconds.
Once the system fault is corrected the "Trailer Tire
Pressure System Service Required" message will no
longer be displayed. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 10 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TTPMS to receive the trailer tire pressure information.
Trailer Tire Pressure Monitoring System Not Configured
A “Trailer Tire Pressure System Not Configured” message
will be displayed in the instrument cluster on the TTPMS
instrument cluster graphic when a trailer number is
selected that has not had trailer tire pressure sensors
paired. To correct this condition, see
Ú page 226.
Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active Trailer
The “Trailer Sensors Detected Do Not Match Active
Trailer” message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster when the trailer sensors being received by the
TTPMS module do not match the trailer sensors paired to
the current trailer number selected. This message will be
displayed when the sensors being received completely
match the sensors paired to another trailer number
configured in the TTPMS module.
To correct this condition, the correct trailer number must
be selected in the radio
Ú page 226.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SAFETY
System Limitations
The TTPMS may have difficulty transmitting through
steel-walled tires or on trailers longer than 30 ft. It is
recommended to use standard tires and trailers less than
30 ft long to avoid dropouts or difficulty when pairing.
NOTE:
The vehicle may not be driven until the pairing process is
complete.
Tire Fill Alert
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the tire.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the Tire Fill
Alert feature through use of the customer settings in the
radio.
NOTE:
Only one tire can be filled at a time when using the Tire
Fill Alert system.
The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the system is
in deactivation mode (if equipped).
The system will be activated when the system detects an
increase of tire pressure, while filling the fire. The ignition
must be in the RUN mode, with the transmission in PARK
(P).
NOTE:
It is not required to have the engine running to enter Tire
Fill Alert mode.
The Hazard Warning Flashers will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
If the Hazard Warning Flashers do not come on while
inflating the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in an
inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor signal
from being received. In this case, the vehicle may need to
be moved slightly forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once to let the user know when to
stop filling the tire, when it reaches recommended
pressure.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overfilled
and will continue to chirp every five seconds if the user
continues to inflate the tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough air is let
out to reach proper inflation level.
The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is then
underinflated and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to deflate the tire.
NOTE:
After use, the TFA feature will NOT remain active after
ignition shut down. The feature will need to be re-enabled
when the vehicle is restarted
Ú page 226.
SELECTABLE TIRE FILL ALERT (STFA)
The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an optional
feature that is included as part of the normal Tire Fill Alert
system. The system is designed to allow the customer to
select a pressure to inflate or deflate the vehicle's front
and rear axle tires to and to provide feedback to the
customer while inflating or deflating the vehicle's tires.
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is located
in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, the customer
will be able to select a pressure setting for both the front
and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling through a
pressure range from XX to 15 psi in 1 psi increments for
each axle setting. XX = the vehicle’s cold placard pressure
values for the front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle
placard pressure label.
NOTE:
The Tire Fill Alert feature disables every time the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. The feature must be
re-enabled through the radio each time the ignition is
placed back in the ON/RUN position
Ú page 226.
The customer may also store the pressure values chosen
for each axle in the radio as a preset pressure. The
customer will be allowed to store up to two sets of preset
values in the radio for the front and rear axle pressure
values.
Once the customer selects the tire pressures for the front
and rear axles that they want to inflate or deflate to, they
can begin inflating or deflating one tire at a time.
NOTE:
The STFA system will only support inflating or deflating one
tire at a time.
The customer may choose to disable or enable the STFA
feature through use of the TFA settings in the radio. If STFA
appears grayed out it must be turned on prior to selecting.
In order to use STFA, the Tire Fill Alert feature must be
enabled through the radio
Ú page 226.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SAFETY 315
The system will be activated when the TPMS receiver
module detects a change in tire pressure. The ignition
must be in the RUN mode, with the transmission in
PARK (P).
The Hazard Warning Flashers will come on to confirm the
vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode.
If the Hazard Warning Flashers do not come on while
inflating or deflating the tire, the TPMS sensor may be in
an inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle may
need to be moved slightly forward or backward.
When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire pressure
display screen will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
Operation:
The horn will chirp once when the selected pressure is
reached to let the user know when to stop inflating or
deflating the tire.
The horn will chirp three times if the tire is overinflated
or over deflated and will continue to chirp every five
seconds if the user continues to inflate or deflate the
tire.
The horn will chirp once again when enough air is
added or removed to reach proper selected pressure
level.
Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)
3500 Series Trucks
Your vehicle may be equipped with a TPIS.
The TPIS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to transmit tire pressure
levels.
Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem
transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the tire
pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to
maintain the proper pressure.
The TPIS consists of the following components:
Receiver module
Four TPMS sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW)
applications)
Six TPMS sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW)
applications)
Pressure display in the instrument cluster
The TPIS will display all four (Single Rear Wheel (SRW)
applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) applications)
tire pressure values in the instrument cluster display.
If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster will
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum
of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no
longer exists, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no
longer be displayed, and a pressure value will display in
place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any
of the following:
Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies
as the TPMS sensors.
Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle
are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SAFETY
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear
seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly must be secured in the appropriate child
restraint or belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position
Ú page 330.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint
Ú page 330.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front air
bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle
has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air
bags will inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, see
Ú page 449 for customer service contact
information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection
and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is
in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in
the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a
few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START
or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are
buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when an outboard front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SAFETY 317
(Continued)
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is
unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and
sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The
BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle
speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat
passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should
instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles
their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items
are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when
the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an authorized
dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating
BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver
and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Mega Cab and Crew Cab
front center seating position have combination lap/
shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you
under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of
the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the
driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or
not an air bag is also provided at their seating posi-
tion to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in
the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a single seat
belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
WARNING!
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for
vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grab the latch
plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat
belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury
in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat
belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to
an authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal inju-
ries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you prop-
erly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to
hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat
belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced imme-
diately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt
system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if
you have questions regarding seat belt or retractor
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care
Program facility for inspection.
WARNING!
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SAFETY 319
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the
latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt webbing
180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately
above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, the top
of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward
to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer
the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you
are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you release the
anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure
that it is locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped
with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder
belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position
without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SAFETY
First Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions (Regular Cab Only)
The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only) features a
seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows
the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the
seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
can then be stored out of the way in the seat for added
convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied.
1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate
from its stowed position on the seat.
Connect Mini-Latch To Mini-Buckle
Mini-Latch And Mini-Buckle Connected
2. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over
the seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
“click.”
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to
go around your lap.
6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the
lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the seat belt in a collision.
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The
retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle.
10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate
into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat
belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch
plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer
internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the
seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SAFETY 321
(Continued)
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
First Row Center Lap Belt Operating
Instructions — If Equipped
The center seating position for the Mega Cab and Crew
Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle the lap belt,
slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."
To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull.
To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear
the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back and upright in
the seat, then adjust the seat belt as tightly as is
comfortable.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, an authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only
if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat
Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it
must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if
they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and
across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place
the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an occu-
pant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper
restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a colli-
sion.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat belt
system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occu-
pant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a colli-
sion. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap
belt is not long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and store the
Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
WARNING!
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SAFETY
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack
from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices
may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt
placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are
single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed
air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped with an
Energy Management feature that may help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt
system has a retractor assembly that is designed to
release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 339.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR
and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt
webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat
belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in
this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the
buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly
restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SAFETY 323
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this section may
be standard equipment on some models, or may be
optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask an
authorized dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a
collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
associated with the electrical Air Bag System
Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors — If Equipped
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the readiness of the electronic parts
of the air bag system whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC
position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may
deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power
or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/
RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning
Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any
part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,
either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial
startup.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures
in the Service Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SAFETY
(Continued)
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the
instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the
four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in
the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related
gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument
panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on
until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer
service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light, see
Ú page 115.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for
both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are
a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver
front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering
wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air
bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument
panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front air bag deployment could cause
serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SAFETY 325
(Continued)
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
2500 Series Truck
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
3500 Series Truck
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver
and front passenger air bags. This system provides output
appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags
are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side,
or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce
substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little
vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in
position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) detects a
collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to
inflate the front air bags.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
WARNING!
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel or steering wheel because
any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in
a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-
sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your
seat belts even though you have air bags.
WARNING!
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SAFETY
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel separate and fold
out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The
front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink
your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front
occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) are
located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs
are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or
on the seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard
side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are
at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs)
are located above the side windows. The trim covering the
SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other injuries
to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows.
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if
they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SAFETY 327
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain side impact events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain side
impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
the ORC in determining the appropriate response to
impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side
Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left
side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a
right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled
or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are designed to
activate in certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether deployment in a
particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is
not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and
seat belt pretensioners should have deployed.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other
cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows
where the SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not
install any accessory items in your vehicle which
could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that
require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up against or
very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or
killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate)
are necessary for your protection in all collisions.
They also help keep you in position, away from an
inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from
the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat
belts properly and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a
child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for
the size of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the center
of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air
Bags.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will not
deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in progress and
whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the
vehicle experiences a rollover or near rollover event, and
deployment is appropriate, the rollover sensing system will
deploy the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on
both sides of the vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete
ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in
certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the
internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors — If Equipped
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately
after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions.
This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction
rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet
or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact
with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally
heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed signifi-
cantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering,
see your doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irrita-
tion, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed.
If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not
be in place to protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) will determine whether to have the
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat
belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint
Controller System serviced as well.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SAFETY 329
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or for 15 minutes from the inter-
vention of the Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any of these
other functions in response to the Enhanced Accident
Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC Blower
Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to the
STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the
ignition switch to avoid draining the battery. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment
and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel
tank before resetting the system and starting the engine.
If there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle elec-
trical devices (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset the
system by following the procedure described below. If you
have any doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system
and starting the engine.
After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must be
towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected and to have
the Enhanced Accident Response System reset.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag system could
cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do
not modify the components or wiring, including
adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering
wheel hub trim cover or the upper passenger side of
the instrument panel. Do not modify the front fascia/
bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag
system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on
your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your trim cover
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way
(including removal or loosening/tightening of seat
attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities, contact an
authorized dealer.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SAFETY
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the acceler-
ator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of personally identi-
fying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call:
1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s
website for additional information: https://
tc.canada.ca/en/road-transportation/
child-car-seat-safety
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold
even an infant on your lap could become so great that
you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you
are. The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a
proper restraint for the child’s size.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SAFETY 331
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in
the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach
either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach
the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often
have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by
children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still
less than at least two years old. Children should remain
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who have
not reached the height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint,
facing rearward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness,
facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing child
restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat
belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt,
seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have outgrown the
height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can
cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front
seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child
restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have
a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SAFETY
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their
rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing
in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who are over two years old or who have outgrown
the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a
forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as
possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the
seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat.
The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support
leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not
designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car
seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it
was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your
child may be more severely injured as a result.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or
remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in
the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could
strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious
personal injury.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SAFETY 333
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over
the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat while the child is still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a
booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear both
the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage
system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle
anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats.
There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top
tether anchorage located behind the seating position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped
child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no
lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt
must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the
child restraint. Please see the following table for more
information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab LATCH Positions
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors +
Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lb (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lb (29.5 kg) X
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SAFETY 335
Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions Mega Cab LATCH Positions
Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lb (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined
weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lb (29.5
kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65
lb (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used
together to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if
allowed by the booster seat manufacturer. See your
booster seat owner’s manual for more information.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SAFETY
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using
the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the outboard
seating positions?
N/A – Regular Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab Split Bench
No – Crew Cab Full Bench rear seat
Regular Cab Front / Crew Cab with full bench rear seat:
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat
in the center seating position.
Crew Cab with split bench rear seat / Mega Cab: Child
restraints can be installed using the supplied lower
anchorages for the center seating position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a common
lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child
restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated
LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child
seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the
front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger
seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in every rear seating
position if they interfere with the installation of the child
restraint
Ú page 36.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SAFETY 337
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats (Driver Side)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Regular Cab models have tether strap
anchorages behind the front center and right
seats. Mega Cab and Crew Cab models have
tether strap anchorages located behind each
of the rear seats.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
Crew Cab Outboard Tether Anchorage
Crew Cab Center Tether Anchorage With Head Restraint In
Raised Position
1 — Tether Anchor
2 — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SAFETY
Mega Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped
with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will
have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage.
Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The
tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is
attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Regular Cab Or Crew Cab Full Bench Rear Seat: No Lower
Center LATCH Anchorages Available
Crew Cab Split Bench Rear Seat Or Mega Cab Rear Seat:
Center LATCH Anchorages Available
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See
Ú page 339 to
check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages
for that seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or raise the
head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the
rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most
position to make room for the child seat. You may
also move the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
WARNING!
Do not install a child restraint in the center position
using the LATCH system. This position is not
approved for installing child seats using the LATCH
attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether
anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
position.
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. For typical installation
instructions, see
Ú page 338.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. For typical installation
instructions, see
Ú page 338.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SAFETY 339
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected
seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to
the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 342 for
directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat.
Remove slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child
restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used
by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle
the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach.
If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint
installation, instead of buckling it behind the child
restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint
belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
Regular Cab
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor. See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 322 for additional information on ALR.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH
anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SAFETY
Crew Cab And Mega Cab
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing
out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor. See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 322 for additional information on ALR. The
cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of
the seat belt tight when webbing is pulled tight and
straight through a child restraint’s belt path.
Please see the table below and the following sections for
more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Mega Cab/Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Cinching Latch plate — Cinching Latch plate
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward-facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward-facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SAFETY 341
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
1.
For Mega And Crew Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating posi-
tion. If the second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint (if ad-
justable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room
for the child seat. You may also move the front seat
forward to allow more room for the child seat.
For Regular Cab Models
Place the child seat in the center of the seating posi-
tion. Move the vehicle seat as far rearward as possi-
ble to keep the child as far from the passenger air bag
as possible.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part
of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means
the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any
webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes
The head restraints can be removed in
every rear seating position if they interfere
with the installation of the child restraint
Ú page 36.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Yes – Cinching Latch Plate
No – ALR
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted up
to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk
in a seating position with an ALR retractor.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint.
The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SAFETY
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. For directions to attach a tether anchor,
see
Ú page 342.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in
vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. If the second row seat can be reclined, you
may recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the child seat.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear
a “click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the
tether strap. See
Ú page 342 for directions to attach
a tether anchor.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens,
disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the
short buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release
button facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat
steps 4 to 6, above, to complete the installation of the
child restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly secure a
child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The
child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to
any location in front of the car seat, including the seat
frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position, located
behind the top of the vehicle seat. For the location of
approved tether anchorages in your vehicle, see
Ú page 334.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SAFETY 343
Regular And Mega Cab Trucks:
In the regular cab truck, the top tether
anchorages are located behind the center and
right passenger seats. In the mega cab truck,
the top tether anchorages are located behind
each rear seating position. There is a plastic cover over
each anchorage. To attach the tether strap of the child
restraint:
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back,
under the head restraint and to the tether anchor
directly behind the seat.
Regular Cab Tether Anchorages
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether
strap should go between the head restraint posts
underneath the head restraint. You may need to
adjust the head restraint to the upward position to
pass the tether strap underneath the head restraint
and between its posts.
3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
the square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten the
tether strap according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
Crew Cab Trucks:
The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are
tether strap loops located between the rear
glass and the back of the rear seat. There is a
tether strap loop located behind each seating
position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether strap
of the child restraint.
Right Or Left Outboard Seats:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear
seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
Head Restraint In Raised Position
Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint
In Raised Position
1 — Tether Anchor
2 — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air
bag. A deploying Passenger Front Air Bag can cause
death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 SAFETY
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back,
under the head restraint, through the tether strap
loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop
behind the center seat.
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, through the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the center tether strap
loop.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And
Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop
NOTE:
If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left and
right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks of both
child seats should be connected to the center tether strap
loop. This is the correct way to tether two outboard child
seats.
Center Seat:
1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear
seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position
2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back,
under the head restraint, through the tether strap
loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop
behind either the right or left outboard seat.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
SAFETY 345
3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint
behind the child seat, through the tether strap loop
behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard
tether strap loop.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (see
diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And Attached
To Outboard Tether Strap Loop
Installing Three Child Restraints:
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat.
Route the tether straps following the directions for
right and left seating positions, above.
2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop, but
do not tighten the straps yet.
3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route
the tether strap following the directions for the center
seating position, above.
4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.
5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions, tightening the right and
left tether straps before the center tether strap.
Outboard And Center Seating Positions Shown
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 SAFETY
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a
collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
belts.
CONNECTED VEHICLES
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot
be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Radio Instruction Manual or
“Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”
Ú page 124.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding the seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility for
inspection.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
mode. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with
a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
been detected. It will stay on until the fault is removed.
If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
immediately
Ú page 315.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
See an authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. Only use
a floor mat that does not interfere with the operation of the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat
that is securely attached using the floor mat fasteners so
it cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehi-
cles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible
outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may
be possible that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle
control could occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
SAFETY 347
(Continued)
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nuts/bolt torque for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked
floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause
your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a
regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before installing
any other floor mat. NEVER install or stack
an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly
attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s
side floor area. To check for interference, with the
vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully
depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch
pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal,
or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the
passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into
the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is
moving. Objects can become trapped under acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss
of vehicle control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g.,
towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the
position of the floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING!
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor
and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the
vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for
interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap and water
to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check
your floor mat has been properly installed and is
secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING!
6
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight parking for
fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel or brake fluid leaks are
suspected, the cause should be located and corrected
immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move your
vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set
at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow these precautions to prevent carbon monoxide
poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle
is stopped in an open area with the engine running
for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation
system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal condi-
tions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all
side windows fully open.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
349
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on the
upper switch bank just below the radio.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a 12–inch Uconnect
display, the Hazard Warning Flashers button is located
above the display.
Hazard Warning Flashers Button
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
When the button is activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an
emergency. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion. Use only when your
vehicle is disabled or signaling a safety hazard warning for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning Flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning Flashers may wear
down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the overhead console may contain an ASSIST
and an SOS button. Depending on the vehicles trim level,
the overhead console may vary.
Assist And SOS Buttons
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
7
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Assist And SOS Buttons
NOTE:
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only function if you
are connected to an operable 4G (data) network, which
comes as a built in feature. Other services will only be
operable if your SiriusXM Guardian™ or Ram Connect
service is active and you are connected to an operable
4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST button is used to automatically connect you to
any one of the following support centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the ASSIST button to connect to
someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional
fees may apply for roadside assistance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care – In-vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian™ (if equipped).
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
vehicle issues.
Ram Connect Customer Care (if equipped) – Total
support for Radio, Phone and NAV issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, there will be
a 10 second delay before the SOS Call system initiates a
call to an SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console or press the cancellation button on the Device
Screen. Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the green
LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and SOS
buttons on the overhead console will turn green once
a connection to an SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and an SOS
operator is made, the SOS Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to an SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed an SOS Call.
The vehicle brand.
The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 351
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
rized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
SOS Call system and the SOS operator, the SOS
operator may be able to open a voice connection
with the vehicle to determine if additional help is
needed. Once the SOS operator opens a voice
connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the
operator should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in
the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system will
attempt to remain connected with the SOS oper-
ator until the SOS operator terminates the connec-
tion.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with
important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico
DO NOT have SOS Call system
capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico may not
answer or respond to SOS system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
The overhead console light located within the ASSIST
and SOS buttons will continuously illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following message:
“Vehicle Device Requires Service. Please contact an
authorized dealer.”
An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle Device
Requires Service. Please contact an authorized
dealer.”
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire
or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or
location), do not wait for voice contact from an Emer-
gency Services Agent. All occupants should exit the
vehicle immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s oper-
able network and GPS antennas. You could prevent
operable network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal reception is
required for the SOS Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s
electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This
may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to
initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that
can cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio,
CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s elec-
trical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle.
IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY
REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT OR RAM CONNECT
FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS,
WILL NOT OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not
there to help protect you.
WARNING!
Ignoring the overhead console light could mean you
will not have SOS Call services. If the overhead
console light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the SOS Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the
Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a
malfunction in any part of the system is detected.
If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint
Control system immediately.
7
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the SOS
Call system operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
The SOS Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-
nected during a vehicle crash.
4G (data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite
signals are unavailable or obstructed.
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator facility.
Operator error by the SOS operator.
4G (data) network congestion.
Weather.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by
the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 4G (data)
and GPS antennas. You could prevent 4G (data) and
GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. An operable 4G (data)
network connection and a GPS signal is required for
the SOS Call system to function properly.
Automatic SOS — If Equipped
Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that can
immediately connect you with help in the event that your
vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to your provided
radio supplement for complete information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension system,
there is a feature which allows the automatic leveling to be
disabled to assist with changing a tire.
This feature can be activated through the Uconnect
system
Ú page 244.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the steering
wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on
a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be
jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slip-
pery areas.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 353
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the transmission into PARK (P).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For example, if the
driver’s front wheel is being changed, block the
passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked Example
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the
vehicle is being raised or lifted.
JACK LOCATION
The jack and tools are stored under the front passenger
seat.
REMOVAL OF JACK AND TOOLS
To access the jack and tools, you must remove the plastic
access cover located on the side of the front passenger’s
seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part of the cover
(closest to the front of the seat) toward you to release a
locking tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the
cover toward the front of the seat until it is free from the
seat frame.
Jack Access Cover
Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt
counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide the
assembly out from under the seat.
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools
Remove the jack and tools from the bracket assembly.
Turn the jack turn-screw counterclockwise to release jack
from bracket assembly.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
7
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jacking Tools
There are two ways to assemble the tools:
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising
Assembled For Jack Operation
Assembled For Jack Operation
REMOVING THE SPARE TIRE
1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up
the truck. Attach the lug wrench to the extension
tubes with the curved angle facing away from the
vehicle. Insert the extension tubes through the
access hole between the lower tailgate and the
top of the fascia/bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube.
Winch Mechanism Tube
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
CAUTION!
The lug wrench can only be attached to extension
two (2).
When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism be
sure the large flared end opening on extension four
(4) is positioned correctly over the winch mechanism
adjusting nut.
Damage to the lug wrench, extensions and winch
mechanism may occur from improper tool assembly.
1 — Lug Wrench
2 — Extension 2
3 — Extension 3
4 — Extension 4
5 — Jack Driver
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them in
the original carrier and location. While driving you may
experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration or sharp
turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or other objects in the
vehicle may move around with force, resulting in
serious injury.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 355
Inserting The Extension Tubes Into The Access Hole
2. Rotate the lug wrench handle counterclockwise until
the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable
slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.
Pulling The Spare Tire Out
3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain
access to the spare tire retainer.
4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.
Removing The Retainer
5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.
NOTE:
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and can damage the winch.
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
raised.
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful
of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
7
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Warning Label
Lug Wrench Adapter Location
See the following steps for proper jacking and tire
removal:
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from
storage.
2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the
wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground. Changing a
dually tire requires the lug wrench adapter.
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with hub caps/wheel covers
they must be removed before raising the vehicle off the
ground
Ú page 360.
Lug Wrench Adapter
Lug Wrench Adapter And Wrench
3. Place the assembled jack and tools into the jacking
position.
NOTE:
Placement for the front and rear jacking locations are
critical. Keep the jack and tools aligned while raising the
vehicle to prevent tool damage. See the following images
for proper jacking locations.
Jack / Extensions Placement
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 357
Front Jacking Location
When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack
driver to the jack and connect the jack driver to the
extension tubes. Place the jack under the axle as
close to the tire as possible with the drive tubes ex-
tending to the front. Connect the extension tubes and
lug wrench.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Jacking Location
When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack driv-
er to the jack and connect the jack driver to the exten-
sion tubes. Place the jack under the axle between the
spring and the shock absorber with the extension
tubes extending to the rear.
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
4. Connect the extension tubes and lug wrench.
5. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle
until the wheel just clears the surface.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that
the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and
adjust the jack position as required.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the
vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt
someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to
remove the tire.
7
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Remove the lug nuts and pull the wheel off. On Single
Rear Wheel (SRW) trucks, install the spare wheel and
lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel nuts
toward the wheel. On 3500 Dual Rear Wheel (DRW)
trucks, if the outer tire is being replaced then leave
the inner wheel on the vehicle. If the inner wheel is
being replaced remove the outer wheel and replace
the inner wheel. The wheel nuts are a two-piece
assembly with a flat face. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has
been lowered.
Rear Inner Wheel Proper Placement
(Dual Rear Wheel Equipped)
Dual Rear Wheel Jack Placement
7. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the lug
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice
Ú page 438. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
dealer or service station.
8. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel
center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in
cap damage.
9. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the
replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.
NOTE:
The bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumb-
wheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack driver
in order to lower the jack.
10. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE:
Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not
substitute with chrome plated lug nuts.
TO STOW THE FLAT OR SPARE
1. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position
it properly across the wheel opening.
2. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/bumper
facing outward. Push the end of the winch’s cable,
spring and steel sleeve through the back of the road
wheel. Making sure the valve stem is facing the
ground when the wheel is stowed.
Reinstalling The Retainer
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop, could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 359
3. Lay the wheel flat after the retainer is installed.
4. Attach the lug wrench to the extension tubes with the
curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert the
extensions through the access hole between the
lower tailgate and the top of the fascia/bumper and
into the winch mechanism tube.
Stowing The Flat Or Spare
5. Rotate the lug wrench handle clockwise until the
wheel is drawn into place against the underside of
the vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch
mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot
be overtightened. Push against the tire several times
to ensure it is firmly in place.
NOTE:
Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immediately.
REINSTALLING THE JACK AND TOOLS
1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tools into bracket assembly.
Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the
jack turn-screw. Snap tools into bracket assembly
clips. Install the jack into bracket assembly and turn
the jack turn-screw clockwise until jack is snug into
bracket assembly.
Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly
3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the
storage position holding the jack by the jack
turn-screw, slip the jack and tools under the seat so
that the bottom slot engages into the fastener on the
floor.
Jack Hold Down Fastener
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the jack
extension tubes only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle.
Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the
places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
7
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly slides into
the front hold down location.
4. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor
pan. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools
HUB CAPS/WHEEL COVERS —
I
F EQUIPPED
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
off the ground.
For 2500/3500 Single Rear Wheel (SRW) models, use the
flat end of the lug wrench to hook and pull off the hub cap.
Find the opening in the hub cap, insert the lug wrench, and
pull off the cap. If you need to pry against the wheel,
protect the wheel surface.
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Hub Cap
On 3500 models with Dual Rear Wheels (DRW), you must
first remove the hub caps—use the procedure noted for
the single rear wheel. For the wheel covers (wheel skins),
insert the flat end of the lug wrench between the outer
edge of the wheel cover and the wheel. Pry against the
wheel to remove the wheel cover. Repeat this procedure
around the wheel until the cover pops off.
Lug Wrench Insertion Location — Wheel Cover
Replace the wheel covers using a rubber mallet to ease
the installation. Align the wheel cover vent holes to the
wheel vent holes. Tap on the wheel cover as needed to
firmly seat it evenly around the wheel.
CAUTION!
Use extreme caution when removing the front and rear
wheel covers. Damage can occur to the center cap
and/or the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used. A
pulling motion, not a pry off motion, is recommended to
remove the caps.
CAUTION!
Use a pulling motion to remove the hub cap. Do not
use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap,
damage to the hub cap; finish may occur.
The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pull
off notches. Make sure that the hook of the jack
handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch
before attempting to pull off.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 361
(Continued)
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jump
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle, or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly,
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions.
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the driver side headlight
assembly.
If you have a diesel engine, you may have two batteries,
jump start off the driver side battery.
Battery Location
If equipped, the positive battery post may be covered with
a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump
directly off positive post which has a positive
(+) symbol on
or around the post.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic
transmission into PARK and turn the ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach apply the
parking brake, make sure the ignition is OFF.
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It
could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other
booster source with a system voltage greater than
12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING!
7
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable to
the positive
(+)
post of the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative
(-) end of the jumper cable to
the negative
(-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground. A “ground” is an
exposed metallic/unpainted part of the engine, frame
or chassis, such as an accessory bracket or large bolt.
The ground must be away from the battery and the
fuel injection system.
Jump Starting Label
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, see the following discon-
nection procedure.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative
(-) post of the booster
battery.
3. Disconnect the positive
(+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive
(+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive
(+) post of the vehicle
with the discharged battery, and reinstall the
protective cap over the positive
(+) post.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system
inspected at an authorized dealer.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
6–SPEED TRANSMISSION
If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following
procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post
of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses on the
positive battery terminal. The resulting electrical
current will blow the fuse.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use
(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery
will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 363
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access
port (ringed circle) on the bottom of the steering
column, and push and hold the override release lever
up.
Gear Selector Override Access Port Location
Gear Selector Override Access Port
Engaging The Access Port
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
8–SPEED TRANSMISSION
To push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a depleted
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
To activate the Manual Park Release see the following
steps:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
Manual Park Release access cover, which is just
above the parking brake release handle, below and to
the left of the steering column.
Manual Park Release Access Cover
3. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the Manual
Park Release lever locking tab (just below the middle
of the lever) to the right.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the parking
brake before activating the Manual Park Release. In
addition, you should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual Park
Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not
secured by the parking brake, or by proper connection
to a tow vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
7
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever
rearward, until it locks in place pointing towards the
driver's seat. Release the locking tab and verify that
the Manual Park Release lever is locked in the
released position.
Manual Park Release Tether
5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its
original position, until the locking tab snaps into place
to secure the lever.
3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever
is locked in its stowed position.
Manual Park Release Tether In Stowed Position
4. Reinstall the access cover.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be serviced by
an authorized dealer.
Potential signs of vehicle overheating:
Temperature gauge is at HOT (H)
Strong smell of coolant
White smoke coming from engine or exhaust
Coolant bottle coolant has bubbles present
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you
see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not
open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when
the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 365
If the temperature gauge is moving towards or close to the
HOT (H) position, you can reduce the potential for
overheating by taking the appropriate action.
On highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the engine idle speed
while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes.
Turn off the A/C. The A/C system adds heat to the
engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help
remove this heat.
Turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the
mode control to floor and the blower control to high.
This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to
the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine
cooling system.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can
often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering
wheel right and left to clear the area around the front
wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R), while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels
or racing the engine.
NOTE:
For trucks equipped with an 8–speed transmission,
shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less.
Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL (N)
for more than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF” mode,
before rocking the vehicle
Ú page 297. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF button again
to restore “ESC On” mode.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H),
and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even
failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel,
no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the
engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for
at least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the
risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts
to free a stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between
DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may
result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmis-
sion shifting occurring).
7
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described on
Ú page 219.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with the Air Suspension System Ú page 155 must be placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. If the vehicle
cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault
codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment
manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to fascia/
bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws
regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
mode, not the ACC mode.
If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle's battery is
discharged, find instructions on shifting the transmission
out of PARK
Ú page 363.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE
NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK
Transfer case in N (Neutral)
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 367
TWO-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with all four
wheels
OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission
is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear wheels
OFF the ground) under the following conditions:
The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). Instructions
on shifting the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) when the
engine is off
Ú page 363.
The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km)
for 8–speed transmission.
The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km)
for 6–speed transmission.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear wheels
OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed are as follows:
The front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a
towing dolly
Using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the
front wheels in the straight position with the rear
wheels raised when and the front wheels
ON the
ground.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE MODELS
FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite
end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if the
remaining wheels are on the ground). Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the approved
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper
towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
7
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS —
I
F EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the
front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the
vehicle.
Front Tow Hooks
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident
Response System.
This feature is a communication network that takes effect
in the event of an impact Ú page 328.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record data that
will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed under certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle
Ú page 330.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks.
Tow straps may become disengaged, causing
serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks for tow
truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
369
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. This system will alert you when it is time
to change your engine oil by displaying the words
“Oil Change Due” in your instrument cluster display. The
engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
depending on your personal driving style. Failure to
change the engine oil per the maintenance schedule can
result in internal engine damage.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than
an authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under instrument cluster
display
Ú page 104.
For gasoline engines, under no circumstances should oil
change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever
comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is
generally only a concern for fleet customers.
For diesel engines, under no circumstances should oil
change intervals exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or
12 months, whichever comes first or sooner if prompted
by the oil change indicator system.
NOTE:
It is recommended that every 3,000 miles (4,800 km),
check the engine oil level at least 30 minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
Severe service (high ambient temperature, short trips,
heavy loading, trailer towing, off-road, or law enforce-
ment use) may reduce oil change intervals.
For Diesel Engines, configured with optional B20
capability are operated with greater than 5% levels of
biodiesel, the oil change interval must not exceed
12,500 miles (20,000 km) or 400 hours, whichever
comes first under any circumstances. See the Fuel
Requirements section for more information regarding
operation with biodiesel blend (B6-B20) fuel meeting
ASTM specification D-7467.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items may
result in damage to the vehicle.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Perform Service Indicator — Diesel Engine
Your vehicle will require emissions maintenance at a set
interval. To help remind you when this maintenance is
due, the instrument cluster will display “Perform Service”.
When the “Perform Service” message is displayed on the
instrument cluster it is necessary to have the emissions
maintenance performed. Emissions maintenance may
include replacing the Closed Crankcase Ventilation (CCV)
filter element. The procedure for clearing and resetting the
“Perform Service” indicator message is located in the
appropriate Service Information.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and power steering and fill as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
At Each Oil Change
Change the engine oil and filter.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular
wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on.
Inspect the batteries, and clean and tighten the
terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and
parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Inspect front end, and lubricate — If equipped with
serviceable fittings.
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or
off-road conditions. If required, replace engine air
cleaner filter.
Inspect and replace the Evaporative System Fresh Air
Filter as necessary, replacement may be more frequent
if vehicle is operated in extreme dusty conditions.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all
receipts.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge pivot
joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 371
MAINTENANCE PLAN — GASOLINE ENGINE
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change engine oil.
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first.
Additional Inspections
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces. If gear
oil leakage is suspected, check the fluid level. If
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road
or frequent trailer towing, change axle fluid.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as necessary. X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake as necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X X
Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any
of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
X X
Change the transfer case fluid. X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 373
MAINTENANCE PLAN — DIESEL ENGINE
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
Change engine oil every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km) or 12 months or
500 Hours or sooner if prompted by
the oil change indicator system,
whichever comes first.
X X X X X X X X X X
Additional Inspections
Check the Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)
tank, refill if necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Rotate the tires. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front end, and lubricate —
If equipped with serviceable fittings.
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect engine air cleaner filter,
replace if necessary.
1
X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod
ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks
and all parts for damage, wear,
improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings. X X X X X X
Inspect and adjust parking brake. X X X X X X
Inspect drive belt; replace as
necessary.
X X X X X X
Inspect wheel bearings. X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 miles (19,000 km).
Replace the engine fuel filter. X X X X X X X X X X
Replace the chassis mounted fuel
filter.
X X X X X X X X X X
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 375
Inspect the front and rear axle
surfaces. If gear oil leakage is
suspected, check the fluid level. If
using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing
change the axle fluid.
X X X X X X
Inspect the transfer case fluid (4x4),
change for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
X X X X X
Change the transfer case fluid (4x4). X X
Change automatic transmission fluid
(AS69RC transmission only).
X X X X
Change automatic transmission fluid
and sump filter (AS69RC transmission
only).
X X
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any
of the following: police, fleet, or
frequent trailer towing (68RFE
transmission only).
X X
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter(s).
X
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replace Crankcase Ventilation
Filter (CCV).
X X
Flush and replace power steering fluid. X
Flush and replace engine coolant. *** X
1. Under no circumstances should the engine air cleaner filter exceed 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months, whichever comes first.
Mileage Or Time Passed
(Whichever Comes First):
7,500
15,000
22,500
30,000
37,500
45,000
52,500
60,000
67,500
75,000
82,500
90,000
97,500
105,000
112,500
120,000
127,500
135,000
142,500
150,000
Or Months: 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120
Or Kilometers:
12,000
24,000
36,000
48,000
60,000
72,000
84,000
96,000
108,000
120,000
132,000
144,000
156,000
168,000
180,000
192,000
204,000
216,000
228,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and affect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
CAUTION!
***The manufacturer highly recommends that all cooling system service, maintenance, and repairs be performed by your local authorized dealer.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 377
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
1 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 6 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Battery
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE — 6-SPEED 68RFE
1 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 8 — Battery
3 — Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap 9 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 10 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Oil Fill 11 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
6 — Engine Oil Dipstick 12 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 379
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE — 6-SPEED AS69RC HD
1 — Battery 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 8 — Battery
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Reservoir 9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5 — Engine Oil Dipstick 11 — Power Steering Reservoir Cap
6 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 12 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low end of
the range and MAX at the high end of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the MIN
and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 qt (1 L) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the dipstick range will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and the fluid
level should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator
antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for
a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield
washer solution used with water as directed on the
container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, and periodic
maintenance is not required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your
engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must
be exercised when filling or working around the washer
solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over
a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large
amounts of water
Ú page 361.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a
booster battery or any other booster source with an
output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 381
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high pressure
washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel,
special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner.
Service Manuals are available which include detailed
service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service
Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may
void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection — Gasoline Engine
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 446.
NOTE:
Hemi engines (6.4L) at times can tick right after startup
and then quiet down after approximately 30 seconds. This
is normal and will not harm the engine. This characteristic
can be caused by short drive cycles. For example, if the
vehicle is started then shut off after driving a short
distance. Upon restarting, you may experience a ticking
sound. Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for
an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended oil
changes or extended idling. If the engine continues to tick
or if the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on, see
the nearest authorized dealer.
Engine Oil Selection — Diesel Engine
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 446.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Approved Engine Oil
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified by the
API. The manufacturer only recommends API trademark
oils.
The API Starburst trademark certifies 0W-20,
0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40 and
5W-40 engine oil.
For diesel engines, oils with a high ash content
may produce damaging deposits on cylinder
head valves and/or after treatment system damage.
A maximum sulfated ash content of 1.00 mass % is
recommended for all oil used in the engine.
The same oil change interval is to be followed for synthetic
oil as for petroleum-based oil. Also, synthetic oil must
meet the same performance specifications as petroleum
oil.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the posi-
tive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal
posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all parts and
connections however, the pressure generated by these
machines is such that complete protection against
water ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor
vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the
knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take
your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Synthetic Engine Oils
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, only
use synthetic API approved engine oils.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the correct
API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity grade
numbers should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the
addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact an authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at
every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used for
replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar® certified filters
should be used. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter is
unavailable, only use filters that meet or exceed
SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Requirements.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 369.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
ensure most efficient service. Mopar® engine air cleaners
are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection And
Replacement — Gasoline Engine
NOTE:
When replacing the engine air cleaner filter on vehicles
equipped with a 6.4L gasoline engine, replace with a dry
(non-oiled) filter only.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. With suitable tool fully loosen (six) fasteners on
engine air cleaner filter cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious
personal injury.
1 — Fasteners
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 383
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Assembly
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly.
3. Tighten the fasteners (six) on the engine air cleaner
filter assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Diesel Engine
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Using a suitable tool, fully loosen (six) fasteners on
engine air cleaner filter cover.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover to access the
engine air cleaner filter.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the housing
assembly.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the engine air cleaner filter cover lid
screws or damage may result.
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2 — Screws
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if significant dirt or debris is
present before replacing the engine air cleaner filter.
1. Install the engine air cleaner into the housing
assembly with the engine air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto the
housing assembly locating tabs.
3. Tighten (6) screws to secure the engine air cleaner
filter cover to the housing assembly.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should
be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the
start of each warm season. This service should include
cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R-134a — (If Equipped)
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
rocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly substance.
The manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R-1234yf — (If Equipped)
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a Hydrofluo-
roolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-friendly substance with
a low global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be performed by
an authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter Replacement
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 369.
CAUTION!
Always observe the position of the trailer and
surroundings using the camera and mirrors to avoid
damage to the truck or trailer.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, for further warranty
information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury
or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any
repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be
done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air
conditioning components. Such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is
running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower
operating, the blower can contact hands and may
propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 385
The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure
to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
contents.
2. With the glove compartment door open, remove the
glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by
sliding the clip toward the face of the glove
compartment door. Lift the clip out of glove
compartment door and release into dash panel.
Right Side Of Glove Compartment
3. There are travel stops on both sides of the glove
compartment. Push inward on right side of the glove
compartment travel stop to disengage the stop. Then
pull the right of the glove compartment outward
(away from the hinge) to disengage the right side of
the compartment from the hinge. Continue by
removing the left side from the hinge by slightly
lowering the compartment while pulling outward until
it is completely disengaged from the hinge.
Glove Compartment
4. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the finger
tabs on each end of the filter cover.
Filter Cover
Filter Cover Removal
1 — Glove Compartment Door
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
1 — Finger Tabs
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
5. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
Cabin Air Filter
6. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, press on each end until you hear an audible
click.
7. Reinstall the glove compartment on the hinges.
8. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall the glove
compartment past the travel stops by pushing in on
the glove compartment sides.
Glove Compartment
NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and glove
compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
9. Reattach the glove compartment tension tether by
inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and
sliding the clip away from the face of the glove
compartment door.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT INSPECTION
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate
airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly
install the filter will result in the need to replace it more
often.
1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
3 — Glove Compartment Door
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt
with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is tempera-
ture controlled and can start at any time regardless
of ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving
fan blades.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 387
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that
run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are
considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not
normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be
replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive
wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from
belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)
Belt slips
Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct
position on pulley)
Belt broken (identify and correct problem before new
belt is installed)
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is
heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component
such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully
inspected for damage and proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the use of
special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced
at an authorized dealer.
DRAINING FUEL/WATER SEPARATOR
F
ILTER — DIESEL ENGINE
There are two fuel filter assemblies. One is located on the
driver's side of the engine. The best access to this water
drain valve is from under the hood. The second one is on
the under body, located in front of the rear axle above the
drive shaft. The best access to this water drain valve is
from under the vehicle.
If water is detected in the water separator while the engine
is running, or while the ignition switch is in the ON position,
the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will illuminate and an
audible chime will be heard five times. At this point you
should stop the engine and drain the water from both of
the filters.
If the Water In Fuel Indicator Light comes on and a single
chime is heard while you are driving, or with the ignition
switch in the ON position, there may be a problem with
your water separator wiring or sensor. See an authorized
dealer for service.
Upon proper draining of the water from both fuel filters,
the Water In Fuel Indicator Light will remain illuminated for
approximately 10 seconds. If the water was drained while
the engine was running, the Water In Fuel Indicator Light
may remain on for approximately three minutes.
NOTE:
Care should be taken in disposing of used fluids from your
vehicle. Used fluids, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact an autho-
rized dealer, service station, or government agency for
advice on recycling programs and for where used fluids
and filters can be properly disposed of in your area.
CAUTION!
Do not drain the fuel/water separator filter when the
engine is running.
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces.
Drain the filter into an appropriate container.
CAUTION!
If the Water In Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO NOT
START the engine before you drain water from the fuel
filters to avoid engine damage.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Drain the fuel/water separator filters when the Water In
Fuel Indicator Light is ON. Within 10 minutes of vehicle
shutdown, turn the engine mounted filter drain valve
(located on the side of the filter assembly)
counterclockwise 1/4 turn, and turn the under body
mounted filter drain valve (located on the bottom of the
filter assembly) counterclockwise 1 full turn. Then turn the
ignition switch to the ON position, and allow any
accumulated water to drain. Leave the drain valve open
until all water and contaminants have been removed.
When clean fuel is visible, close the drain valve following
these guidelines:
1. Rotate the drain clockwise to close until you feel
resistance from the internal seal.
2. Continue turning the drain 1/2 of a turn to properly
compress the seal.
NOTE:
Over-compression of the seal due to over-tightening of the
drain will damage the seal, cause a leak, and require the
entire sensor to be replaced.
3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
The sensor drain should not be over-tightened during
normal service operations to avoid internal damage and
future fuel leaks. The drain should be closed and secured
without the use of tools.
If more than a couple ounces/milliliters of fuel have been
drained, follow the directions
Ú page 390.
ENGINE MOUNTED FUEL FILTER
R
EPLACEMENT — DIESEL ENGINE
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufac-
turer's filtration and water separating requirements
can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
The engine mounted filter housing is equipped with a
No-Filter-No-Run (NFNR) feature. Engine will not run if:
No filter is installed.
Inferior/Non-approved filter is used. Use of OEM
filter is required to ensure vehicle will run.
Engine Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose.
3. Open the water drain valve a quarter turn counter-
clockwise and completely drain fuel and water into
the approved container.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench. Rotate
counterclockwise for removal. Remove used o-ring
and discard it.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the housing
and dispose of according to your local regulations.
1 — Drain Valve
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces.
Drain the filter into an appropriate container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new fuel
filter. There is a possibility debris could be introduced
into the fuel filter during this action. It is best to
install the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to
prime the fuel system.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 389
7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and
housing.
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the filter
housing and lubricate with clean engine oil.
9. Remove new filter cartridge from plastic bag and
install into housing.
NOTE:
Do not remove cartridge from bag until you reach this step
in order to keep cartridge clean.
10. Push down on the cartridge to ensure it is properly
seated.
Do not pre-fill the filter housing with fuel.
11. Install lid onto housing and tighten to 22.5 ft-lb
(30.5 Nm). Do not overtighten the lid.
12. Prime the engine, then start the engine and confirm
there are no leaks
Ú page 390.
UNDERBODY MOUNTED FUEL FILTER
R
EPLACEMENT — DIESEL ENGINE
NOTE:
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufac-
turer's filtration and water separating requirements
can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
The underbody mounted filter housing will cause the
engine not to run if no filter is installed.
Underbody Mounted Fuel Filter Assembly
1. Ensure engine is turned off.
2. Place drain pan under the fuel filter drain hose.
3. Open the water drain valve one full turn counter-
clockwise and completely drain fuel and water into
the approved container.
4. Close the water drain valve.
5. Remove lid using a socket or strap wrench. Rotate
counterclockwise for removal. Remove used o-ring
and discard it.
6. Remove the used filter cartridge from the housing
and dispose of according to your local regulations.
7. Wipe clean the sealing surfaces of the lid and
housing.
8. Install new o-ring back into ring groove on the filter
housing and lubricate with clean engine oil.
NOTE:
Water In Fuel (WIF) sensor is reusable. Service kit comes
with new o-ring for filter canister and WIF sensor.
1 — Drain Valve
CAUTION!
Diesel fuel will damage blacktop paving surfaces.
Drain the filter into an appropriate container.
Do not prefill the fuel filter when installing a new fuel
filter. There is a possibility debris could be introduced
into the fuel filter during this action. It is best to
install the filter dry and allow the in-tank lift pump to
prime the fuel system.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRIMING IF THE ENGINE HAS RUN OUT
O
F FUEL — DIESEL ENGINE
1. Add a substantial amount of fuel to the tank, approx-
imately 2 to 5 gal (8 L to 19 L).
2. Three priming cycles must be completed. Turn
ignition to the RUN position and wait approximately
30 seconds. This will activate the in tank fuel pump.
Turn the ignition switch to the off position, and leave
off for at least 30 seconds. Repeat this procedure
three times before cranking the engine.
3. Start the engine using the “Normal Starting”
procedure
Ú page 128.
4. Once the engine starts, allow the engine to idle for a
minimum of 30 seconds.
NOTE:
The engine may run rough until the air is forced from all
the fuel lines.
NOTE:
A maximum blend of 5% biodiesel, meeting ASTM spec-
ification D-975 may be used with your Cummins®
diesel engine.
A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel, meeting ASTM
specification D-7467 may be used with your
Cummins® diesel engine.
Use of biodiesel mixture in excess of 20% can nega-
tively impact the fuel filter's ability to separate water
from the fuel, resulting in high pressure fuel system
corrosion or damage.
Ethanol blends are not recommended or approved for
use with your Cummins® diesel engine.
In addition, commercially available fuel additives are
not necessary for the proper operation of your
Cummins® diesel engine.
INTERVENTION REGENERATION
S
TRATEGY — MESSAGE PROCESS FLOW
The Cummins® diesel engine meets all Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) Heavy Duty Diesel Engine
Emissions Standards, resulting in one of the lowest
emitting diesel engines ever produced.
To achieve these emissions standards, your vehicle is
equipped with a state-of-the-art engine and exhaust
system. The engine and exhaust after-treatment system
work together to achieve the EPA Heavy Duty Diesel
Engine Emissions Standards. These systems are
seamlessly integrated into your vehicle and managed by
the Cummins® Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The
PCM manages engine combustion to allow the exhaust
system’s catalyst to trap and burn Particulate Matter (PM)
pollutants, with no input or interaction on your part.
If the engine is allowed to idle or the truck is driven on low
engine speed drive cycles for more than two hours, the
system will automatically enter an emissions operating
mode that will increase the engine idle speed to 900 RPM.
While in this mode, which is designed to help maintain the
Diesel Particulate Filter, the engine idle speed will return
to normal when the brake pedal is applied. A small change
in engine tone or a slight change in engine performance
while accelerating may also be noticeable at speeds below
20 mph (32 km/h). This operating mode may last for up to
an hour of idle time, or around 20 minutes of driving time.
WARNING!
Do not open the high pressure fuel system with the
engine running. Engine operation causes high fuel
pressure. High pressure fuel spray can cause serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not engage the starter motor for more than
15 seconds at a time. Allow two minutes between the
cranking intervals.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent.
They can be unstable under certain conditions and be
hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
Due to lack of lubricants in alcohol or gasoline, the use
of these fuels can cause damage to the fuel system.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 391
Additionally, your vehicle has the ability to alert you to
additional maintenance required on your truck or engine
Ú page 104.
DIESEL EXHAUST FLUID (DEF)
DEF sometimes known simply by the name of its active
component, UREA—is a key component of Selective
Catalytic Reduction (SCR) systems, which help diesel
vehicles meet stringent emission regulations. DEF is a
liquid reducing agent that reacts with engine exhaust in
the presence of a catalyst to convert smog-forming
Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) into harmless nitrogen and water
vapor
Ú page 446.
You can receive assistance in locating DEF by contacting
an authorized dealer.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar® Spray White Lube to ensure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating,
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release
mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and
lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as Mopar® Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations
of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may
cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perfor-
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected
periodically, not just when wiper performance problems
are experienced. This inspection should include the
following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the
affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not
attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass
or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system.
Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the
glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip
up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the
arm and with one finger, push the release tab toward
the wiper arm.
Wiper Disengaging
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the
wiper arm.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the
glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may
be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 393
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper
blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm
with one hand and separating the wiper blade from
the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade down toward the base of the wiper arm and
away from the J hook in the end of the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm
is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of
the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into
the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in
the wiper blade under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper
arm until it is latched (engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click). Fold down the
latch release tab and snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have
the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is
raised for lubrication or oil changes. Replace as required.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain Carbon
Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you
Ú page 348.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle
in areas where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter
will not require maintenance. However, it is important to
keep the engine properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst
operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can
result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmission is
in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition components
disconnected or removed, such as during diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle
or malfunctioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant is dirty or rusty in
appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C
condenser or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser
or the back of the radiator core.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire
system for leaks.
DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN
THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed
to be added to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to
MS.90032).
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 369.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away from
the radiator cooling fan when the hood is raised. The
fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan, discon-
nect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF
mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON mode.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 395
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 446.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-
fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant,
may result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally
compatible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
introduced into the cooling system in an emergency,
the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed,
and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors
or antirust products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radi-
ator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact an
authorized dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine
coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To
prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is
important to use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant
conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your
vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant that meets the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use
higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if tempera-
tures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please
contact an authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (anti-
freeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will
reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system, please contact a
local authorized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recommended and
can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT
coolant are mixed in an emergency, have an authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant will
return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is a
regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with
your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for
your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant in
open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency
assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine
The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle
should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” range on the
bottle when the engine is cold.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the cap unless checking for coolant
freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze).
Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
need only be checked once a month. When additional
engine coolant is needed to maintain the proper level, it
should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers
of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front
of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of
moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating
on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat
opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter
the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant needs
to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are required, the
cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a minimum
of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine cooling performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
CHARGE AIR COOLER — INTER-COOLER
The charge air cooler is positioned below the radiator and
the air conditioner condenser. Air enters the engine
through the air cleaner and passes through the
turbocharger, where it is pressurized. This pressurized air
rapidly reaches high temperature. The air is then directed
through a hose to the charge air cooler and through
another hose to the intake manifold of the engine. The air
entering the engine has been cooled by about 50° to
100°F (10° to 38°C). This cooling process enables more
efficient burning of fuel resulting in fewer emissions.
To guarantee optimum performance of the system, keep
the surfaces of the charge air cooler, condenser and
radiator clean and free of debris. Periodically check the
hoses leading to and from the charge air cooler for cracks
or loose clamps resulting in loss of pressure and reduced
engine performance.
WARNING!
Do not open a hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is over-
heated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an
overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up
in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
do not remove the pressure cap while the system is
hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one speci-
fied for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine
damage may result.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 397
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically
Ú page 369.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service or immediately if
the Brake System Warning Light indicates system failure.
If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the designated
marks on the side of the reservoir of the brake master
cylinder. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder
area before removing cap.
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
For further information
Ú page 448.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of
special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in transmissions.
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely
affect seals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly
a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the
brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake
temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking capacity
in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake fluid
Ú page 448. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can
severely damage your brake system and/or impair its
performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your
vehicle is also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-
ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been
in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in an open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause
it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the
brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the
chemicals can damage your transmission components.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Fluid Level Check — 8-Speed Transmission
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require
adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine
fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools.
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
with an improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid Level Check — 6-Speed Transmission
It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is
at normal operating temperature (158-176°F / 70-80°C).
This normally occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of
driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot
be held comfortably between the fingertips. You can read
the transmission temperature in the instrument cluster
screen
Ú page 104.
Use the following procedure to check the transmission
fluid level properly:
1. Monitor the transmission temperature using the
instrument cluster display, and operate the vehicle
as required to reach the normal operating
temperature. If the transmission is not functioning
properly, or the vehicle cannot be driven, see the
following Note and Caution about checking the fluid
level at colder temperatures.
2. Park the vehicle on level ground.
3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least
60 seconds, and leave the engine running for the
rest of this procedure.
4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear
position (allowing time for the transmission to fully
engage in each position), ending with the
transmission in PARK.
6. Remove the dipstick by unlocking the cap, wipe it
clean and reinsert it until seated.
7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid
if the actual level is at or above the hole.
The fluid level should be between the “HOT” (upper)
reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating
temperature. If the fluid level is low, add fluid through
the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level.
Do not
overfill. Use ONLY the specified fluid
Ú page 448.
After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick
tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to
fully drain into the transmission before rechecking
the fluid level.
NOTE:
Oil level check can only be performed with the 44 inch
dipstick blade with oil level indicator holes. If the vehicle is
equipped with the 15 inch dipstick then a service dipstick
will be required to check the oil.
15 Inch Dipstick
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an authorized
dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may
occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 399
44 Inch Dipstick
NOTE:
If it is necessary to check the transmission below the oper-
ating temperature, the fluid level should be between the
two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick with the fluid at
60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only use the COLD region of the
dipstick as a rough reference when setting the fluid level
after a transmission service or fluid change. Recheck the
fluid level, and adjust as required, once the transmission
reaches normal operating temperature.
8. Reinsert the dipstick until fully seated and lock it
down. The bending of the blade will orient the cap in
the correct position. Do not force or rotate the cap
into another position. Check for leaks. Release the
parking brake.
Fluid And Filter Changes — 8-Speed
Transmission
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the life
of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. However,
change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
Fluid And Filter Changes — 6-Speed
Transmission
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 369.
In addition, change the fluid and filters if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
transmission is disassembled for any reason.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid
Ú page 448. It is important to maintain the transmission
fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No
chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only
the approved lubricant should be used.
REAR AXLE AND 4X4 FRONT DRIVING
A
XLE FLUID LEVEL
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
level
Ú page 448. This inspection should be made with
the vehicle in a level position.
To check the axle fluid, park the vehicle on a level surface.
Take a piece of wire (or zip tie) and make a 90 degree
bend two inches from the end of the wire. Insert the wire
into the fill plug hole and use it like a dipstick. Remove the
wire and measure from the 90 degree bend to the oil level.
For the 2500 (Non-Power Wagon) axles, the fluid level
should be 4/5 in ± 1/4 in (20.3 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the
fill hole for the rear axle and it should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in
(6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the front axle.
For the 2500 Power Wagon and all 3500 model axles, the
fluid level should be 1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm)
below the fill hole on the 9.25 in front, 11.5 in rear axle,
and 12.0 in rear axle.
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it may not
register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until the
temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate
reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the
fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder, and will require more frequent fluid
and filter changes
Ú page 448.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 369.
Lubricant Selection
For further information Ú page 448.
NOTE:
The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in
corrosion and possible failure of differential components.
Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be encountered
in some off-highway types of service, will require draining
and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials
DO REQUIRE limited slip oil
additive (friction modifiers).
NOTE:
Slight noise and mild shuddering may be evident while
turning a vehicle with limited slip differential on concrete
or dry pavement. These conditions should be considered
normal operation of the limited slip differential.
TRANSFER CASE
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug.
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler
plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
Drain And Refill
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 369.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
Ú page 448.
NOISE CONTROL SYSTEM REQUIRED
M
AINTENANCE & WARRANTY
All vehicles built over 10,000 lb (4,535 kg) Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating and manufactured for sale and use in the
United States are required to comply with the Federal
Government's Exterior Noise Regulations. These vehicles
can be identified by the Noise Emission Control Label
located in the operator's compartment.
Required Maintenance For Noise Control
Systems
The following maintenance services must be performed
every six months or 7,500 miles (12,000 km) whichever
comes first, to ensure proper operation of the noise
control systems. In addition, inspection and service should
be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or
suspected. Proper maintenance of the entire vehicle will
help the effectiveness of the noise control systems.
Exhaust System
Inspect the entire exhaust system for leaks and damaged
parts. Devices such as hangers, clamps, and U-bolts
should be tight and in good condition. Damaged
components, burned or blown out mufflers, burned or
rusted out exhaust pipes should be replaced according to
the procedures and specifications outlined in the
appropriate service manual.
Air Cleaner Assembly
Inspect air cleaner housing for proper assembly and fit.
Make certain that the air cleaner is properly positioned
and that the cover is tight. Check all hoses leading to the
air cleaner for tightness. The air filter element must also
be clean and serviced according to the instructions
outlined in the Scheduled Maintenance section of this
manual.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 401
Tampering With Noise Control System
Prohibited
Federal law prohibits the following acts or the causing
thereof: (1) the removal or rendering inoperative by any
person, other than for purposes of maintenance, repair, or
replacement, of any device or element of design
incorporated into any new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to the ultimate
purchaser or while it is in use, or (2) the use of the vehicle
after such device or element of design has been removed
or rendered inoperative by any person.
Among those acts presumed to constitute tampering are
the following:
AIR CLEANER
Removal of the air cleaner.
Removal of the air cleaner filter element from the air
cleaner housing.
Removal of the air ducting.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Removal of, or rendering inoperative exhaust system
components including the muffler or tailpipe.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
Removal of, or rendering inoperative the fan clutch.
Removal of the fan shroud.
Noise Emission Warranty
The manufacturer warrants that this vehicle as
manufactured by the manufacturer, was designed, built
and equipped to conform at the time it left the
manufacturer's control with all applicable US EPA Noise
Control Regulations.
This warranty covers this vehicle as designed, built and
equipped by the manufacturer, and is not limited to any
particular part, component or system of the vehicle
manufactured by the manufacturer. Defects in design,
assembly or in any part, component or system of the
vehicle as manufactured by the manufacturer, which, at
the time it left the manufacturer's control, caused noise
emissions to exceed Federal standards, are covered by
this warranty for the life of the vehicle.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Log and Service Chart (Diesel Engines)
Noise Systems Maintenance Chart and Service Log — Insert Month, Day, Year under column mileage closest to the mileage at which service was performed.
MILES 7,500 15,000 22,500 30,000 37,500 45,000 52,500 60,000
KILOMETERS 12,000 24,000 36,000 48,000 60,000 72,000 84,000 96,000
Exhaust
system-inspect
Air cleaner
assembly-inspect
ODOMETER
READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
MILES 67,500 75,000 82,500 90,000 97,500 105,000 112,500 120,000
KILOMETERS 108,000 120,000 132,000 144,000 156,000 168,000 180,000 192,000
Exhaust
system-inspect
Air cleaner
assembly-inspect
ODOMETER
READING
PERFORMED BY
PERFORMED AT
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 403
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive
current.
When a device does not work, you must check the fuse
element inside the blade fuse for a break/melt.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
extended periods of time with the engine off may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
Blade Fuses
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment near the battery. This center contains
cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers.
A description of each fuse and component may be
stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number
of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that
corresponds to the following chart.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous
electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit
that must be corrected. Never replace a blown fuse
with metal wires or any other material. Do not place
a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity or vice versa.
Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, transmission system) or steering
system blows, contact an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
If it is necessary to wash the engine compartment, take
care not to directly hit the fuse box, and the windshield
wiper motors with water.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse element
3 — Blade Fuse with a bad/not functional fuse element
(blown fuse)
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover,
it is important to ensure the cover is properly posi-
tioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow
water to get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system failure.
If it is necessary to wash the engine compartment,
take care not to directly hit the fuse box, and the
windshield wiper motor with water.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Power Distribution Center Location
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 60 Amp Yellow – ABS Pump Mtr
F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan HI / Lo *
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 405
F04 50 Amp Red – 400W Inverter
F05 50 Amp Red – Air Suspension Comp
F06 40 Amp Green – STOM
F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid
F08 20 Amp Blue – NOX Sensor *
F09
30 Amp Pink
–
Gas – Brake Vacuum Pump *
40 Amp Green Diesel – Fuel Heater *
F10 40 Amp Green – CBC #2 / Ext Lights
F11 40 Amp Green – Brake SYS MOD ECU & Valves
F12 40 Amp Green – CBC #3 / Pwr Locks
F13 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blwr Mtr
F14 40 Amp Green – CBC #4 / Ext Light
F15 30 Amp Pink – Power Side Step *
F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart - Bar Module *
F17 30 Amp Pink – Winch *
F18 – – Spare
F19 30 Amp Pink – Diesel SCR Feed *
F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Mod
F21 30 Amp Pink – DTCM
F22
20 Amp Blue
–
Gas – ECM *
25 Amp White Diesel – PCM *
F23 30 Amp Pink – CBC #1 / Int Light
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Mod
F25 30 Amp Pink – FT Wiper
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare
F28 20 Amp Blue – TRLR Tow B / U
F29 20 Amp Blue – TRLR Tow Park
F30 30 Amp Pink – TRLR Tow
F31 – – Spare
F32 – – Spare
F33 20 Amp Blue – Trans Control Mod *
F34 30 Amp Pink – VSIM #2 *
F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof *
F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL) *
F37 30 Amp Pink – Diesel Frame / Fuel HTR *
F38 30 Amp Pink – ITBM *
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 10 Amp Red Vented Seats *
F41 – 10 Amp Red Act Grille Shutter / Dam *
F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F43 – 15 Amp Blue Heated Strng Wheel *
F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F45 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 407
F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters Relay Coils *
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 15 Amp Blue IP Cluster / CSG
F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Mod *
F51 – 10 Amp Red IGN Mod / KINMod / RFHub
F52 – 5 Amp Tan Batt Snsr
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow TRLR Tow – Lt Turn/Stop
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Non-Memory Adj Pedals *
F55 – 10 Amp Red Fwd Utility Lamps
F56 – 10 Amp Red VBV
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM / PCM / Trans PRSR SW
F58 – 10 Amp Red Bed Lighting
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – 10 Amp Red NH3 Sensor / PM Sensor *
F62 – 10 Amp Red A/C Clutch
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils / CAPS
F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / PCM *
F65 – 10 Amp Red RVDMP / MOD BLE *
F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / USB RR * / RR Mirror/ Passenger Wind SW
F67 – 10 Amp Red UCI / TRLR 360 Cam/ Tach *
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
F68 – 10 Amp Red AEB RACAM HTR *
F69 – 15 Amp Blue SCR Mod 12 Volt *
F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Mtr / Fuel Htr RLY
F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amp / Act Noise Cnsl
F72 – – Spare
F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump *
F74 – 10 Amp Red Backup Alarm
F75 – 10 Amp Red SCR RLY / ATMM *
F76 – 10 Amp Red Electronic Stability Control (ESC) *
F77 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / TCM / FAD MOD / STOM
F78 – 15 Amp Blue ECM / PCM / IRCM / AUX Relay Feed / HRLS
F79 – 15 Amp Blue ID / Clearance Lt
F80 – 10 Amp Red Ovrdh Con / Assist / 911
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow TRLR Tow RT Turn / Stop
F82 – 10 Amp Red SCCM / Cruise Control
F83 – 10 Amp Red TLR AST / TLR RVS CTL / TLR KNB
F84 – 15 Amp Blue ASBM / HVAC / ICS / R Heated Seats SW
F85 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F86 – 10 Amp Red ORC (Airbag)
F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Susp / ITBM / SCCM / TLR TPM
F88 – 15 Amp Blue IP Cluster
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 409
F89 – – Spare
F90 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet / Batt
F91 – – Power Outlet / Acc
F92 – 10 Amp Red Invertor MOD / USB-IP / WCPM *
F93 – – Spare
F94 – 10 Amp Red SBW / TCASE SW / TRL TPM - GTWY
F95 – 10 Amp Red RR CAM / PRKTRNX/ CHMSL Cam / Bld SPT SNR / SVUE CAM *
F96 – 10 Amp Red TRL Cam *
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow Front HTD ST PSGR *
F98 – 20 Amp Yellow Front HTD ST DRIVER *
F99 – 10 Amp Red HVAC / IN-CARTS / CSG / TRL CWY MOD */ TACH
F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitter Box Feed *
F101 – 20 Amp Yellow RR HTD ST Right *
F102 – 20 Amp Yellow RR HTD ST Left / Run RLY #3 *
F103 – 10 Amp Red HeadLamp AFLS *
F104 – 20 Amp Yellow UCI Port / USB Rear
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
* If Equipped
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part Numbers
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this section includes bulb description and replacement part numbers. All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base. Aluminum base
bulbs are not approved.
NOTE:
Please see an authorized dealer for LED replacement
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Overhead Console Lamps TS 212–9
Dome Lamp 7679
For lighted switches, see an authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Low Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
High Beam (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 9005LL
Low & High Beam LED
Low & High Beam LED
Turn Signal / Front Position (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) 7444NA
Turn Signal LED
Front Position (LED Headlamps) LED
Front Side Marker (Headlamps) LED
Front Fog Lamps (Halogen Reflector Headlamp) H11LL
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 411
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
BASE QUAD: LOW BEAM HEADLAMP, HIGH
BEAM HEADLAMP, FRONT PARK AND TURN —
IF EQUIPPED
Low Beam
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over
the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash
shield. Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained
through this access hole.
Splash Shield Access Cover
Front Fog Lamps (LED Headlamps) LED
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) LED
Base Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp 3157K
Premium Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp LED
Base Tail/Backup Lamp W21/5W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 921
Cab Roof Marker Lamps LED
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp LED
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) LED
Base Turn/Tail Lamp PWY24W
Rear License Plate Lamp LED
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house
splash shield and disengage the bulb access cover by
rotating counterclockwise.
Bulb Access Cover
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the low beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter turn to
unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb
and covers.
High Beam
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
Bulb Access Cover
3. Look under the hood and behind the headlamp to
find the high beam bulb access cover.
4. Reach behind the headlamp and disengage the
access cover by rotating counterclockwise.
5. Disconnect the internal lamp wiring harness
connector from the high beam bulb.
6. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter turn to
unlock the bulb from the lamp.
7. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
8. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb
and covers.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type for replace-
ment. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat
and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or
the lamp wiring.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
Always use the correct bulb size and type for replace-
ment. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat
and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or
the lamp wiring.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 413
Outer Front Park And Turn
See the following steps to replace:
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over
the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash
shield. Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained
through this access hole.
Splash Shield Access Cover
4. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house
splash shield and disengage the side marker socket
by rotating counterclockwise a quarter turn.
Park And Turn Sockets
5. Pull the socket and bulb straight out from the
housing.
6. Separate the bulb from the socket without twisting.
7. Reverse the procedure for installation of new bulb
and covers.
FOG LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
Please see an authorized dealer for service on LED and
Halogen front fog lamps.
Halogen
See the following steps to replace:
1. Reach under and behind the front fascia/bumper to
access the back of the front fog lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector
from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise a quarter turn to
unlock the bulb from the housing.
Fog Lamp Bulb
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
REAR TAIL/STOP, TURN SIGNAL AND
BACKUP LAMPS
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws and pushpins that pass
through the bed sheet metal.
Tail Lamp Locations
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the
outboard side of the lamp housing from the two
plastic snap post retainers in the outer box side
panel.
Tail Lamp Removed
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the
bulb socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise a quarter
turn to unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and
housing.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (CHMSL)
WITH CARGO LAMP
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to
the body as shown.
CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and
wiring harness to the body.
3. Turn the desired bulb socket a quarter turn and
remove the socket and bulb from housing.
1 — Tail Lamp
2 — Screws
3 — Fasteners
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 415
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
CHMSL Bulb And Socket
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
Inside Bulb: Center High Mounted Stop Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
CAB TOP CLEARANCE LAMPS — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Remove the screws from the top of the lamp.
Screw Location From Clearance Lamp
2. Rotate the bulb socket a quarter turn and pull it from
the lamp assembly.
Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp
3. Pull the bulb straight from it's socket and replace.
REAR LAMP BAR ID MARKER (DUAL REAR
WHEELS) — IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain
access to the bulb sockets.
Screw Locations
2. Turn the socket a quarter turn counterclockwise to
access the bulb.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs
and housing.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with
your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily
surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415
416 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SIDE MARKER LAMPS (DUAL REAR WHEELS) —
IF EQUIPPED
See the following steps to replace:
Side Marker Lamp Locations
1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
3. Turn the socket a quarter turn counterclockwise and
remove from assembly to access the bulb.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs
and housing.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the following
information: Tire Markings, Tire Identification Numbers,
Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire Pressures,
and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the
section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact
spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the
sidewall preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US design stan-
dards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into
the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 417
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417
418 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 419
Tire Terminology And Definitions
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the
3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of psi (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire.
The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original
equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419
420 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver's side
door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the
spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the
recommended pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the
load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will
not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire And Loading Information
Placard
Ú page 203.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle
weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must
not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and
trailer towing
Ú page 203.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs” on the Tire And Loading Information Placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 421
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there will
be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg
(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following
table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle
with varying seating configurations and number and
size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes
only and may not be accurate for the seating and load
carry capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can
cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase
your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended
load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421
422 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Safety
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the stability of
the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response
or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal
wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the need
for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation.
Tires may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in
overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion shock.
Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right
or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 423
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or
conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original equipment
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Replace the tire pressure sensor as well as it is not
designed to be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a Run Flat tire is
changed after being driven under a Run Flat mode 14 psi
(96 kPa) condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it
is not designed to be reused.
NOTE:
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the vehicle on
a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat
mode
Ú page 309.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
For further information
Ú page 365.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum
load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could
cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision.
Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity
at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on
your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly.
The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other
types of tires.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated
by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or
failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not
spin your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously
when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423
424 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to
help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors
including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle sched-
uled maintenance is highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when installing
new tires due to wear and tear in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The
manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed
Ú page 424. Refer to the
Tire And Loading Information Placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire
Ú page 416.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear
tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect
your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
1 — Tread Wear Indicators
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 425
It is recommended you contact an authorized tire dealer or
original equipment dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction levels may vary
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the
tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on
ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when
ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information,
contact an authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in
size and type to the original equipment tires.
Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be
operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original
equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and
traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer
than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire designated
for temporary emergency use
Ú page 213.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or speed
rating other than that specified for your vehicle.
Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels
may change suspension dimensions and perfor-
mance characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This
can cause unpredictable handling and stress to
steering and suspension components. You could
lose control and have a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with
load ratings approved for your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or
death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425
426 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel
equivalent in look and function to the original equipment
tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for
your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact
spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire
And Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s
side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact
spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
collapsible spare by looking at the spare tire description
on the Tire And Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Collapsible spare tire description
example: 165/80-17 101P.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment
tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on
your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly
installed to the vehicle. Inflate the collapsible tire using
the electric air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the collapsible spare tire.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary
emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive
more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares
have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result
in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 426
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 427
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited
use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations
for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your original
equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment
tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WHEEL AND WHEEL TRIM CARE
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle
and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not
hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium
chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice
or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive
brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and
wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar® Wheel Treatment or
Mopar® Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to remove
the water droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake rotors and
prevent vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low Gloss
Clear Coat Wheels
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow
traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire,
as recommended by the snow traction device manu-
facturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the
snow traction device.
Please see the following table for the recommended
tire size, axle and snow traction device:
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limited use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your
Tire And Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side
door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle.
Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner
or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only
car wash soap, Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty wheels,
DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives, or polishing
compounds. They will permanently damage this finish
and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427
428 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
2500 4x2 (2WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(Maximum Projection Beyond Tire Profile
Or Equivalent)
Tradesman
Rear
LT245/70R17E
LT275/70R18E
U Class
Bighorn
Laramie
Longhorn
LT275/70R18E
LT285/60R20E
Limited LT285/60R20E
2500 4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(Maximum Projection Beyond Tire Profile
Or Equivalent)
Tradesman
Rear
LT245/70R17E
LT285/70R17D
LT275/70R18E
U Class
Bighorn
Laramie
Limited
Longhorn
LT275/70R18E
LT285/60R20E
Power Wagon
LT285/70R17D
LT275/70R18E
LT285/60R20E
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 428
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 429
3500 SRW 4x2 (2WD) & 4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(Maximum Projection Beyond Tire Profile
Or Equivalent)
Tradesman
Rear
LT275/70R18E
U Class
Bighorn
Limited
Laramie
Longhorn
LT275/70R18E
LT285/60R20E
3500 DRW 4x2 (2WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(Maximum Projection Beyond Tire Profile
Or Equivalent)
Tradesman
Bighorn
Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
Limited
Laramie
Longhorn
Front/Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 429
430 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving, and
braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 369. More
frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for
any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to
rotation being performed.
3500 DRW 4x4 (4WD)
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device
(Maximum Projection Beyond Tire Profile
Or Equivalent)
Tradesman
Bighorn
Limited
Laramie
Longhorn
Front/Rear LT235/80R17E U Class
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clearance
between tires and other suspension components, it
is important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs
that could indicate device breakage. Remove the
damaged parts of the device before further use.
Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). Auto-
sock traction devices do not require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the suggested
operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is
less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 430
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 431
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does
not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all
four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.
Tire Rotation
NOTE:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Information
System (TPIS):
The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses
unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to help identify
them from the outer rear wheels, because of this, the
inner and outer wheel locations can’t be switched.
After a tire rotation is completed, as shown, the system
can auto learn the locations of each sensor ID. Auto
learning/localization occurs when the vehicle ignition
status is changed from Off to On and speeds of greater
than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained and remain over
5 mph (8km/h) for at about a 15 minute period. You
may need to drive for 20 minutes to account slower
speeds and stops.
If the tires are rotated incorrectly, The auto localization
of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate correctly resulting
in incorrect locations for the pressure values displayed
in the instrument cluster.
CAUTION!
3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one approved
direction of rotation. This is to accommodate the
asymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the
On/Off-Road tire and the use of Outline White
Letter (OWL) tires.
When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to be
remounted on the rim, or installed at a different loca-
tion, to maintain the correct placement of the tire on
the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position on the
truck. For example, if the spare is used to replace an
outer rear tire it will have to be remounted on the rim
so that the wheel is dished inward. That way the
tread design of asymmetrical tires and the white
writing of the OWL tires will maintain proper position.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431
432 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 432
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 433
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three weeks,
we recommend that you take the following steps to
minimize the drain on your vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air condi-
tioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started
again.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make
roads passable in snow and ice and those that are
sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons
are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is
operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme
conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim,
and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint
and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 433
434 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone
breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed
by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care —
If Equipped
For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold Tonneau
cover, use Mopar® Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and
Mopar® Leather and Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle
in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or a mild car
wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use Mopar® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Use precautions to not scratch the
paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
Fascia/Bumper Care
The customer is responsible to clean and maintain the
chrome components of the vehicle. Washing away road
debris and salt using an automotive soap. Fascia/
bumpers should be cleaned regularly using mild (neutral
Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion.
Your fascia/bumpers are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride,
calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to
melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can stain or damage the
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes, or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the fascia/bumper’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner, or equivalent is recommended.
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions, strong alkaline additives, or harsh brushes.
Many aftermarket cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the fascia/bumper’s protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® Chrome
Cleaner, or equivalent is recommended.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 434
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 435
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near
the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a
month.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of
the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud
or stone shields behind each wheel.
Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. An authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
During ownership, the shine and luster of the Spray-On
Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty
hauling and hard water stains. Weathering and UV
exposure will lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss over
time.
To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On
Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you periodically
rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your truck
at least twice per year using the Mopar® Spray-On
Bedliner Conditioner available at a local authorized
dealer.
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray-On
Bedliner:
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any
loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft
cloth or brush.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of Mopar® Spray-On
Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or sponge and
wipe over the entire surface of the truck bedliner.
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to many
different types of chemicals (including gasoline, oil,
hydraulic fluids) for short periods of time. If a spill occurs
on your Spray-On Bedliner, rinse the truck out as soon as
possible to avoid permanent damage.
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a Spray-On
Bedliner. One common condition is when loading a heavy
pallet and dragging that pallet across the floor of the bed.
If a nail or sharp point is exposed under the weight of the
pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While not covered by
your new vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix to cover the
metal exposed by the scratch is required. To repair a tear
or gouge, follow the directions provided in the Mopar®
Quick Repair Kit.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products to clean
your bedliner. Silicon-based products can become
slippery and may result in personal injury.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed
areas they may cause respiratory harm.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 435
436 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure —
If Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar® Total Clean, or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle
to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. Replace the belts
if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work
properly.
NOTE:
If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning loop
for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft cloth
until all residue is removed.
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. If
your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you have
questions regarding seat belt or retractor conditions,
take your vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or
authorized FCA Certified Collision Care Program facility
for inspection.
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products may not
be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 436
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 437
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can
act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn
soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar®
Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to show any
foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye transfer more so than
darker colors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and FCA recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner
applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use alcohol and alcohol-based and/or
ketone-based cleaning products to clean leather
upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may result.
8
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 437
438
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument
panel, visible through the windshield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
braking capability, the remaining system will still function
with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will
be evident by increased pedal travel during application,
greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation
of the Brake Warning Light and/or the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) Warning Light during brake use.
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ASSIST —
I
F EQUIPPED
The brake system power assist is provided by a
hydro-boost unit which shares fluid with the power
steering system. You may experience some clicking or
hissing noises from the hydro-boost system during hard
braking conditions.
NOTE:
Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be higher than
normal until the power steering fluid reaches operating
temperature.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that
the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a
wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/
Bolt Torque
Lug Nut/
Bolt Type
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
130 ft-lb
(176 N·m)
Cone
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
129 ft-lb
(175 N·m)
Flanged
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 438
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 439
NOTE:
Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The lug nuts
are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being
rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts at the interface
between the lug nut/bolt and the washer.
Do not oil wheel
studs.
Two-Piece Lug Nut
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the
tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Retighten the wheel nuts, in the same pattern, to the
torques listed in the Torque Specifications table. Go
through the sequence a second time to verify that the
specific torque has been achieved. Retighten to
specifications after 25 miles (40 km) and check the lug
nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
8/10 Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Patterns
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued
to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
1 — 10 Bolt Pattern
2 — 8 Bolt Pattern
9
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 439
440 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to
eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or
the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles/
kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become
properly set. All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated
against the wheel. The wheel nuts should then be
tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the wheel nuts
to final torque in increments. Progress around the bolt
circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel nut
just previously tightened until final torque is achieved.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS — GASOLINE ENGINE
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is
not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see a dealer
immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than
recommended octane number can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before
considering service for the vehicle.
6.4L ENGINE
Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater than
15% in this engine.
This engine is designed to meet all emissions
regulations and provide satisfactory fuel
economy and performance when using high
quality unleaded gasoline having a posted
octane number of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended.
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide
improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that
have these additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level of detergents to further
aide in minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and
varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do
not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result
in personal injury.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 440
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 441
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
DO NOT USE E-85 IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline
containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of gasoline with
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel,
the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on Compressed
Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane (LP) may result in
damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) IN
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasolines to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life
and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump;
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions control system
can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, or
gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
of these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should
clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold
as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of
these products contain high concentrations of meth-
anol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
tives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer
and may void or not be covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
9
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 441
442 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL REQUIREMENTS – DIESEL ENGINE
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in
your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must fuel this
vehicle with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm
Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur
Highway Diesel fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid
damage to the emissions control system.
For most year-round service, Number 2 Diesel Fuel
meeting ASTM (formerly known as the American Society
for Testing and Materials) specification D-975 Grade S15
will provide good performance. If the vehicle is exposed to
extreme cold (below 20°F or -7°C), or is required to
operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged
periods, use Climatized Number 2 Diesel Fuel or dilute the
No. 2 diesel fuel with 50% Number 1 Diesel Fuel. This will
provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging
of the fuel filters.
Diesel fuel is seldom completely free of water. To prevent
fuel system trouble, drain the accumulated water from the
fuel/water separator using the fuel/water separator drain
provided on both fuel filters. If you buy good quality fuel
and follow the cold weather advice above, fuel
conditioners should not be required in your vehicle. If
available in your area, a high cetane “premium” diesel fuel
may offer improved cold-starting and warm-up
performance.
FUEL SPECIFICATIONS
The Cummins® Turbo Diesel engine has been developed
to take advantage of the high energy content and
generally lower cost Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel
or Number 2 Ultra Low Sulfur Climatized Diesel Fuels.
Experience has shown that it also operates on Number 1
Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuels or other fuels within
specification.
NOTE:
If you accidentally fill the fuel tank with gasoline on your
diesel vehicle, do not start the vehicle. If you restart
your vehicle you risk damaging the engine and fuel
system. Please call an authorized dealer for service.
A maximum blend of 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM
specification D-7467 may be used with your
Cummins® diesel engine. (Models configured with
B20 Capability.)
In addition, commercially available fuel additives are
not necessary for the proper operation of your
Cummins® diesel engine. However, if seasonably
adjusted fuel is not available and you are operating
below 20°F (-6°C), Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel
Treatment (or equivalent) may be beneficial to avoid
fuel gelling.
Number 1 Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel Fuel should only be
used where extended arctic conditions (0°F or -18°C)
exist.
WARNING!
Do not use alcohol or gasoline as a fuel blending agent.
They can be unstable under certain conditions and
hazardous or explosive when mixed with diesel fuel.
CAUTION!
If the Water in Fuel Indicator Light remains on, DO NOT
START engine before you drain the water from the fuel
filter(s) to avoid engine damage
Ú page 387.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 442
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 443
BIODIESEL FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Pickup Models
Your vehicle has been validated and approved for the use
of biodiesel in blends up to 20% (B20) provided that you
comply with the requirements outlined below. It is
important that you understand and comply with these
requirements. Failure to comply with Oil Change
requirements for vehicles operating on biodiesel blends
up to B20 will result in premature engine wear. Such wear
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Biodiesel is a fuel produced from renewable resources
typically derived from animal fat, rapeseed oil (Rapeseed
Methyl Ester (RME) base), or soybean oil (Soy Methyl Ester
(SME or SOME) base). Biodiesel fuel has inherent
limitations which require that you understand and adhere
to the following requirements if you use blends of
biodiesel greater then 5% but not greater than 20%
(B6-B20). There are no unique restrictions for the use of
B5. Use of blends greater than 20% is not approved. Use
of blends greater than 20% can result in engine damage.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Fuel Quality — Must Comply With ASTM Standards
The quality of biodiesel fuel may vary widely. Only fuel
produced by a BQ9000 supplier to the following
specifications may be blended to meet biodiesel blend
(B6–B20) fuel meeting ASTM specification D-7467:
Petrodiesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975
and biodiesel fuel (B100) meeting ASTM specification
D-6751.
Fuel Oxidation Stability — Must Use Fuel
Within Six Months Of Manufacture
Biodiesel fuel has poor oxidation stability which can result
in long term storage problems. Fuel produced to approved
ASTM standards, if stored properly, provides for protection
against fuel oxidation for up to six months.
Fuel Water Separation — Must Use
Mopar®/Cummins® Approved Fuel Filter
Elements
You must use Mopar®/Cummins® approved fuel filter
elements in both your engine mounted filter and frame
mounted filter.
Biodiesel fuel has a natural affinity to water and water
accelerates microbial growth. Your Mopar®/Cummins®
filtration system is designed to provide adequate fuel
water separation capabilities.
Biodiesel Fuel Properties — Low Ambient
Temperatures
Biodiesel fuel may gel or solidify at low ambient
temperatures, which may pose problems for both storage
and operation. Precautions can be necessary at low
ambient temperatures, such as storing the fuel in a
heated building or a heated storage tank, or using cold
temperature additives.
Fuel In Oil Dilution — Must Adhere To
Required Oil Change Interval
Fuel dilution of lubricating oil has been observed with the
use of biodiesel fuel. Fuel in oil must not exceed 5%. To
ensure this limit is met your oil change interval must be
maintained to the following schedule:
Ram PickUp 2500/3500 Only — 15,000 miles
(24,000 km)*
(*unless otherwise notified with an oil service message.)
CAUTION!
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if operation
occurs with greater than 5% biodiesel blends.
Oil change intervals should not exceed 6 months in
either case. Failure to comply with these Oil Change
requirements for vehicles operating on biodiesel
blends up to B20 may result in premature engine
wear. Such wear is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
B20 Biodiesel capable: The engine may suffer severe
damage if operated with concentrations of biodiesel
higher than 20%.
9
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 443
444 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUID CAPACITIES
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 31 gal 117 L
2500/3500 Longbed Models 32 gal 121 L
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models — If Equipped 50 gal 189 L
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4L Engine 7 qt 6.6 L
Cooling System
6.4L Engine 18.5 qt 17.5 L
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 444
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 445
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2500/3500 Standard Cab Longbed Models 28 gal 106 L
2500/3500 Crew/Mega Cab Shortbed Models 31 gal 117 L
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models 32 gal 121 L
2500/3500 Crew Cab Longbed Models — If Equipped 50 gal 189 L
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank 5.7 gal 21 L
Engine Oil With Filter
6.7L Engine 12 qt 11.4 L
Cooling System
6.7L Engine 22 qt 20.8 L
9
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 445
446 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
Engine Oil
We recommend using Mopar® API Certified SAE 0W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the
manufacturer Material Standard MS-A0921. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-40 engine oil can be used but must have
the API Donut trademark
Ú page 381.
Fuel Selection 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
Engine Oil
In ambient temperatures above 0°F (-18°C), we recommend using 10W-30 engine oil such as Mopar®, Shell Rotella
and Shell Rimula that meets the manufacturer Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4 engine oil category is
required. Products meeting Cummins® CES 20081 may also be used. The identification of these engine oils is typically
located on the back of the oil container.
In ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C), we recommend using 5W-40
synthetic engine oil such as Mopar®, Shell
Rotella and Shell Rimula that meets the manufacturer Material Standard MS-10902 and the API CK-4 engine oil
category is required.
Fuel Filters
We recommend using Mopar® Fuel Filter. Must meet 3 micron rating (engine mounted filter). Must meet 5 micron rating
(chassis mounted filter).
Using a fuel filter that does not meet the manufacturer’s filtration and water separating
requirements can severely impact fuel system life and reliability.
Crankcase Ventilation Filter We recommend using Mopar® CCV Filter.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 446
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 447
Fuel Selection
Use good quality diesel fuel from a reputable supplier in your vehicle. Federal law requires that you must fuel this vehicle
with Ultra Low Sulfur Highway Diesel fuel (15 ppm Sulfur maximum) and prohibits the use of Low Sulfur Highway Diesel
fuel (500 ppm Sulfur maximum) to avoid damage to the emissions control system.
For most year-round service, Number 2 Diesel fuel meeting ASTM specification D-975 Grade S15 will provide good
performance.
If climatized or diesel Number 1 ULSD fuel is not available, and you are operating below (20°F/-6°C), in sustained arctic
conditions, Mopar® Premium Diesel Fuel Treatment (or equivalent) is recommended to avoid gelling.
This vehicle is fully compatible with biodiesel blends up to 5% biodiesel meeting ASTM specification D-975. Pickup
models configured with optional B20 capability, are additionally compatible with 20% biodiesel meeting ASTM
specification D-7467.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
Mopar® Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) (API Certified) or equivalent that has been API Certified to the ISO 22241 standard.
Use of fluids not API Certified to ISO 22241 may result in system damage. You can receive assistance in locating DEF in
the United States by calling 866-RAM-INFO (866-726-4636). In Canada call 1–800–465–2001 (English) or
1–800–387–9983 (French).
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion
protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or
any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be
drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
9
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 447
448 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
6.4L GASOLINE ENGINE
6.7L DIESEL ENGINE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – 8-Speed Automatic
Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® Transfer Case Lubricant for Borg Warner 44-44 and 44-45.
Front and Rear Axle
We recommend using SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant. Limited slip additive is required for limited
slip axles. If the axle fluid is not pre-mixed with limited slip additive we recommend using Mopar® MS-10111 Limited
Slip Additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend using Mopar® Power Steering Fluid +4 or Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Component
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – 68RFE
Only use ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of your
transmission. We recommend Mopar® ATF+4 fluid.
Automatic Transmission – AS69RC
Only use Mopar® ASRC Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the proper fluid may affect the
function or performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid.
Front and Rear Axle Fluid
We recommend using SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant in 9.25 Front, 11.5 and 12.0 (Single Rear
Wheel) Rear Axles. Use Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 in 12.0 (Dual Rear Wheel) Rear axles.
Limited slip additive is required for limited slip axles. We recommend using the pre-mixed Mopar® lubricant and limited
slip additive. If the axle fluid is not pre-mixed with limited slip additive we recommend using Mopar® MS-10111 Limited
Slip Additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 and SAE J1703.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 448
449
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's
service history. This can often provide a clue to the current
problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the
specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or
work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the
service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At
many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when you call for
an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer
service manager first. If for some reason you are still not
satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer center
should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Available 24 hours, 7 days a week.
Call 1-800-521-2779 or visit chrysler.rsahelp.com(USA)
Call 1-800-363-4869 or visit fca.roadsideaid.com
(Canada)
Who is Covered
You are covered by Roadside Assistance services if you
are a purchaser for use of the vehicle. Roadside
Assistance services last for five years or 60,000 miles on
the odometer, whichever occurs first, calculated from the
start date of the Basic Limited Warranty, as set forth in
your Warranty Information book.
1
1. Towing services provided through Cross Country Motor Club, Inc.
Medford, MA 02155, except in AK,CA, HI, OR, WI, and WY, where services
are provided by Cross Country Motor Club of California, Inc., Thousand
Oaks, CA 91360.
10
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 449
450 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
What to Do
If your vehicle requires jump start assistance, out of gas/
fuel delivery, tire service, lockout service or towing as a
result of a mechanical breakdown, dial toll-free: USA:
1-800-521-2779/Canada: 1-800-363-4869. Provide your
name, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) required for
covered services, license plate number, and your location,
including the telephone number from which you are
calling. Briefly describe the nature of the problem and
answer a few simple questions. You will be given the name
of the service provider and an estimated time of arrival. If
you feel you are in an unsafe situation, please let us know.
With your consent, we will contact local police or safety
authorities.
If Unable to Contact Roadside Assistance
If you are unable to contact Roadside Assistance or
unable to provide a valid Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and you obtain towing services on your own, you may
submit your original receipts from the licensed towing or
service facility, for services rendered within 30 days of the
occurrence. Be sure to include your VIN, odometer
mileage at the time of service, and current mailing
address. We will process the claim based on vehicle and
service eligibility.
If eligible, we will reimburse you for the reasonable
amount actually paid, based on the usual and customary
charges for that service in the area where they were
provided. FCA US LLC’s determination relating to
reimbursement is final. Correspondence should be
mailed to:
FCA US LLC Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 9145
Medford, MA 02155
Attention Claims Department
FCA US LLC reserves the right to modify the terms or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance Program at any time.
The Roadside Assistance program is subject to restrictions
and conditions of use, which are determined solely by
FCA US LLC.
Flat Tire Service
If you are inconvenienced by a flat tire, we will dispatch a
service provider to use your vehicle’s temporary spare tire
(if equipped) as recommended in your Owner’s Manual.
This is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Out of Gas/Fuel Delivery
Drivers cannot always count on a gas station being
nearby, especially when traveling away from home. We will
dispatch a service provider to deliver a small amount of
fuel (maximum two gallons) to get you to a nearby station.
This service is limited to two occurrences in a 12-month
period.
Battery Jump Assistance
No time is a good time for a depleted battery. With
Roadside Assistance, you do not have to worry about
being stranded. We will dispatch a service provider to
provide you with a battery jump anytime, day or night.
Lockout Service
Whether the keys are locked in your vehicle or frozen locks
are keeping you from getting on your way, help is just a
phone call away. This service is limited to providing access
to the vehicle’s seating area. It does not cover the cost of
replacement keys.
Towing Service
Our towing service gives you peace of mind and
confidence. If your vehicle becomes disabled as a result of
a mechanical breakdown, Roadside Assistance will
dispatch a towing service to transport your vehicle to the
closest authorized Chrysler, Dodge, Jeep®, or Ram dealer.
If you choose to go to another dealer, you will be
responsible for the cost if the extra distance exceeds
10 miles.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 450
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 451
FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726-4636
FCA CANADA CUSTOMER CARE
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D.F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (866) 726-4636
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED
(TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties,
FCA US LLC has installed special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center.
Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the
United States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and
for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires. The Mopar® Vehicle Protection plans are the
ONLY vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide additional
protection beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you
purchased a Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service contract, call
FCA US LLC’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline
at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service contract you
may have purchased from another manufacturer. If you
require service after the FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to ensure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle
components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects, or other reproductive harm.
10
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 451
452 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and
market. Refer to www.mopar.com/om for further
information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and provisions
of FCA Canada Inc. warranties applicable to this vehicle
and market.
Use this QR code to access your digital
experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories and
factory filled fluids are available from an authorized
dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 452
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 453
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/
or components and is written in straightforward language
with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These manuals make it
easy to find and fix problems on computer-controlled
vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven
diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and
equipment.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic
Procedure manuals, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada).
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om (US) or
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty
Information Books can be ordered through Archway at:
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
10
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 453
454 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP OR ADDRESS
*If you have purchased this vehicle used or have changed
your address, please provide the following information
and mail to:
FCA US LLC
P.O. Box 21–8008
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Make sure to include the following:
Date of Sale (mm/dd/yy)
Vehicle Indentification Number (17 Character ID
located on top left of the instrument panel)
Exact Odometer Reading
First and Last Name
Phone Number
Street Address, City, State and Zip Code
Email Address
*Applies to US residents only.
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Innovation, Science and Economic Development
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d`Innovation,
Science and Economic Development applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est
autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est
susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes
dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause
interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su
operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 454
455
INDEX
A
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control) ................................................... 174
, 175
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................ 395
Adding Fuel.......................................................... 200
, 201
Additives, Fuel .............................................................. 440
Adjust
Down...........................................................................33
Forward ......................................................................33
Rearward....................................................................33
Up................................................................................33
Adjustable Pedals ...........................................................38
Advance Phone Connectivity....................................... 270
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation.................................................... 325
Air Bag Warning Light ............................................. 323
Enhanced Accident Response ......................328
, 368
Event Data Recorder (EDR).................................... 368
If Deployment Occurs ............................................. 328
Knee Impact Bolsters............................................. 326
Maintaining Your Air Bag System .......................... 329
Maintenance........................................................... 329
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ......................... 324
Transporting Pets.................................................... 346
Air Bag Light ...............................................115
, 323, 346
Air Cleaner,
Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter)........................ 382
, 400
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......................................384
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ..........................................384
Air Conditioner System.................................................384
Air Conditioning............................................................... 59
Air Conditioning Filter ............................................62
, 384
Air Conditioning System ................................................. 61
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ....................................61
Air Filter .........................................................................382
Air Pressure
Tires..........................................................................422
Alarm
Panic........................................................................... 18
Security Alarm...................................................24
, 117
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle........................................................................ 12
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ............................... 395
, 444
Disposal ...................................................................396
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .....................................295
Anti-Lock Warning Light................................................118
Assist, Hill Start.............................................................300
Audio Settings ...............................................................259
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................................225
Auto Down Power Windows............................................73
Automatic Door Locks ....................................................28
Automatic Folding Mirrors..............................................43
Automatic Headlights .....................................................50
Automatic Tailgate Release ........................................... 76
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......................... 61
Automatic Transmission .....................................141
, 399
Adding Fluid............................................................. 399
Fluid And Filter Change...........................................399
Fluid Change ........................................................... 399
Fluid Level Check...........................................397
, 398
Fluid Type .......................................................399
, 448
Shifting..................................................................... 144
Special Additives.....................................................397
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ...............142
AutoPark ....................................................................... 126
AUX Camera..................................................................196
Auxiliary Driving Systems ............................................. 301
Axle Fluid.................................................... 399
, 400, 448
Axle Lubrication ...................................................399
, 400
B
Back Up Camera...........................................................190
Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System .......................................157
Battery..................................................................116
, 380
Blanket.....................................................................134
Charging System Light............................................ 116
Keyless Key Fob Replacement................................. 18
Battery Saver Feature .................................................... 53
Bed Divider ..................................................................... 85
Bed Step ......................................................................... 78
Belts, Seat..................................................................... 346
Blind Spot Monitoring ..................................................301
11
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 455
456
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing ................................ 266
Body Builders Guide .......................................................10
Body Mechanism Lubrication...................................... 391
B-Pillar Location ........................................................... 420
Brake Assist System .................................................... 296
Brake Control System .................................................. 296
Brake Fluid .......................................................... 397
, 448
Brake System ......................................................397
, 438
Fluid Check.............................................................. 397
Master Cylinder....................................................... 397
Parking .................................................................... 138
Warning Light.......................................................... 115
Brake/Transmission Interlock..................................... 141
Bulb Replacement ....................................................... 410
Bulbs, Light.......................................................... 348
, 410
C
Cab Top Clearance Lights............................................ 415
Camera ......................................................................... 190
Camera, AUX................................................................. 196
Camera, Rear ......................................................190
, 191
Camera, Trailer Surround View ................................... 196
Capacities, Fluid........................................................... 444
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine).............................................................. 377
Power Steering........................................................ 173
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)................................... 396
Car Washes .................................................................. 434
Carbon Monoxide Warning.......................................... 348
Cargo Light ...................................................................... 52
CD ..................................................................................261
Cellular Phone...............................................................288
Center High Mounted Stop Light .................................414
Center Seat Storage Compartment...............................63
Charge Air Cooler ..........................................................396
Chart, Tire Sizing...........................................................417
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) ......124
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety................................346
Checks, Safety ..............................................................346
Child Restraint ..............................................................330
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ..........................................................333
Child Seat Installation................................... 340
, 341
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .................339
Infant And Child Restraints.....................................331
Locating The LATCH Anchorages............................337
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children...............334
Older Children And Child Restraints.......................332
Seating Positions.....................................................334
Clean Air Gasoline ........................................................440
Cleaning
Wheels .....................................................................427
Climate Control ...............................................................56
Automatic................................................................... 56
Manual .......................................................................59
Cold Weather Operation...............................................128
Compact Spare Tire......................................................426
Connected Services..........................272
, 273, 275, 284
Contract, Service ..........................................................451
Controls .........................................................................253
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap)..........................396
Cooling System .............................................................394
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze).................................... 395
Coolant Level..................................................394
, 396
Cooling Capacity...................................................... 444
Disposal Of Used Coolant.......................................396
Drain, Flush, And Refill ...........................................394
Inspection................................................................ 396
Points To Remember .............................................. 396
Pressure Cap........................................................... 396
Radiator Cap............................................................396
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)........ 395
, 444, 446
Corrosion Protection ....................................................433
Cruise Control (Speed Control)...........................174
, 175
Cruise Light..........................................................122
, 123
Customer Assistance ...................................................449
Cybersecurity ................................................................225
D
Daytime Running Lights................................................. 50
Dealer Service .............................................................. 381
Defroster, Rear Window................................................. 59
Defroster, Windshield ...........................................59
, 346
Deleting A Phone ..........................................................266
Diagnostic System, Onboard .......................................123
Diesel Exhaust Brake ...................................................139
Diesel Fuel .................................................................... 442
Diesel Fuel Requirements ........................................... 442
Diesel Fuel System, Re-Priming .................................. 390
Differential, Limited Slip .............................................. 166
Dimmer Controls ............................................................ 54
Dipsticks
Power Steering ........................................................173
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 456
457
Disabled Vehicle Towing.............................................. 366
Disc Drive...................................................................... 261
Disconnecting............................................................... 266
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................................... 396
Disturb .......................................................................... 269
Door Ajar....................................................................... 116
Door Ajar Light.............................................................. 116
Door Locks
Automatic ...................................................................28
Doors................................................................................25
Draining Fuel/Water Separator Filter ......................... 387
Driver Memory Presets ................................................ 259
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ....................................................32
Driving
Off-Pavement .......................................................... 158
Off-Road .................................................................. 158
Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water.................................... 223
Dual Rear Wheels ............................................... 431
, 438
E
Electric Brake Control System..................................... 296
Anti-Lock Brake System ......................................... 295
Electronic Roll Mitigation ..............................297
, 301
Electrical Power Outlets..................................................69
Electronic Range Select (ERS) ...........................143
, 146
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ................................ 297
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light................... 116
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case.................. 148
, 151
Emergency Braking .............................................138
, 308
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck...................................365
Hazard Warning Flasher .........................................349
Jump Starting...........................................................361
Emission Control System Maintenance ......................124
Engine.........................................................377
, 378, 379
Air Cleaner ...............................................................382
Block Heater .................................................. 130
, 137
Break-In Recommendations...................................137
Compartment................................................. 378
, 379
Compartment Identification....................................377
Coolant (Antifreeze).................................................446
Exhaust Gas Caution...............................................348
Fails To Start............................................................128
Flooded, Starting .....................................................128
Fuel Requirements........................................ 440
, 444
Identification.................................................. 378
, 379
Idling.........................................................................134
Jump Starting...........................................................361
Oil ..........................................................381
, 444, 446
Oil Filler Cap.............................................................377
Oil Filter....................................................................382
Oil Reset...................................................................107
Oil Selection................................................... 381
, 444
Oil Synthetic.............................................................382
Overheating .............................................................364
Runaway ..................................................................199
Starting.....................................................................125
Enhanced Accident Response Feature............. 328
, 368
Entry System, Illuminated .............................................. 55
Ethanol ..........................................................................441
Exhaust Brake ..............................................................139
Exhaust Gas Cautions..................................................348
Exhaust System ......................................... 348
, 393, 400
Exterior Lighting.............................................................. 49
Exterior Lights........................................................49
, 348
F
Family Alerts ................................................................. 283
FAQ ................................................................................284
Features........................................................................275
Filters
Air Cleaner ...............................................................382
Air Conditioning................................................62
, 384
Engine Fuel.............................................................. 387
Engine Oil........................................................382
, 446
Engine Oil Disposal ................................................. 382
Flashers
Turn Signals.............................................52
, 122, 348
Flash-To-Pass.................................................................. 50
Flat Tire Stowage..........................................................358
Fluid Capacities ............................................................ 444
Fluid Leaks.................................................................... 348
Fluid Level Checks
Brake........................................................................397
Power Steering ........................................................173
Fluid, Brake................................................................... 448
Fog Lights............................................................... 52
, 413
Fold Flat Load Floor........................................................ 66
Fold-Flat Seats................................................................ 32
Forward Collision Warning ...........................................306
Four Wheel Drive ..........................................................148
11
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 457
458
Four-Way Hazard Flasher ............................................ 349
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ............................................... 365
Front And Rear ParkSense System............................. 183
Front Axle (Differential)................................................ 399
Fuel ...................................................................... 440
, 442
Adding.............................................................200
, 201
Additives.................................................................. 440
Clean Air .................................................................. 440
Diesel....................................................................... 442
Ethanol .................................................................... 441
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)................................................ 200
Filter......................................................................... 387
Gasoline .................................................................. 440
Light......................................................................... 118
Materials Added...................................................... 440
Methanol ................................................................. 441
Octane Rating ................................................ 440
, 446
Requirements .......................................440
, 442, 444
Specifications.......................................................... 442
Tank Capacity.......................................................... 444
Fueling .......................................................................... 201
Fuses ............................................................................ 403
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ..................................45
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............................................. 200
Gasoline, Clean Air....................................................... 440
Gasoline, Reformulated............................................... 440
Gauges
Voltage..................................................................... 133
Gear Ranges................................................................. 144
Gear Selector Override ................................................ 362
Getting Started .............................................................273
Glass Cleaning ..............................................................437
Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................................205
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating........................................204
Guide
Body Builders.............................................................10
GVWR.............................................................................203
H
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or
Shallow Standing Water ....................................223
Hazard Warning Flashers.............................................349
Head Restraints ..............................................................36
Head Rests......................................................................36
Headlights .....................................................................411
Automatic High Beam ...............................................50
Cleaning ...................................................................434
High Beam .................................................................50
Lights On Reminder................................................... 51
Passing.......................................................................50
Switch.........................................................................49
Heated Mirrors................................................................45
Heated Seats .................................................................. 34
Heater, Engine Block....................................................137
Hill Descent Control......................................................299
Hill Descent Control Indicator......................................299
Hill Start Assist..............................................................300
Hitches
Trailer Towing ..........................................................208
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .................................. 45
Hood Prop ....................................................................... 75
Hood Release ................................................................. 75
Hub Caps ...................................................................... 360
I
Idle-Up Feature .............................................................135
Ignition ............................................................................ 20
Switch ........................................................................ 20
Illuminated Entry ............................................................ 55
Inside Rearview Mirror .......................................... 38
, 349
Instrument Cluster ............... 97
, 98, 99, 100, 101, 104
Display .....................................................................104
Engine Oil Reset......................................................107
Instrument Cluster Display
Driver Assist............................................................. 107
Fuel Economy.......................................................... 109
Off Road...................................................................108
Speedometer...........................................................107
Trip ........................................................................... 109
Vehicle Info.............................................................. 108
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................................. 436
Integrated Trailer Brake Control..................................213
Interior Appearance Care............................................. 435
Interior Lights.................................................................. 53
Intervention Regeneration Strategy...................111
, 390
Introduction .................................................................. 272
Inverter Outlet (115V) .................................................... 70
iPod/USB/MP3 Control.................................................. 68
J
Jack Location................................................................352
Jacking And Tire Changing
b
.................................... 352
Jump Starting ...............................................................361
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 458
459
K
Key Fob
Panic Alarm ................................................................18
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........................19
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) .........18
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) ............19
Keyless Enter 'n Go™................................... 26
, 125, 129
Passive Entry..............................................................26
Keys .................................................................................17
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals ......................................52
Lane Change Assist ........................................................52
LaneSense.................................................................... 187
Latches ......................................................................... 348
Hood ...........................................................................75
Lead Free Gasoline...................................................... 440
Leaks, Fluid .................................................................. 348
Life Of Tires .................................................................. 424
Light Bulbs........................................................... 348
, 410
Lights ............................................................................ 348
Air Bag ...................................................115
, 323, 346
Automatic High Beam................................................50
Brake Assist Warning ............................................. 298
Brake Warning ........................................................ 115
Bulb Replacement .................................................. 410
Cab Top Clearance ................................................. 415
Cargo ................................................................ 52
, 121
Center Mounted Stop ............................................. 414
Courtesy/Reading......................................................53
Cruise ............................................................. 122
, 123
Daytime Running.......................................................50
ECO...........................................................................122
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator..........116
Exterior..............................................................49
, 348
Fog.................................................................. 122
, 413
Four Wheel Drive Indicator .....................................155
Hazard Warning Flasher .........................................349
Headlights........................................................... 49
, 50
High Beam .................................................................50
Hill Descent Control Indicator.................................299
Illuminated Entry .......................................................55
Interior........................................................................53
LaneSense...................................118
, 119, 122, 123
Lights On Reminder................................................... 51
Low Fuel...................................................................118
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine)....................118
NEUTRAL ..................................................................121
Park ..........................................................................122
Passing.......................................................................50
Seat Belt Reminder.................................................117
Security Alarm..........................................................117
Service .....................................................................410
Side Marker .............................................................416
Snowplow.................................................................121
Traction Control .......................................................298
Trailer Hitch ............................................................... 52
Transfer Case ..........................................................155
Turn Signals..........................52
, 122, 348, 411, 414
Warning Instrument Cluster Descriptions..............116
Limited-Slip Differential ......................................166
, 400
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode...................................114
Load Shed Battery Saver On ....................................... 114
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction.........................114
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ......................... 114
Loading Vehicle ............................................................ 203
Tires ......................................................................... 420
Locks
Automatic Door ......................................................... 28
Child Protection......................................................... 28
Power Door ................................................................ 26
Low Tire Pressure System............................................ 309
Lubrication, Body..........................................................391
Lug Nuts/Bolts ............................................................. 438
M
Maintenance................................................................... 75
Maintenance Free Battery ........................................... 380
Maintenance Plan ........................................................373
Maintenance Schedule.......................................369
, 373
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) ......118
, 124
Manage My Account..................................................... 284
Manual
Park Release ........................................................... 363
Service .....................................................................453
Media Hub ...................................................................... 68
Media Mode.................................................................. 261
Memory Seat .................................................................. 31
Memory Settings ............................................................ 31
Methanol....................................................................... 441
11
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 459
460
Midline instrument Cluster — Gas Engine
b
..............93
Mirror, Digital Rearview ..................................................39
Mirror, Digital Trailer Camera.........................................39
Mirrors .............................................................................38
Electric Powered ........................................................42
Heated........................................................................45
Memory.......................................................................31
Outside .......................................................................41
Rearview........................................................... 38
, 349
Trailer Towing.............................................................41
Mobile App.................................................................... 273
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle........................................................................12
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.................................... 309
Mopar Parts.................................................................. 452
MP3 Control ....................................................................68
Multi-Function Control Lever ..........................................49
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period ....................................... 137
Noise Control
Maintenance........................................................... 400
Tampering Prohibited ............................................. 401
Noise Emission Warranty ...................................400
, 401
O
Occupant Restraints .................................................... 315
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................................... 440
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road)........................ 158
, 224
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement)........................ 158
, 224
Oil Filter, Change.......................................................... 382
Oil Filter, Selection........................................................382
Oil Life Reset
b
..........................................................107
Oil Pressure Light..........................................................117
Oil Reset ........................................................................107
Oil, Engine ........................................................... 381
, 446
Capacity ...................................................................444
Dipstick ....................................................................380
Disposal ...................................................................382
Filter ............................................................... 382
, 446
Filter Disposal..........................................................382
Identification Logo...................................................381
Materials Added To .................................................382
Pressure Warning Light...........................................117
Recommendation.......................................... 381
, 444
Synthetic ..................................................................382
Viscosity ...................................................................444
Onboard Diagnostic System.........................................123
Operating Precautions..................................................123
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual.......................................................453
Outside Rearview Mirrors............................................... 41
Overdrive .......................................................................147
Overdrive OFF Switch ...................................................147
Overheating, Engine .....................................................364
P
Paint Care......................................................................433
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To
A Mobile Phone
b
......................................................265
Panic Alarm ..................................................................... 18
Parking Brake ...............................................................138
ParkSense System, Rear..............................................183
Passive Entry .................................................................. 26
Pedals, Adjustable.......................................................... 38
Pedestrian Warning System ........................................308
Pets ...............................................................................346
Phone Mode ................................................................. 263
Pickup Box ...................................................................... 79
Pinch Protection ............................................................. 75
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ....................... 420
Power
Distribution Center (Fuses) .................................... 403
Door Locks................................................................. 26
Folding Mirrors .......................................................... 42
Mirrors ....................................................................... 42
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)...................... 69
, 70
Outside Mirror Lights ................................................ 44
Seats.......................................................................... 33
Side Steps ................................................................. 26
Sliding Rear Window................................................. 74
Steering ............................................................ 42
, 173
Sunroof ...................................................................... 74
Windows .................................................................... 72
Power Seats
Down.......................................................................... 33
Forward...................................................................... 33
Rearward ................................................................... 33
Recline....................................................................... 34
Tilt .............................................................................. 33
Up............................................................................... 33
Power Steering Fluid ....................................................448
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts................................321
Presets ..........................................................................259
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 460
461
Pretensioners
Seat Belts................................................................ 322
Profile Settings............................................................. 228
Programmable Features.............................................. 226
R
Radial Ply Tires............................................................. 423
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)................394
, 396
Radio
Presets..................................................................... 259
Settings ................................................................... 226
Radio Controls.............................................................. 253
Radio Mode .................................................................. 253
Radio Operation ..................................................253
, 288
Radio Remote Controls................................................ 253
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .........................................56
RamBox Cargo Storage...................................................82
Ramp Travel Index ....................................................... 159
Rear Axle (Differential)........................................ 399
, 400
Rear Camera ................................................................ 191
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ..........................................81
Rear Cross Path ........................................................... 304
Rear ParkSense System .............................................. 183
Rear Seat Reminder Alert............................................ 296
Rear Window, Sliding......................................................74
Recreational Towing .................................................... 219
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ................. 221
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N)............. 222
Reformulated Gasoline................................................ 440
Refrigerant.................................................................... 384
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ................................... 273
Release, Hood.................................................................75
Release, Tailgate ............................................................ 76
Reminder, Seat Belt .....................................................316
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock................ 278
, 284
Remote Features, Horn And Lights .............................279
Remote Features, Starting................................. 278
, 286
Remote Keyless Entry
Panic Alarm................................................................18
Programming Additional Key Fobs ........................... 19
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control.......................253
Remote Start (Diesel) .....................................................24
Remote Start (Gasoline)................................................. 22
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode............................................22
Replacement Bulbs ......................................................410
Replacement Tires........................................................424
Reporting Safety Defects .............................................452
Restraints, Child ...........................................................330
Restraints, Head .............................................................36
Roadside Assistance .......................................... 279
, 285
Rotation, Tires...............................................................430
S
Safety.............................................................................252
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle.......................................346
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ....................................347
Safety Defects, Reporting ............................................452
Safety Features.............................................................252
Safety Information, Tire................................................416
Safety Tips.....................................................................346
Safety, Exhaust Gas......................................................348
Satellite Radio...............................................................255
Saved Radio Stations...................................................259
Schedule, Maintenance...............................................369
Seat Belt Reminder ......................................................117
Seat Belts.............................................................316
, 346
Adjustable Shoulder Belt........................................319
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage.................. 319
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage..........319
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)........................322
Child Restraints....................................................... 330
Energy Management Feature................................. 322
Extender...................................................................321
Front Seat.......................................................316
, 318
Inspection................................................................ 346
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................................318
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................................319
Operating Instructions ............................................318
Pregnant Women .................................................... 321
Pretensioners ..........................................................322
Reminder .................................................................316
Seat Belt Extender .................................................. 321
Seat Belt Pretensioner............................................ 322
Seat Belt Reminder.................................................316
Untwisting Procedure.............................................. 319
Seat Belts Maintenance .............................................. 436
Seats ........................................................................ 32
, 33
Adjustment ......................................................... 32
, 33
Easy Entry .................................................................. 34
Folding Floor.............................................................. 66
Head Restraints ........................................................ 36
Memory...................................................................... 31
Power ......................................................................... 33
Rear Folding .............................................................. 32
Tilting ......................................................................... 32
11
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 461
462
Security Alarm ....................................................... 24, 117
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze)................................ 446
Send & Go ........................................................... 280
, 285
Sentry Key (Immobilizer).................................................20
Service Assistance ....................................................... 449
Service Contract........................................................... 451
Service Manuals........................................................... 453
Settings, Audio ............................................................. 259
Shift Lever Override ..................................................... 362
Shifting.......................................................................... 140
Automatic Transmission................................141
, 144
Transfer Case.......................................................... 154
Transfer Case, Shifting Into
Transfer Case Neutral (N) ................................. 221
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of
Transfer Case Neutral (N) ................................. 222
Side Steps, Power ...........................................................26
Signals, Turn................................................. 52
, 122, 348
Sirius Satellite Radio ................................................... 255
Favorites.................................................................. 258
Replay...................................................................... 257
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM ........................................................ 258
Favorites.................................................................. 258
Replay...................................................................... 257
Sliding Rear Window, Power...........................................74
Smart Watch................................................................. 284
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)........................................... 427
Snow Plow .................................................................... 217
Snow Tires .................................................................... 425
SOS Call ...............................................................275
, 284
Spare Tires .................................................425
, 426, 427
Speed Control
Accel/Decel..............................................................175
Cancel ......................................................................175
Resume....................................................................175
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .......................... 174
, 175
Stabilizer/Sway Bar System.........................................157
Starting................................................................ 125
, 128
Automatic Transmission ............................... 125
, 129
Button.........................................................................20
Cold Weather ...........................................................128
Engine Block Heater................................................130
Engine Fails To Start ...............................................128
Starting And Operating .................................................125
Starting Procedures............................................ 125
, 128
Starting Procedures (Diesel Engines)..........................128
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) .............................125
Steering
Power .......................................................................173
Tilt Column.................................................................29
Wheel, Heated ........................................................... 29
Wheel, Tilt ..................................................................29
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ....................................253
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System ....................253
Steps, Power Side........................................................... 26
Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................................. 282
, 286
Storage ............................................................................ 62
Storage Compartment, Center Seat..............................63
Storage, Vehicle.....................................................62
, 433
Store Radio Presets......................................................259
Storing Your Vehicle .....................................................433
Sun Roof................................................................... 74
, 75
Sunglasses Storage........................................................65
Sunshade Operation.......................................................75
Surround View Camera ................................................191
Sway Control, Trailer .................................................... 301
Synthetic Engine Oil ..................................................... 382
T
Tailgate Removal............................................................ 76
Tailgate, Electronic Lowering......................................... 76
Telescoping Steering Column........................................ 29
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ......................... 61
Tilt
Down.......................................................................... 33
Up............................................................................... 33
Tilt Steering Column....................................................... 29
Tip Start................................................................125
, 129
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........................ 420
Tire Markings................................................................416
Tire Safety Information ................................................416
Tires..........................................347
, 421, 425, 426, 432
Aging (Life Of Tires)................................................. 424
Air Pressure ............................................................. 421
Chains...................................................................... 427
Compact Spare........................................................426
Dual.................................................................431
, 438
General Information............................. 421
, 425, 426
High Speed ..............................................................423
Inflation Pressure....................................................422
Life Of Tires ............................................................. 424
Load Capacity.......................................................... 420
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ............119
, 309
Quality Grading........................................................432
Radial....................................................................... 423
Replacement ...........................................................424
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 462
463
Rotation................................................................... 430
Safety.............................................................. 416
, 421
Sizes ........................................................................ 417
Snow Tires............................................................... 425
Spare Tires ............................................425
, 426, 427
Spinning .................................................................. 423
Trailer Towing.......................................................... 213
Tread Wear Indicators............................................ 424
Wheel Nut Torque................................................... 438
To Open Hood..................................................................75
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................................... 208
Tonneau Cover ...................................................... 86
, 434
Tonneau Cover Cleaning ............................................. 434
Torque Converter Clutch.............................................. 147
Towing.................................................................. 204
, 366
Disabled Vehicle ..................................................... 366
Guide ....................................................................... 208
Recreational............................................................ 219
Weight...................................................................... 208
Towing Behind A Motorhome ...................................... 219
Traction......................................................................... 223
Traction Control............................................................ 301
Trailer Reverse Steering Control ................................. 209
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ........................................... 301
Trailer Towing ............................................................... 204
Hitches .................................................................... 208
Minimum Requirements ........................................ 212
Mirrors ........................................................................41
Tips .......................................................................... 217
Trailer And Tongue Weight..................................... 208
Wiring....................................................................... 215
Trailer Towing Guide.....................................................208
Trailer Weight................................................................208
Transfer Case................................................................400
Electronically Shifted..................................... 148
, 151
Fluid..........................................................................448
Transmission.................................................................141
Automatic.............................................. 141
, 144, 397
Fluid..........................................................................448
Maintenance............................................................397
Shifting.....................................................................140
Transporting Pets .........................................................346
Tread Wear Indicators ..................................................424
Turn Signals ........................................ 52
, 122, 411, 414
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features................................................268
Things You Should Know About
Your Uconnect Phone ........................................270
Uconnect Phone ................................................. 264
, 265
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Call Currently In Progress ..................................269
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress.............................268
Bluetooth Communication Link..............................272
Call Continuation.....................................................270
Call Controls.............................................................268
Call Termination ......................................................270
Cancel Command....................................................265
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing .................................266
Help Command .......................................................265
Join Calls..................................................................270
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite......... 267
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is
In Progress ......................................................... 269
Managing Your Favorites........................................ 267
Natural Speech .......................................................264
Operation.................................................................264
Overview ..................................................................263
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone.... 265
Phonebook Download............................................. 267
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold............................ 269
Power-Up..................................................................272
Recent Calls ............................................................ 268
Redial....................................................................... 270
To Remove A Favorite............................................. 267
Toggling Between Calls...........................................269
Touch-Tone Number Entry...................................... 268
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone..............270
Voice Command...................................................... 270
Uconnect Settings ........................................................226
Customer Programmable Features ......................... 26
Passive Entry Programming ..................................... 26
Uconnect System..........................................................250
Uconnect Voice Command ............................................ 30
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ........................................432
Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) —
If Equipped
b
............................................................... 45
Unleaded Gasoline .......................................................440
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt..................................319
USB.................................................................................. 68
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area......................................... 81
11
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 463
464
V
Vehicle Finder......................................................280, 285
Vehicle Health Alert ..................................................... 282
Vehicle Health Report.................................................. 282
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........................... 438
Vehicle Loading ................................................... 203
, 420
Vehicle Maintenance ................................................... 381
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations..................................12
Vehicle Notifications .................................................... 283
Vehicle Settings............................................................ 226
Vehicle Storage ..................................................... 62
, 433
Ventilated Seats..............................................................35
Voice Recognition System (VR) ......................................30
Voltmeter ...................................................................... 133
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) .....118
Warranty Information ...................................................452
Washers, Windshield....................................................380
Washing Vehicle ...........................................................434
Water
Driving Through .......................................................223
Water Separator
Diesel Fuel ...............................................................387
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care .........................................427
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim..........................................427
Wheel Covers ................................................................360
Wi-Fi...............................................................................281
Winch.............................................................................166
Accessories..............................................................167
Operation .................................................................168
Rigging Techniques .................................................172
Usage .......................................................................166
Wind Buffeting ................................................................ 74
Window Fogging ............................................................. 62
Windows.......................................................................... 72
Power ......................................................................... 72
Rear Sliding ............................................................... 74
Reset Auto-Up............................................................ 73
Windshield Defroster ...................................................346
Windshield Washers ............................................. 55
, 380
Fluid .........................................................................380
Windshield Wiper Blades............................................. 391
Windshield Wipers.......................................................... 55
Wipers Blade Replacement .........................................391
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ................................................... 56
Wireless Charging Pad ................................................... 72
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 464
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, resulting in an accident and personal injury.
FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices,
such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Ram brand vehicle and to provide a convenient reference for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information on accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit mopar.com/om (USA),
owners.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Ram brand dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, Radio Instruction Manual and
Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by calling 1-866-726-4636
or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet or purchase a
replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you
are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or use public transportation.
WARNING
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
SECOND EDITION V1
23_DJD2_OM_EN_USC
©2022 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Ram est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,
RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
OWNERS.MOPAR.CA
CANADA
MOPAR.COM/OM
USA
Whether it is providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you will find the app an important
extension of your Ram vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go
directly to the App Store
®
or Google Play
®
Store and enter the search keyword “ram toolbox” (U.S. residents only).
